1965-1966 Catalog by Pacific Lutheran University Archives

Pacific Lutheran University Bulletin / 1965

Pacific Lutheran University Bulletin: AnnouJlcements for 1965-66 Catalog for 1964-65

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Pages

School Calendar

The University

The Campus

Admissions

Finances

Financial Aid .

Student Affairs

Summer Session Late Mternoon and Evening Classes Academic Procedures

Academic Organization .

Academic Preparation

Courses of Instruction

The Register

151

Index .

173

Objectives of The University Pacific Lutheran University, born of the Reformation spirit, main足 tains the privilege of exploration and learning in all areas of the arts, sciences, and religion. The basie - concern of Martin Luther was rell:gious, but his rejection of church tradition as primary authority, and his own free search for religious truth, served in effect to liberate the modern mind in its quest for all truth. The total impact of Luther's stand has permanently shaped the modern world and helped provide the modern university with its basic methodology. Pacific Lutheran University is a community of professing Christian scholars dedicated to a philosophy of liberal education. The major goals of the institution are to inculcate a respect for learning and truth, to free the mind from the confinements of ignorance and preju足 dice, to organize the powers of clear thought and expression, to preserve and extend knowledge, to help men achieve professional competence, and to establish lifelong habits of study, reflection, and learning. Through an emphasis on the liberating arts, the university seeks to develop creative, reflective, and responsible persons. At the same time, the acquisition of specialized information and technical skill is recognized as a condition of successful involvement in the modem world. The university seeks to develop the evaluative and spiritual capacities of the student and to acquaint him honestly with rival claims to the true and the good. It encourages the pursuit of rich and ennobZ,:ng experiences and the development of significant personhood through an appreciation of man's intellectual, artistic. cultural, and lUl.tural surroundings. The university affirms its funda足 mental obligation to confront liberally educated men with the chal足 lenges of Christian fa.ith and to instill in them a true sense of vocation.

By providing a rich variety of social experiences, Pacific Lutheran University seeks to develop in the student a joy in abundant living, a feeling for the welfare and personal integrit)' of others, good taste, and a sense of soC拢al propriety and adequacy. Distinguishing between personal Christian ethics and normal social controls, the university adopts only such rules as seem necessary for the welfaIe of the educational community. The physical development of the student is regarded as an integral part of his liberal education. Hence the university encourages par路 ticipation in physical actl:vities and respect for health and fitness. Professing a concern for the entire nature of man, the faCILlty of the university encourages wholesome development of Christian faith and life by providing

0 pportu.nities

for worship and meditation,

offering systematic studies of religion and encouraging free investi路 gation and discussion of basic religious questions. The University believes the essence of Christianity to be personal faith in Cod as Creator and Redeemer, and it believes that Sitch a faith born of the Holy Spirit generates integrative power capable of guiding men to illuminating perspectives and worthy pu.rposes. The university com颅 munity confesses the faith that the ultimate meaning and purpose of human life are to be discovered in the person and work of Jesus Christ. As an educational arm of the Church, Pacific Lutheran: University provides a loClLS for the fruitful interplay of Christian faith and all of hltman learning and culture, and

such holds it a responsibility

to discover, explore, and develop new frontiers. Believing that aU truth is Cod's truth, the university, in achieving its educational and spiritual goals, maintains the right and indeed the obligation of facltlty and students to engage in an unbiased search for truth in all realms.

S M

JaH.

l ·1 .i (l

2.J 24 2.i Z6

lII.11

I')

4.,

.�

9 10 II 12 1.1

II Li 16 17 I S

MAY

6 211

JUNE

7 Ii

I.l 1·1 Li 20 21 22

I) 10 II 12

13 14 Li 16 17 IS 19 2U 21 2Z 23 24 2.; 26 27 2s 2'1 3U

I) IU II 12

14 IS 16 17IS 19 ZII

JULY

12 I.l 19 2n

14 Li

') In 16 17

2 .1 24

21i Z9 JO .11

2.i 21l 27 2S 21) .HI .11

'} 10

II 12 I.l 14IS 16 17

AUG.

2.; 26 27 21i 29 .10

N.1O,11

4567 8

910II 12 IJ 14 15 16 17 IS 19 202 I Z2

MAY

13 H 15 16 17 18 19

9 10

6 78

12 13 14

9 10

16 17 18

26 27 28 29 30

JULV

2021 22 ZJ 24 25 26 17 28 29 303I I 3

45678

67 S

17 18 192021 22 23

I 78

9 10 II

'65

7 Ii

11 12 I.J 14 Li 16

17 IS 192021 Z2 2.J

24 2;; 26 Zi 2K 21) JI)

NO�.

7 Ii

I) IU II 12 I.l

14 I;; 16 17 I K 19 20 21 22 2.1 24 25 26 27 2S 29

DEC.

30 I

7 Ii

12 I.J 14 IS 16 17 Iii

II) 2U

21 22 2.J24 25

T W T

•

6 78

910

SEP II 12 IJ 14151617 IS 192021 ZZ ZJ Z4 I 2

OCl.

45678

9 10II 12 IJ 14 15

16 17 18 19202 I ZZ

23 24 25 26 27 28 29

,JI

AUG.

10II 12 13 14 15 16 24 25 26 27 28 29 30

2 9

303 I I

m. 10 II 12 13 14 15 16 17 IS 192021 ZZ 23 24 25 26Z7ZB 29 30

OCl. IU

27 28

5 67 12 13 14

19 2021 22 23 24 25

202I 22 23 24 25 26

678 910II 12 13 14 IS 161718 19

25 26 Z7 2S 29 30

JUNE

12 13 14 I.i 16 17 IS

1516 17 18 192021

26 27 21i 29 30 J I

9 10 II 12

Z6 li 2S 2') 3U

29 30 3 I

303I

22 23 Z4 25 26 27 28

23 24 25 26 Z7 28 29

678

I 8

91011 12 I.l 14 I h 17 Iii 19 20 21 2.l 24 2.i 26 27 21i

IX 192021 22 2.1 24

4 .i

21 Z2 2.1 24 2j 26 27

4 .i

M T

.11 I

1.1

19 lU 21 22 23 24 25

21 Z2 2.1 21 2.i 26 27

7 Ii

SEP.

2S 29

MAR

FES.

T W T

20 21 22 23

JAN.

24 2.i 26 27 2X 2'} .HI

I APR

,J 4 .i ') 10 II 12 16 17 IK II)

MAR.

10 II 12 I.l 14 Li 16 17 IS

FEB.

T W

3 45 6 910 II 12 13

NOV.

9 10 II 12

13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2021 2Z 23 24 25 26 Z7 28 Z9 30

14 15 16 17 18 1920

I 8

4 5 678 910 12 13 14 15 16 17

DEC. II

2I 22 23 24 25 26 27

18 19 202I 2Z 2J 24

28 29 303 I

25 26 Z7 28 29 30 3 I

'66

School Calendar 1965-66 ummer

eMion 1965

Rq!;i�lrat.ioll 1J('�jn� at R:.10 a.lll.

Fridav, June 18

Clas...;e� b<"g:ill at 7 :30 a.m. F'i,>! Tcrlll "'H[' SI�l"Olld rr\�rm (:Ia�:-;.{':-; I)("�ill 7::30 SUII""cr S""ioll dooCs

"onday, JUlie 21 W".I'H'"lay, July :2l Thursday, July 22

d,lI!.

Friday, Augu,t 20

First Semester 1965-66 Sunday, S ep t embe r 12· Wednesday, September 15

Orientation day"

Reg ist r a tion

Monday, September 13 - Wednesday, Se pte mber 15 .Tlnm-day, September 16

Cla"ses begin 7 :50 a.m.

Wedne"day, September 29

Last date for adding a course Last dale for discontinuing a rour!-'e

Wednesday, October 13

without rc(�eiying a grade

Friday, Novemb er 12

l\-1id-scmester Tlranksgivil1g Recess b egins 12 :30 p.m.

.. Wednesday, November 24

Tlranbgiving Reeess ends 7�50 a.m.

Monday, November 29

Christmas Reec,,, begins 10:00 p.m.

. .

Friday, December 17

1966 Christma, ReI'."" ends 7 :50 a.m.

_ _

Monday, January

Monday, January 17· Friday, January 21

Examinations

.. Friday , January 21

Semester end"

Second Semester 1965·66 Monday, January 24

Registration of new students. Cla"e:; begin 7:50

Wednesday, January 26 Thursday, January 27

a.m.

La,t date for adding a eourse

Wednesday, F eb ru ary 9

Last date for discontinuing a course without receiving

Wednesday, February 23

grade

Friday, March 25

l\-1id-seme,ter

Ea,ter Rcce,s begin,; 10 :00 p l11..

Wednesday, April

LHer Rece�s ends 7 :50 a.lll.

Wednesday, April 13

Examinations

Monday, May 23· Friday, May 27

l3accalaureate Service 11 :00 a.m.

Su n day, May 29

COlllmencement 3 :30 p.m.

Sunday, May 29

The Univer ity HISTORY Founded i n 1890 by the Rev. Bjug Harstad, Pacific Luthepan University has occupied the same location since its begilininp;. Although named Pacific Lutheran University, the i nstitution opened a s an aeademy on October 14, 1894 and became a junior college i n 1921. Ten years later, it was organized i n to a three-year normal school, which became a college of education in 1939. In 1941, still a small and struggli ng institution, it assumed the role o f a college of liberal arts. It was known as Pacific Lutheran College from 1920 until 1960, when, because of a restructuring of its organization, it again assumed its original name, Pacific Lutheran University. Two Lutheran institutions have merp:ed with the University-Columbia Col lef!:e of Everett, Washinf!:ton in 1920, and Spokane College of Spokane, Wash inp:ton i n 1930. Beginning about 1945, the University experienced p:reat growth, benefitinp: from dynam ic leadership, a s well as from factors which led to the expansion of higher education on a national scale. Today it operates with a n academic struc ture embracing a College of Arts and Sciences and a College of Professional and Graduate Studi es. The latter includes a Scbool of Business Admi nistration, a School of Education, a School of Fine and A pplied Arts, and a School of 'ursing. A D i vision of Graduate Studies offers work leading to a Master's degree. Robert l\Iortvedt, who was elected i n 1962, is the eighth presi dent of the University. Other presidents, all deceased, were: Bjug Harstad, 1890-95, 189798; Ole Gronsberg, 1895-97; Nils 1. Hong, 1898-1918; 10hn U. Xavier ( acting), 1920-21; Olaf 1. Ordal, 1921-28; Oscar A. Tingelstad, 1928-43; Seth C. East void, 1943-62.

LOCATION cstled in the southern reaches of Puget Sound in the heart of the Evergreen Play�round lies Tacoma, Washin�ton, a metropolitan area of some 250,000 population. The University is located in Parkland, one of Tacoma's uni ncorpo rated suburbs. The campus is seven miles south of the cily center and is adjacent t o one o f the main arterials, the Ml. Rainier hi ghway. Towering mountain peaks flank the beautiful natural setting of the Puget Sound country. Hundreds o f streams coursc down to Puget Soun d throngh ever green forest slopes of the Olympic Mountains on the west and the Cascade Range on the east. Scores of lakes dot the area. The Evergreen Playground is ideal for boating, skiing, swi mmi ng, hiking, fishing and hunting.

)

OWNERSHIP AND SUPPORT The University is owned and operated by Pacific Lutheran University, Tnc., a Washington corporation whose purpose is to maintain a Christian institution of hi�her learnin�. Membership of this corporation coincides with the member· ship of North Pacific District of the American Lutheran Church and the memo bership of that portion of the ALC's Rocky Mountain District which is located in Idaho and Montana west of the Continental Divide. The annllal meeting of the corporation is held in annual convention of the North Pacific District.

conjunction with the

Votinl': members include the members of tbe Board of Regents, and the pastors and lay delegates of congregations in the constituent area. The University receives regular financial support from the American Lutheran Church, the Pacific Northwest Synod of the Lutheran Church in America and from the Pacific Lutheran University Alumni Association. In addition to Church assistance, the University receives considerable support from individuals, organizations and husinesses throughout the nation and world.

GOVERNMENT The policy-making and governing body of the University is the Board of Regents. On the basis of recommendations made by the President, it charts a course for the development of the total program of the University and strives to provide essential funds. Tbe University corporation's constitution provides for 27 regents of whom 25 are elected for three-year terms. Fifteen regents represent the North Pacific and Rocky Mountain Districts of the Americau Lutheran Church, six are chosen by the Pacific Northwest Synod of the Lutheran Church in America, two repre sent the PLU Alumni Association, and two are chosen at large by the Board of Regents. The President of the University and the President of the North Pacific District are regents by virtue of their position.

ACCREDITATION Pacific Lutheran University is fully accredited by the Northwest Association of Secondary and Higher Schools as a four-year institution of higher education and by the Washington State Board of Education for teacher education. The University is accredited by the National Council for the Accreditation of Teacher Education for the preparation of elementary and secondary teachers with the Master's degree as the highest degree approved. The University is a member of the Association of American Colleges, the American Council on Education, the National Lutheran Educational Confer ence, and the Independent Colleges of Washington, Incorporated. It is approved by the Ameriean Chemical Society.

Association

University

Women and

by the

American

STUDENT BODY Approximately 3,000 students will be served by the University during the ClIrrent school year and summer session, Full-time enrollment each semester is majority of the ,tudt'nts cOllie from the S ta te of 30 s tat es and several foreign countries arc reprcsented. When it comes to religious a ffi li ati o n , the majority arc of the Lutheran faith, but some 20 other church groups are represented. al'ound

1,600.

Whilc the

Wa�hington, ab ou t

FACULTY The U n ivtT ,;ity ha" a fu l l-t i me teac hing faculty of 102 per,;on,;. There are, "orne 20 part-time teal' he!".,;, mOot of whom arc eonnected with the late afternoon and

Qu a li ti es expected of fuculty mem b<'I" include co mm itmen t to th c Ci"'i"lian faith, dee p eoncr:m for the individual stu dent, ':<cellent preparation in a r ec og n i z ed graduate school, and a desire and

evening program and the summe r session.

an ability to teach.

ALUMNI The

lumn i

Association numbers over 5,500 persons, l i vin g all over the

world. l\Iembers of the teaching p rofes sion c o m p r ise the largest sep;ment of the alumni. Hundreds are enp;ap;ed in the work of the Ch urc h a s pHstors, mission aries, p ari sh workers and other specialties_

PLU alum ni �erve their God, their

fellow men ancl their c ountr i es in a host of other professions and vocations.

mE CAMPUS Beautiful n atural surroundings blended with mode rn buildinp:s and fa cilities chamcterize the 126-acre campus of Pacific Lutheran_ Stately D ou p;las fir t re es, a vari ety of blooming and evergreen shrubs, lush green lawns and Rower heds set off the buildings and make the campus attractive the year around_ MHjestic

Mt. Rai n i e r, rising to an altitude of 14,410 feet ab out 30 miles away, domin ates the set ti ng . Campus o utdoor recreati onal facilit ies include a

c onrse , tennis courts, athletic fields, and

nine-hole, 2048-yard golf

swimming pool covered with

p l a st i c air house for year around use. \Iost of the University bui l di n g s are located on what is termed the "upper

campus." The "lower campus," below a slip;ht hill to the south, is the setting for a thl etic facilities, residence halls for men, for m a rried students_

dining hall and apartments

The main campus is bounded by South 121st Street on the north and South 127th Street on the south, by Park Avenue on the east and South "I" Street on t h e west_

UNIVERSITY BU ILDINGS A ad mic Tacoma- P i erce Administration Building, a two-story steel and concrete struc ture, was completed in 1960. It houses the admin istrat ive offices of the Univer sity, 21 classrooms, faculty office s, tudios and master control for closed ci rcuit television, and a chapel-au ditorium seat i ng 175 persons. The Library has reading rooms for 200 studen ts, stacks for 85,000 volu mes, classrooms and offices_ In addition to the mai n eollection of abou t 79,000 catalogued volumes, there are special collections, rare books and an archival collection of the development of Ihe Lu theran Church in the Pacific Northwest. The Science Hall, a three-story brick structure, was buil t in 1947 and added to in 1959_ It eontains laboratory, classroom, l ibra ry, museum, research and office fa .. ilities for the department, of biology, dwmi,try, geology an d physics. Memorial Gymnasium, built i n 1947, provides classrooms, and activity areas for the department of health and ph ysi ca l education, and aecommodations for intramural and i n tercollegiate athletics. There is seating for 2,700 spec tators in the gymnasium.

Eastvold Chapel, completed in 1952, seats 1,238 persons and is used for daily chapel, concerts, special events and plays. The multi-purpose structure also contai ns elassrooms, work areas, stage and a radio studio for the department of speech; studios, li brary, ensemble practice rooms and individual practice rooms for the department of music; a devotional chapel and oflices for the student congregation. Tbe Classroom Bui ldi ng, built in 1947, is a two-story brick veneer structure which has four classrooms, faculty offices, a stage, kitchen and photography laboratory.

The Art Building, a two-story frame building, contains classroom, laboratory and offices for the department of art. Stuen

Hall, a two-"tory converted re�idcn('.e,

hous(" fa cu l ty offices unci a

la boratory for the department of psychology. The Swilllllling Pool, c:o mp le ted i n April, 1965, has a swimming lIrea 42 by 75

:iO by 35 feet. S hower, locker and dn,,;;ing rooms are located i n tbe 133 by 145 foot ,trtl<:lure. feet a nd a diving area

Servic.es The College Union Tluilding, "ompleted in 1955 and added to in 1959, con tains a cafeteria, Chris Knutzen Fellowship Hall, bookstore, coffee shop, recrea tional and social lounges, ollices for student p ub lic ation s and government and a small d i n i ng room. Columbia Center, a two-story frame and masonry structure completed in 1962, contains a cafeteria, coffee shop, bakery and pro shop for the College

Golf Course_

The Student Health Center, a c.onverted residence, houses offices for the University dodors and nurses, out-patient treatment areas, and beds for 10 patients_ The Warehouse and Shops are used for the storage of equipment and the maintenance of the physical plant.

Residence Halls for Men J_ P_ PAueger Hall, completed in 1963, is a three-story building which accom modates 200 students. It has a large formal lounge, a recreation lounge and outdoor recreational facilities. Each wing has two study rooms and laundry facilities. Delta Hall, similar to Evergreen Court in construction, has 20 units for 40 dorm for jun iors and ,enion;.

lIlen. It i, an honor

Evergreen Court, a one·story frame complex, houses 69 ,;tudents. Its 23 Imits have private baths and individual outdoor entrances. A lounge and self-service laundry are attached.

I I. L. Foss Hall, to be completed in ,ummer of 1965, is s.imilar to Pflueger Hall in construction but arranged in 16 man units, each having its own study lounge and carpeted hallway. Tt will house 188 men. Ivy Cou rt, a one·sto ry frame complex of three wings, houses 83 students. It has a lounge with kitchen, and a selI-service laundry.

Residence Halls for Women Harstad Hall, a six-story solid brick building completely refurbished in recent years, accommodates 254 students. It has three lounges, a recreation room. self scrviee laundry and kitchen facilities. South Hall, a three-story brick and steel building built in 1955, accommo dates 130 students. [ts facilities include two large lounges with kitchens, two study lounges with small kitchens, a self-service laundry, and accommodations for commuting students. North Hall, a three-story brick and steel huilding buih in 1955, houses ll5 students. Its facilities include two large lounges with Ikitchens, two study, lounges and a self·service laundry. West Hall, a three·story brick and steel building completed in 1957, houses 122 students. Its facilities include a large lounge with kitchen, two study lounges with small kitchens, and a self-service laundry.

Olher Liying Units The President's Residence is a brick rambler located on the corner of Park Avenue and South 12.3rd Street. Cramer Cottage is a two-story frame horne used as the residence for the pastor of the student congregation. It is located on the corner of Park Avenue and Wheeler Street. University apartments are two- and three-bedroom one-story frame units for rcntal by married students.

Admissiolls The student hody at Pacific Lu theran Un iversity is carefully selected. The University adheres to the practice that every student accepted should possess the high academic and personal traits which experience has shown will enable him to succeed in college work. In judging the qualifications of a p p licants, the Committee on Adm issions usually adheres t o the following basic requirements : 1. Graduation

from an accredited high school or evidence of satisfactory work at another college o f recognized standing.

2. Satisfactory grade point a verage and satisfactory rank in high school graduating class.

:3. Satisfactory scores on the College Entrance Examination Board Scholastic A p t i t ude Test. This is not required of students transferri ng from other collp.ges. 4. Evidence of good moral character.

RECOMMENDED HIGH SCHOOL COURSE It is recommended, but not required, that the high school course of an a p p l i · cant includ e : English, 4 un its ; elementary algebra, 1 un i t ; p l a n e geometry, 1 unit: social stud ies, 2 uni ts; one foreign language, 2 units; one laboratory sc i e nce , 1 unit ; electiv es, 5 units.

ADMISSIONS PROCEDURES An a p plicant seeking admission should a ddress a letter to the Director of Admissions n,qnesting the necessary forms. A student planning to enroll for ei ther the first or second semester may submit his application for admission in October of the year preceding enrollment. The following credentials must be suhmitted:

I. A formal applicaeion. This shoul d be made on the standard three·page form designed for Washington i nstitutions of hi gher learning. Persons trans· ferring from another college need submi t only page one of this form. Tbese forms may be obtained from high school counselors ( for those living i n Wash ington ) or directly from the Director of Adm issions. A ten·dollar fee should accompany the application. This fee is not refundable if a student is aceepted. It will be returned if an application is rejected. Checks or money orders should be made payable' to Pacific Lu theran University and mailed to the D i rector o f Admissions. 2. Transcripe of Credie.�. For high school students this shotLld include grades for the first semester of the senior year. For transfer students this should include all college courses taken to date. 3. Referellces. Two character and academic references, p referably on the PLU form, shou l d be submitted from educators, pastors, or other qualified persons.

4. College Entrance Examination Board Test. All e nteri ng freshmen Sc h ol a stic Aptitude Test, and specify that the r esu lt s art' to be s e nt to PL . lnformation rep;ardinp; this examination m ay be ob tained from hi p:h school principals or guidance offices, or from the College Entranee Examination Boa rd , Box 1025, Be rkeley 12, California_ must take the CEEB'

5. PI.ysical Exanl;narion. Prior to regi;;tration, a stucient taki np; H 01' mo re hOtlr� f1u!:..;l takf� a phy�i('al examination given by his pcr�onal physician. The form for t hi:-\ f'x<1minalion i� �c:nt with tJlf', noti(,e of accept�lll(',t� for admi:-i:-:ion. Student,; will not be pcnlliU(;d to ref'ister until evidenCl' of the p hysi eal eX'"Jlinalion ha;; been receivcd by th" Student Health S"rvice_

6. Deposit. A deposit of �35_00 is required of all studen ts when they have been accepted for aJrni�sion_ If the student will be living on campus or in ni

v('l"sity ofT-campus h ou sin g, this fee is considered a room deposit. For stu dents

living at home, this is considered an advance payment of tuition_ Thi, deposit will bl: rrfunded if the student eancels his uJ'plication be fore July

fa l l ,emc�ter or bdore January 15 fo r the spring semester.

1 for the

Early Acceptance Policy: roilowinf' c"'"pletion of bis junior year in hig h ,,:hool an "pplicant may he ]It-Qvisionally a"'Tpted for udll,ission to Pacific Lutheran Unive.-sit,-, cuntingent

"pan satisfactory completion of his high ,.;chool eoursc. prov i dt,d he ranb in the

upper 25 pe rce nt of his eia,,", and otherwise complies wi th the a dmiss i on policy of the UnivPrsity_

Early Admissions Policy: A !;t1lrknt. "I,on n"'onHnendation of the high sch o o l principal, may be ·Jigible for t:arly admissions to Pacific Lutheran University, provided: 1. He ha, "omplt-Ied all f'radllation requirement;;, except f ull rc;;idence, and ":lnks in the upper t�n percent of his class: 2_ lIe is "",((red by Iris high sc hu ol administration tha t he may ob l ai n his high ,,:houl diploma upon the &ltisfactory compl e ti on of a spt,cified amount of acceptable college w ork : :3. lIe appears to posse,s the necessary emotional maturity. and 4. lIe o tlwrwis ' (-olllplies with the admi�sjon policy of the University.

Trnnsfer

ludents

Students desiring to t r ansfer from a.:credited in titutions of collegiate rank must submit to the D irecto r of Admissions: a formal application for admission ,

complete offi"iai transcripts in cl u di np; a .Intement of honorable dismissal, recommendations from two references, and a physical examinati on record.

1. Credit will be grante d for s ubj ec t s whi h meet th e requi rements of t he course h osen by the stu d e nt and for whi h the stu de nt has made g rades of not less than "C." 2. Credit for subjects in which the student has a grade of "0" will be with held until t h e student has successfully co m pleted one semester's work at the University.

3. C re d i t for courses taken at a jun ior college are tra nsferable if the course is co m pl e t ed while the st u de n t iR cIa. sified as a fresh man or sophomore. 4. In order to be a c and i d at e for a de gr e, th e student must take the final 30 se me ste r hours in residence. Adm ission to the Division o f Graduate Studies The pr o (: e du re for admi sion to the Division o f Graduate S tu dies in the section Academic Organization.

ou tl i n ed

Admission as a Special Student

The fo l l ow i n g persons, u pon securing consent of the C o mm i t te e on dlllis· sions, may he ad mit t ed as special students : 1. M ture, competent individuals who wish to s up p le m e n t the i r previous edu· ca ti o n and practical experience with a d di t i o n al formal education, hut who do not desire to pursue a degree program. 2. Mature i n dividuals who a re ineligible for a dm i ssi o n as regula r students and who are deemed competent hy vi rtue of their demonstrated a b i l i ty, or by their practical t ra i n i n g and experie nce, to benefit from the COlm;es they desire to take. Students in t h is cate gory may apply for admission as regular students after they have sucees..'ii ully removed the deficiencies in thei r earlier preparation. Auditor A regula r or special ,tudent lTlay a u d i t a (:ou",e provided he follows the regular regi,;tra t io n procedure. A n a u di to r attcnd� da"e, 11Ilt may not purt i c i pa t ' or

rcc�iV(� r rf': d i t .

pe r� o n IIlUY a ud i t

c o u rse w i t ho u t b("ing p rope rly regi!'-t�red.

Tlt i, i n,'olve, t h e payment of a , p c c i a l fec.

in " a c t iv i t\''' or l a ho ra t o r y cour,e,.

tuden!>' llIay not regiHcr a,

auditors

Hon ors at Entrance In a c oo rdi na t ed program o f making awards by c o lle ge s and u n i verSItIes which arc members of t he College Entrance Examination B oard , the University confers Honors at E n tra nc e. R e cognition is given for outstanding ac hiev e m e n t in high school;; a n d in anticipation of superior perfo rm an ce at the college level. The a wards are not made in r ec og n i tio n of financial need and carry no grants. Advanced Placement Program

T h e University will consider the gra n ti n g of a dvan c ed stan ding and credit in co" r ses taken in high sc h oo l according to the regulations sel up under the Advaneed Placement Program of t College En t ra nce Examination Board. Advanecd p l a cem e nt will be granted according to th evalu a ti on s made by the B o ard and upon recommendation of the academic college or school con cerned. When n o Advanced Placcm nl Test for a subject exi ;t , OT when a depart· ment feels that the Adva n c ed Placement Test does not adeq ua te ly measure m astery of the cou rse for which placement or c redit is sought, the U n iv e rsity develops appropriate i n st rumen ts o f evaluati on. Advanced p lacem e n t or credit may be granted to any st uden t without limit, except that those c redi t s obtained by examination ma y not be applied towards the res idenc e requirements for gra du at i o n .

17 Finances It is the policy of the U n iversity to ma intain high educational standards at as low a cost as possi ble. The support of the cooperating Lutheran churches and friends who contribute toward the operation of the school enables the U niversity to charge a lower tuition rate than would otherwise be possible.

TUITION (semesler) General Tuition, 12·17 hours Part· time tuition, per semester credit hour ( Enrollment for 1 1 credit hours or less ) Late afternoon and evening c lasses ( only) per credit hour ( Ap plicable only to part·time students) Excess credits tuition, above 1 7 hours, per credit hour

450.00 38.00 30.00 25.00

GENERAL FEES (semesler) General fee, per ,cmcstcr, 8 hou r., or more

35.00

( I ncludes support of the following services : Student Body activities, Accident insurance, Health Service, Student Artist Series, Saga ( yearbook ) , and Intercollegiate Athletics.) · Swim m i ng Pool Construction Fee, per semester ( A uthorized by Associated Students, PLU ) Matriculatio n ( Paid only by students entering for first time )

6.00 5.00

SPECIAL FEES Audi t, per credit hour Late registration ( a pplicable on and after the first day of classes ) Change of registration . Brp.akage ticket ( chemistry students only ) Master's Thesis binding charge, per copy Placement Transcript, first copy free, each additional copy Graduate nurse examination Nursing, locker fee deposit to be paid in Clinical area ( refundable ) Off·campus Physical Education activities : Bowling Skiing . .. Beginning Typewriting, non-credit service course ..

....

20.00 5.00 2.00 5.00 5.00 5.00 1 .00 B.OO

1 .00 14.00 41 .00 20.00

PRIVATE MUSIC FEES Casavant organ rent, one period daily, per semester Organ rent, one period daily, per semester (electric) Organ rent, two periods daily, per semester ( electri c ) Piano rent, one period daily, per semester Piano rent, two periods daily, per semester ( No refun d is made on the above fees)

25.00 10.00 15.00 5:00 7.50

Private instrurtion, per semester Organ, orrhestral instruments, piano, or voice O n e thirty-minute period per week

45.00 75.00

One sixty-minute period per w e ek

B O A RD AND ROOM Board is f u r n i sh ed in the U niversity Dining Halls at 8210.00 per semester for :;tudents rooming off campus, for three meals per day, except o n Sunday when the ev en i n g meal is not provided. Meals are not served i n the University D i nin g Halls duri n g Thanksgiving, Christmas, and Easter vacations. A deposit of 35.00 rnlFit a cc o m p a n y the a p plica tion to re.crve a ro om. ( I t w i l l be refu nded i f ďż˝tudent canceh h is r eserl'a t io n before .J u l y I . ) T h e University rNa i n ,; ' 10.00 o f this d e pos i t as a key a n d breakage fee and ho lds S25.00 as a ro o m depo,it u n t i l the ,tudent gra,luatcs or oflicia l l y withdraw, from the University. A fine o f $5.00 will be lev i e d for all unau thorized furniture or room changes.

Room and board are furnished to resident students, per se m ester, as follows :

Women ( 1965-66) Harstad Hall, c ap ac i t y 254

8350.00 350.00 350.00 350.00

So u th Hall, c apa c i ty 130 North Hall, capa c i ty 1 1 5 West Hall, cap ac i ty 122

Men ( 1965-66) PAueger Hall, capacity 200 foss H a l l , capacity IBB

350.00 350.00 340.00 350.00 300.00 to 340.00

E ver g ree n Court, c a pa c i ty 69 Delta HaU, capa c it y 40 Ivy H a l l , capacity B3

Family Apartments Two lJedroom ( 1 6 u n i ts ) i ne. water, per month .

540.00 45.00 25,00 A d e posi t of 525.00 must accompany a reservation for family apartments. This deposit will be held by the University until t h e occ u p a n t v ac a tes t he a pa rt me nt . Three bedroom ( B u n i t s ) inc. water, per month Fa m ily apartment deposit

One month advance rent for apartments is required.

ESTIMATED COST PER SEMESTER The following table will aid the students i n estimating maximum e x pe n ses : Tuition Board and room

G e n era l f e e Other required fees Books and supplies

_ _ _._. _ ._ . . . . _ _ .. . . ..

_ .. _ _

. . $450.00 350.00 35.00 6.00 40.00 SBB1.00

C ES

A d d personal expenses and multiply by two to obtain estimated cost for one school year of nin e months.

Changes in Rates The University reserves the ri�ht to change i ts charges at any ti m e without previous n o t i c e. However, after the begi nning o f any given semester no change

w i l l be mad e to be effective within the semester, except in case of extreme emergency.

PAYMENTS Semester b i l l s are due and paya b l e at the time o f registration. Students receiving scholarships, grants or loans must complete all necessary arrange· ments well in advance. of registration. Students unable to meet their semester bills in ful l may elect the following payment pla n :

S t u de nts re si ding i n the University residence halls pay at l e ast 400.00 a t the time of registration. Students not res iding in U niversity residence halls pa y at least 8200.00 at the time of registrat ion. The balance i s paid in two equal installments on October 31 and November 30 in the fall se m ester and Feb ruary 28 and March 31 in the spring semester. ,

A s ervice fee of $5.00 will be charged if any payment is not paid when due. In a d dition t o the special student loan funds described under Financial A i d, the U n i versity has made arrangements with outside financial agencies to pro vide both deferred payment p la ns and plans for meeting educational expenses out of monthly income. The Un in"',ity has en do rs e d the U n i ted Student Aid deff!rTed ] I u y me n t plan. Tn addit ion the National Bank of Washington of Tacoma u l< o provide, bo th a deferred payment plan and an e q u a l monthly payment plan i n c oo p e ra t ion with the University. Deta i ls o f a l l loan plans are ava ilable from t he Director of Admissions or Financial Aid ofEccr. Registration is not completed arranged in the Business Office.

until all

financial

obligations have been

The Un iversity reserves the right to withhold statement of honorable dis· mi.-sal, transcript of records, or diploma, until all University bills have been paid, or until satisfactory arrangements have been made with the Business Office. Students will not be permitted to register for a new semester until all bi l ls are paid for the previous term. Credit for future services to be rendered to the University by the student cannot be used to meet the initial payment. Money due for work performed will be given only if the student's arcount is current.

REFUNDS Partial tuition refu n d may be made when withdrawal from the University results from sickness or causes occurring beyond the control o f the student. In no c ase will fees be refunded . Refund may be made in the following pro portions :

O n e week or less .. Between one and two weeks Between two and three we ks Between three and four weeks Between four and five weeks .... a refund after five weeks.

_ . . ._ . . .. . . . .

.. . . .__. . ._ .. . . ._ . . . . .

BO% 80% 60% 40'fr) 20%

Refunds on rooms will not be allowed in cash. However, if the student retu rns i n the next two semesters, pro路rata allowance will be credited in the following proportions of occupation during the sem ster of withdrawal : up to 2 weeks 2路3 weeks

80% 60%

3-4 4路's

weeks weeks

40% 20%

No ullowance will be credited if withdrawal occurs after the 'sth week. If the student does not return, the allowance is fodeited. Refunds on board will not be made for continuous a bsences of less than one week and no refund will be made for the fir t week's absence. A pro路rata refund will be made for necessary withdrawal Crom the University, No refund w i l l be made for any University sponsored trips of any kind, such as choir, chorus, band, orchestra, athletics, and so forth.

DEPOSITOR Y FOR STUDENTS Students desi ring to I ave cash in the B u siness Office may do so. This cash may be drawn out at the request of the student.

PER ONAL EFFECfS The Univer ily is not responsible for the personal effeels of the students or the faculty members. The University cannot be held accountahle for any losses.

21 Financial Aid The University recognizes an o b l i g at i o n to select, encourage a n d give oppor t u n i ty to those persons who have the potential to make si �ificant tec h n i ca l

a n d cultural contri buti ons_ W e w i l l e x t e n d o u r financial a i d p rogr am to the limit in o rd e r to ad mi t particularly deserving students_ The financial aid rrogrnm includes: ( 1 ) seholarship, ( 2 ) awa rd", ( 4 ) loans, ( 5 ) part-time e mp loy me n t _

g rn n ts ,

( 3 ) talent

One a p p l i c a t i o n , to be made prior to A p ri l I , should be s ub m i t ted for financ i a l a i d, rather than separate requests for scholarships, talent a wards, loans or parl - t i m e employment. It i s assumed that w h e n request:; for aid are received that the student's fi rst ehoice is a sc h ol a r s h i p . With this i n m i n d the C o m m i t tee decides the type of assista nce wh i ch will be given. This may be one of the a b o v e aids or a combination grant.

cholarships A n n u a l cholarshi ps range in amount from S 100 to 900 a n d are gr a n t ed to students of high academic achievement who show eviden 'e of fin !Ieial need. eed is shown by submitt i n ' the College Scholarship Service financial need re port. Th e forms arc available from t he D i rector of Admissions.

To be e1 i�ih!e lor c,onsi deration a "tudent must have at least a 3.3 u\-erage an d rank in the upper 10 p e rc e n t of h i s ciao . Scholastic a bi l i ty must be fu rt h e r refkcted in ,core-; attain ed on the CEEB Sc. holu,tico A ptitude Test. App l i c a t io ns [or renewal of scholarsh ips mil;;!. be su bm i t t ed p ri o r to April 1 . Tn addition to i t s o w n sc holarship fll n d . t h e the fo l l o w i n !! H " t r i e t c d scholarshi p f u n d A l p h a Kappa A l trusa

lpha Scholarship

Club, T ac o m a Ch apter,

Sc holarship

Ida A . Davis Fund Th D r. and 'frs. O. L. Haavik cholarship Olaf Halvorson Scholar h i p W . H. Hardtke Sem i n a r y S l u d en t ch o l a r s h i p Fund Rev. Karl K i l i a n Memorial Fund Ladi es of K i wanis Award

allY o n c semester a

the University.

Dr". La rHln, \V ich, and R '],crger S ( ' h o l a r"l l i p i n Medical Tcc h n o l o gy r : idra .r. La r"" n c l lO \a r-1 1 i l ' F I I IIlI L u th e ra n Brotherhood Legal Reserve Li fc' I n "'lIrntl('c C o . � { · l l o l a r,·d l i p:"i 'lu Phi Epsilon, T a c o m a Profe�siollal C h a pte r , Seholarship _

-'l l u m n i cholaroh i p Fund A merican As so c i a t i o n of Univerjly Women S c ho l ars h ip O. A. Brown F u n d Dr. a n d M rs. W. B. Burns Fund

s h ip from

nivers ity h a s a t i t s dis po;,]1

Wumen of Rotary S 'hoiarship Social Service Scho l a rsh i p Fund of the D i vision of Charitie><, t h e meriean Lutheran Church Tacoma Lumbermen's Sc ho l a rshi p Tuberculosis Association of Pieree County Seholarship Women's A u x i l i ary o f Pierce C o u n t y Medical Society Scholarship

sluilent may receive ollly

one av.;ard or Olle scholar

FI .

C] L

Grants Pa�tor�

and

ullmarried

c J r i l d re n

th ' a m o u n t o f S lOO f o r ""e h "c h o o l d l l r il l A

ordy

t l l(-�

:-;ec o n d

S('lllc�t('r i n

pa�ton;

yea r.

are

p;i\" 1!1l

grant�

ill

Thc"c grant, a n' t o Ill' a w a rded

a t t e l l da nc(:

and

ollly

;-; t \ ( · I ,

stll(h'Ilh

r ece i ,' c the m a i n su p p o r t of their u n ivereity expenses from t h e i r parents a n d pro v i d e d that t h e students are registered f o r at least twelve hours each ,,,me.-ter during the school year.

Recogn iZ<'d

depen den t s

( n ot

i n c l u d i n g m arried c h i l d re n )

mem bers are gra n t e d "peeial grants, the l 1 n l o u n t to Iw

facuity

staff

a n n o u n c c d at tl", t i m e

of reg istration. CrClnts i n

the

amount

$25

Jler

semc'; [('r , h a l l

given

each

two or m o rc students from the same fa m i l y atte n d i n g sc h oo l at the s a me time,

provi dcd that the m a i n , u p p o rt is given by their parcnts.

Tulent A wards

A lim i t e d nu mher

of awards a r� made to

s tu d e n t s in t h e fields of speech,

d r a m l1, music a n d at h l et i c s. To

e l i g i hle

a p p l i c a n ts must have �a tisfa("tory aca d c m i c: record, a n d

u n w, u a l p r o f"i c ic n c y in one 0 " m o r e o f t h e above fields.

ludent Loa" Funds The University ad m i n istration can aSsi�t students who are in need of finan v a r i o u s student loan funds, I n a d d i t i o n to t he loan o u t l i n e d u n der "Payments" in th i s eatalogue, the University has t h e following restricted loan fu n d s from which assistance is ,wa i luhle : (,ial

assi tance th roll:;h

plans

Alum n i Association Loan Fund merican Lutheran Church Women Loan Fund Anton A n derson Loan Fund John . Baker Loan Fund J. P. Ca r ls t rom l\'I emori al Loan Fu n d Delta Kappa Gamma Student Loan F un d

Lily C . Ekern F u n d ?>larie Huth Loan Fund Jeanette Olson-Diana Paul-Miriam Stoa ' l vIemorial Student Loan F u n d J . P . Pfl ue g e r S t u d e n t Loan Fund O. J , Stuen A lum n i Loan Fund O. A. Ti n g el stad Loan Fund

Nati onal Dcf (�nsc Education Act To assist needy students to o b t a i n a c o l l ege e d u c a t io n , the 1 9SB Congress e n ac t e d

the

ho rro w ed in

' a tional a ,dlool

Derell'"

Studen t Lo a n

Pro�ral1l.

Up to ,.1 ,000

may

year.

ew students will be considered for l o a n s on the has.is o f their a p p l i c a t i o n for fi n a n c ial a i d . t u d e n ts al read y i n attendance at t h e U n i vers i t y should a p p l y for l oa n s i n the

Busi neoS

H l a na :;e r' s office. T h e necessary fo rm s t o estahlish need m us t

be obtained a n d subm itted.

23 Student Affairs Students l i vinp; in u n i versity commu nit ies have many responsi bilities and addition to thei r basic �tudies. Inabi l i ty to meet these needs ve'·.omcs a problem that h i n ders the student i n achieving his primary goal. Concerned that each student shall be given the best po�i ble opportu n ity to develop his i n terest and a b i l i ties, the Univer�ity eonducts and su pports numer ous services and activit ies which supplement the basic courses of study. l'rivilep;cs in

O R I ENTA TION FOR NEW STUDENTS

An ori e n t a t ion pro�ram is held for all fresh men and transfer students for t h ree days at the begi n n i n g of the fall semester. Students take guidance tests, fam i liarize themselves with U n iversity faci l i t i es, and become acquainted with fel l o w students and faculty. ( Conferences arc arranged with faculty advisers un d e r whose guidance rep;istration is complete d . )

'1 1 Dr

\ 1 F:\ m �

HEALTH AND MEDICAL SERVICES The Student Health Service, staffed by an administrative head, a medical d i rector physician, a regis t ered nun'e, and as. i�tant.s, supervises all p e rson a l and comm u n i ty health prohlems on the campus.

The general fee, which is required of all students registered for eight hours o r m o re, i nc l u de�

i n c l u des treatment

at the Health

Center for minor disorders and

a cc i d e n t imurance coverage to S l ,OOO.OO for nny injury <;'''' tained on

the cn m [ I I " o r i n the coU r,e of the -tudent', coming or going from the. local

pla.[·e o f re s i den c e to or from the U n iversity. All a thletes p n rtic i pa t in g i n rec o g n ized i n tercollegiate ' por t s a re abo a fforded ac e id e n t i nsu ra n c e coverage up to

S l ,OOO.OO for i nju ries ,ustained, whether injlll'Y occurs during prac tice

o r du rin g

competition. A l l n ew students, returning students, full-time graduate student

w h o have

not been i n attendance at this inst i tution for one year or more arc required

p hysi ci a n asl a part ( See Admission ) . This exam i n ation report is

to have a e om ple t e physical examination by their home

the

a d missi o n

procedure

kept by the Health Service and is available for ready reference by t he U n i ver

sity doctor and nurse. In firmary day care i s available on physician's order. The University does not p r ovid e for extended medical care by the University dortors, examination or t r eatme n t by specialists. Every assistance will b e p:iven, however, i n making arrangements for special medical or surgical care ; and w h e n practical, the student is urged to ava il himself o f the services of h i s family doctor.

TESTING SERVICE While

every

student

automatically

receives

assistance

from

his

facul ty

U n iv e rs i ty also maintains a testing service under the su p ervision of t h e Director of Testi ng. This service is resp o n sible for admin istration an d

a dviser, the

i n t erp r eta t i on

th e gu i dance

examinations given

all

freshmen

du ri ng

Orientation Days as w e ll as other departmental test i ng programs. Batteries of tests are c o n c e rn e d a bout

available

for various p ro fessions for those students

their aptitudes and i nt e r est as well as general

fi tn ess for

college tra i n i n g . Evaluations are based on test results and other personal data as �cmbled to assi s t in solving individual problems such as nature o f ahility,

iden t i fication of apt i tudes, i denti fication o f vocational i n terests, inventory of perso n a l i ty traits, choice of vocation, and read i n g habits.

The U ni v e rsi t y is a lso an app roved center for the Miller A n al o gies Test. This test is often r e qui re d of pot e nti a l graduate students by various un i versities . The results of these services are c o n fi dential an d w i l l not be give n to anyo n e except authorized personnel without the permission of the student.

VETERANS AFFAmS The Un iversity is approved by the Veterans' Admini stration as an institution of higher education fOT veterans and invites vet�rans to use i t s fac i l i ties i n acqu iring an d completing their education. The Director o f Testinp; devotes a portion of his time to provide services to students who are veterans. Tho� who plan to attend the University under the benefits of the public laws for teterans or fo r orphans of vet e ra n s must secure a c e r t i fic a t e o f el i � i b i l · i ly from the regional office of the Veterans' A d m i n istration a nd present this certificate a t the t i m e o f rep;istration. Transfer students who have been usinp; public law b e n efits should contact the i r p revious institution t o obtain eligib i l i ty for the new place o f t r a i n i n g well in advance of the beg i n ning date of cl as s es in order that l o ss of pay may not resulL

In ordcr to ob t a i n full su bs i " tc nc c undergraduate ,·e t c ra n s a n d el i gible orphans of veterans nUlSt c a r ry fourteen semester ho u rs . Graduat" ve t era n s should consult thte D i rector o f Testing conc e rn i rw load for fu l l <;lIhsistenc(�, as this may vary. O rphan, m u s t carry a t lea"t scven semester hours to cbirn sub"i"tencc. Veterans who have completed liberal arts COllrses through USAFI will receive credit as recommended by the Am er i can Cou ncil on Education.

COUN Each

U G SERVICES studpnt i s as.<;igned to

fa c u l ty adviser who i, p ri ma ri l y concerned

with the e duc a ti ona l guidance of the �tud(!flt. The ad" iser guides the student

i n a r ra ngin g his scbedule and assists h i m in his educational devel opment. The student is eneOLlragcd to meet frequently w ith h i s adviser. The Dean o f Students, the Assista n t Dean of Students, the D i rector o f Test· ing, and the Student Congregation Pastor are available for special counseli ng in many arcas i n c l Lldinp; soc ial adjustment, dormi tory l i fe, financial needs, attendance, and educational and vocational p l a n n i ng.

CLASS AND CHAPEL RESPONSIBILITIES Regular attendance at c las ses, convocations and chapel serviccs is a basic educational policy at Pacific Lutheran University. Such attendance is not a behavioral matter. It is assumed tbat the i ntellectual objectives of the U n i· versity cannot be attained wit bout regular class attendance ; i t is also assumed Ihat the spiritual objectives cannot be attained without the i n fluence of c h ap el services. A student not in sympathy with such a policy will find i t d ifficult to

make a satisfactory adjustment to campus l i fe. A student wbo finds it necessary to be absent from his c la sses should make arrangements with the i nstructor before the absence, or immediately there· a ft e r. In all cases it is the student's responsi bility to make up work m i ssed. If a smdent is careless in regard to attendance, the i nstructor is expected to notify the office of the Dean of Students or the Assistant Dean of Students i n order t h a t remedial action may be taken. Upon recommendation o f the in struetor a student may be- dropped from the course.

FF J R .

A s t uden t who mi sse s "hapel or c on voc a ti o n i s expected to contact the De a n of Students or Assi sta n t Dean of S t ud e n ts w i t h i n one week a n d g i ve the reason for the absence. If a student does n o t accept h i s rcsponsibj l i ty fo r chapel or convocation attendance, he may be p l ace d on p rob a t i o n for the remainder of the semester. I f the st u d e nt ha not assumed his respon -ihili t y for at t e n d an ce lw the end of the semester, he will not be pe rm i t t e d to re g i st er for the following semester. A student u nder prohation i not p e rm i tt e d to participate i n e x t ra cnrrirular ac-tivit ie�.

FOOD SERVICE t u d e n t " l i \- i n g in res i de n c e halls are rf' qu i red t o t ake their meal

at one

the d i n ing h a l ls located on th e eamplls. N o ded ur:t i o n s are made for stlldents who cat fewer than t h r ee meal,; per day at the U n i versity o r who arf� of

A charge i s made for st u d e n t guests. Students rooming the campns may hoard at t h e Un i versity cafeterias_

absellt o n week-(�nds_ ofT

BOOKSTORE The

the

n i vers i t y m ai nta i n s

,', o n vc n i e n ce

book Btore i n the College U n ion B u i l d i ng for

of students. The st ore , operated on a strictly cash b asi s, sells

books, s t a t i o nery. school s u p p l i es and a wi d e

COFFEE

variety of notions.

HOPS

The Univcroity o p era t es two coffee shops, o n e in th e College O n i o n Building a l l d the o t h e r i n Columbia Center. T h ese shops are open daily. Short orders are 3\ uilable for commuting student:, and campus v isi t o r .

PLACEMENT SERVICE The U ni v e r, i t y , t hrou g h the S(' h oo l of Education, m ai n t ai n s a pl a ce me n t ,,,rvice f o r students entering t h e teach i n g p ro fessi o n . A fee of $5.00 is charged to COVN the cost o f rec.ords and correspondence n ec eS-'iary for placement of r in Education. An effort graduates rec eivi ng [he deg re e of B a c he l o r of fter the is m a d e to p l a ce a l l graduates, but positions are not guaranteed. fir'st r"" i t i o n Ii b een secured, a charge o f $1 .00 will be made for eaeli addi t i o n a l issue of creden t i als. Gr adu ates majoring i n other fields arc assisted by their professors and deans in o bt a i n i n g posit ions.

re pec t i ve

major

STUD ENT · l\lPLOYMENT The Unjversity aims to assist worthy a n d need)' stud nls by helping th em to find empl oyme n t . A p pl i cation for wo r k should be made to t h e Dean o f Students a ft er a student has been acc:epted for ad m ission. Students wh o will need work sh ou l d a p p l y early i n the summer bec ause the n u m ber of jobs av a i l a hle i s l i mited.

EXTRACURRICULAR ACTIVITIES I n a dd i t i on to I ressing successful a ca dem ic performance, the University ch al its stu d en t s 10 profit by experience in extracurricular a livities. Her also

leng

IT \ TR .

t h e stu dent dpvdops his leadership skills a n d learns how t o work well with his ne i g hbor . Students should not permit this type o f activity to interfere with the i r

regular ar.adem i c p u rsuits. A listing of student activities follows : General

A L PHA PHI OMEGA-national se rv i c e fraternity for u n iversity men inter ested in Boy Scouts of America.

SPLU SOCIAL ACTIVITIES B O A RD-coordinator of all student activities. A SSO ,TATED

WOMEN STUDENTS, ASSOCIATED MEN STUDENTS-

general o rg a ni za t ions of which all fu ll-time students become members. C I RCLE K- a l1i l i at e of National Kiwanis.

G AVEL CL.U B-afTiliate of national dub. I NTERNATIONAL. CL.UB-for students from for e i !, n countries.

MOl

A CLUB

OFF CAMPUS STUDENTS-social organization for ofT-campus students. PHILOKALEANS-an or ga n i zati on for s tu d e n ts who have returned to school after a n a hs e n ce of three years or more. PROPELLER CLU B-for students interested in maritime affa i rs. YOU G DEMOCRATS, -YOUNG R E PU BLICA NS-for those interested i n politic-al education and partisan activities.

Honorary and Service A L PIIA K A P P A PSI-national pr o fe ssio na l business fraternity. A L P H A PSI O M EGA-national drama fral<'rnity. BLUE K EY-national junior and sen i o r men's service honorary.

I TER COLLEGIATE KNIGHTS-national service honorary for sophomore men. PI GAMMA

IU-national social science honor society.

PI K A P P A DELTA-forensic honor fraternity. SPURS-national service honorary for sophomore women. TASSELS-local honorary for senior g i rls.

At h letic P A C I F I C N O RTHWEST I NTE RCOLLEGIATE ATHLETIC CO N FE R E N C E -a rea

o rganiza tion f o r intercollegiate athlet i(�s.

LETT E R l\IEN'S C L UB-social organization for men who have won letters in onc or morc major sports. MEN'S INTR A M U R A L.S-for students wishing to p ar tic i p a t e in limited but not intereollegiate sports activities. SKI CL.UB-for students i n terested in individual or competitive skiing. VARSITY ROWING CLUB

Departrnenta'l AMERICAN CHEMICAL SOCIETY STUDENT AFFILIATE CHAPTER颅 a club for students i n terested in careers in the chemical sciences. CURTAIN CALL-for students interested in drama. DEBATE SQUADS-junior and senior divisions for students i nterested in i ntercollegiate competition. DELTA IOTA CHI-for nursing students. FRENCH, GERMA N , SPANISH CLUBS-for students interested in languages. KAPPA RHO KAPPA-for students interested in Greek. LINNE SOCIETY-for biology students. PHI EPSILON-for women students majoring in physical education. PSYCHOLOGY, SOCIOLOGY, HISTORY-for student, in terested i n each s tu d y . SEA ( R ho Lambda Chi ) -local chapter of Student National Education Asso路 ciation.

Musical BA ND-a perform i n g concert organization. Various members of this group also participate in the Pep Band which performs at athletic con tests. CHOIR OF THE WEST -a cappella choir in terested especially in sacred chotal music. CONCERT CHORUS-singers interested in a variety of music. MA DRIGAL SINGE RS-an organization of trained voices singing both sacred and secular music. MU PHI EPSILON-local chapter of National l\Iusic Sorority. ORCHEST R A-for students having knowledge of orchestral instruments. ORGAN GUIL D-stu dent chapter of American Guild of Organ ists.

Religious STUDENT CONGREGA nON-under the leadership o f the Pastor, J o h n O. Larsgaard, is an organization designed to promote Christian life and to train the students for i n formed and active leadership in the church. It elects a Board o f Deacons, a Board of Trustees, and a General Council annua lly and promotes a stewardshi p program. Students are invited to affiliate with tbis organization during their u n iversity career. This affilia路 tion does not consist in a transfer from, nor affect in any way, their memo bership in the home congregation. Morning worship is conducted each Sunday in Eastvold Chapel, and the Lord's Supper is celebrated every Sunday in the Tower Chape\. The Luthf'J'nn Students' Association, Prayer Service, and College Affil路 iated Laymen's League ( CA L L ) are also organized under the Stud"nt Congregation. Student Publications

MOORING MAST -weekly student newspaper. SAGA-U niversity yearbook.

. T nr T

POLICIES GOVERNING CO�IMUNITY LIFE The University admits students with the exp ress understanding that they will cheerfu l ly comply with i t s rules and regulations in every respect and conduct themselves as Christian l a d i es and gentlemen. Only such rules have been a d o pted as bave been found necessary for the promotion o f the highest welfare of the students. t u d e n ts are expected to employ their time to the best advantage and to avoid a c t i v i t ies which might in terfere with legitimate class work. Smoking hy women is not in harmony with the policies of the University. Gam bling a n d t h e use o f i n toxicating liq uors a r e strictly forbidden.

AUTOMOB ILES The use and possession of automobiles in the eampus area is a matter of p r ivilege and not of right. A buses may result in revoking such p rivileges. All who use an automobile while attending the University must register with the Dean o f Students office fo r a permit which must be p l aced as d i rec t e d on the vehicle.

S HE DULING All social and university actIVI tIes arranged by departments, c a m p u s dub s , or g ro u p s of students mUtit be scheduled through the office of the Assistant · Dean of Students. A pproved cha perones are required for all scheduled activo i t i es held either on or off campus. The scheduling of activitieti by students is the joint responsib i l i ty of the Assistant Dean o f Students a n d the Social A�tivi ties Board.

PLACE OF RESIDENCE Each student must fill out the Place of R,,,idencc Form. Upon receipt of t h is

form th" S tu d e n t Placement Card, requi red of each student to

" o m p l e te

regis·

tra tion, is then issu ed. This c a r d a lso seryes as a temporary meal ticket for the hoarding elllb student.

Students n o t l i ving at home, with clo,e relatives, o r working for board a nd rOOIll a re reqllired to live in residence halb on C:l IllPU:l. If stu dents cannot he accomlllodated i n the d o rm i t o r i ., the Un iven.ity, not the student, w i l l make the necessary provisions.

ROO�f ASS IGN M E NTS A l ' l l ication for a room should he s u b m i tted as early as possihle b u t n o t before adm i,,' ion to the University has been con firmed. Priority for choice o f residence hall is esta hl ished by the date of receipt o f the room deposit. ( S ee Page 1 8 ) . The room reservation will be automatically canceled i f a student has not a r rived by t h e day p rior to the beg i n n i ng of classes. A n y rOOll! changes must be a p p ro\' e d by the D i rector of Housing. The Uni,'er,ity dormitories will not be open for oecupaney d u ring the recess period, a n n o u nced in the catalog, or in advance of the opening date, except by advance a r rungements and payment of a spec ial fee. The University reserves

rt P I

\ FF

InS

the right to u,e the dormitory rooms during the recess periods for conventions or similarly scheduled meetings, if it is necessary. The dormitories open on Sunday of orientation week and close at 6 :00 p.m. the day following the last scheduled examination or the beginning o f a holiday recess. Housing assignments do not automatically continue from year to year. The University reserves the right to change a student's location or to close a housing unit when i t is necessary. On a date to be annou,nced, students currently enrolled who plan to register for the next school year may make their room reserva tions. After that date all reservations, including those of new students, will be assigned in the order o f receipt o f a p p l ication.

HOUSING FOR MARRIED STUDENTS The U n i versity maintains twenty.four apartments on campus for married students. Eight of them are three-bedroom u nits, the remainder two·bedroom u nits. Each is partially furnished with an electric stove and a heater. A pplications for family apartments should be made through the office of the Director of Housing. A 825.00 deposit must accompany the application. These applications nre processed according to the date they are received.

RESIDENCE HALLS The 'University maintains nine residence halls for students over which the Dean of Students and the Assistant Dean o f Students have general supervision. All students registering for rooms in any of the residence halls are required to continue residence in that hall for the year ( two semesters ) . The majority of the re,idence halls have double rooms with a limited number of single and triple rooms. Mattress pads and bedspreads are furnished in all halls; draperies are p rovided in all except Harstad which has venetian blinds. All dormitory rooms are provided with single heds, chests of drawers, study de,ks, desk lamps, and chai rs. Students furnish personal items including sheets, p i llow cases, pillows, blankets and towels. The use of electrical a pplia nces exccpt radios, clorks, reading lamps, record players, hair dryers, typewriters, heating pad�, sewing machines, and shavers-must have the approval of the Office of Student Affairs. Use of electric blankets, irons, and television sets is not allowed in the rooms. Occupants are held resp onsible for damage to the rooms or their furnishings. Co�t of damages beyond the normal wear to residence halls, u nless such damage has been identified with a n individual, will be prorated among the group within the hall and deducted equally from the breakage fee of each resident a t the dose of the school year. The rooms are subject to inspection by representa tives of the O ffice of Student A ffairs. A final inspection of each room must be made before a student may leave at the end of a semester or at any time that he withdraws from the Un iversity. If the room has been approved by the Office of Student Affairs and the Residence Hall Room Card turned in to the Business Office before July I, the deposit is returned. (See page 18, Board and Room, for details.}

Sumrner Session The Summer Session consists of two four and one·half week terms and starts in the middle of J u ne. The courses earry regular college credit and are of the same standard as those given during the regular school year. The curriculum is designed for u ndergraduates working toward a baccalau· reate degree, graduates working toward a master's degree, teachers seeking credentials, school administrators seeking practical cou rses, freshmen desiring to i n itiate college study, and others desiring special studies in the l i beral arts. Persons working toward a degree from the University or for a teach ing cer tificate must observe the regular admission requirements of the Un iversity. Transient students who enroll for the summer session only need subm i t a letter o f academic standing or give other evidence o f being prepared for college study. A complete catalogue for the summer session i s printed each spring. Write to

the Director o f the Summer Session for this publication and other i n formation desired.

Late Afternoon and Evening Classes To provide for the professional growth and cultural enrichment of persons u nable to take a regular, full-time college course, the Un iversity <:onducts a program of late afternoon and even ing classes. These courses are given mainly on calUpu�. A wide variety of courses are offered in the arts and sciences and in pro fessional and graduate studi es. There are spe<:ialized courses for teachers and

school admi nistrators, for persons i n business and industry. The courses are of the same cal i ber as those offered during the regular session and are open to aU who are eligi ble to take college work. A special bulletin is printed each semester outlining the offerings, and i s available from T h e Registrar of t h e University.

34 Academic Procedures REGI TRATlON Tn consultation w i th their faculty advi sers, students wh ose a p p lic at i on s for admission have been approved should register on the days desi gnated on the school

calen dar.

Students

who

c h a rp;ed a l a te registration fe e.

regi,ter

after

t he

des i g na ted

days

( See section on Fi n a n c e. )

will

S t u dents cu rre n t l y

in attendance at the Un iversity should regi ste r i n a dvan c e of each new semester. ew students, freshmen or t rans fers, may be i nvited to come to the campus to register during t h e summer, p-r ior t o the dates a nnou nced i n the school calen. dar. Regular faculty members and advi s ers will assist these s tu den ts i n p l a n n i n g th ei r c ou rses a n d in registering.

A ., tudent is not oflic ial l y e n r o l led until his registra tion has been c l e a re d hy t i l e I",sincs.' Qffice and his Plnce o f Residence form has been received by the Oflicc of Student A ffa i rs.

COURSE LOAD The normal

course

load

for

full· time

students

is 16 hours per se m e st er

ineluding p hysi ca l education activi ty. The m i ni mum load for a fu ll · t im e student is 12 ho ur s . A credit hour r e p rese n t s one full p e ri od of prepared class work per w'>I'k,

or,

if a l ahora tory ", hj cct, at kast two period, p e r w eek for one semester.

a B (3. 0 ) average or be tter may register for more than 17 h ,, " rs per 'G ll1e.Q er wi thollt the eon,ent of t he dell" of the c o l l ege in whieh Only a student with

1 1 (' i", rq�i�t(-,rf�d. A student engaged i n m u c h outside w o rk for sel f· sup por t may be rest r ic t e d to a reduced academic load.

CHANGES IN REGISTRATION Ch anges in reg ist rat i on due to conflicts or er ror s in regist ration m ay he made wi thout eharge during t h e fi rst week of the semester.

To w i th draw from a class a n d/ or add a class, th e fol l ow i n g p rocedure is to he fo ll owed :

1 . Ohtain the c ha n ge of registration sl i p from the reg ist rar. 2. Obtaiu signed ap p r o val of ( a ) t he teacher whose class is bei ng dro p ped , ( h ) the adviser, ( c ) the dean of the c oll ege i n which the student is en· rol led ( d ) t h e registrar. I n some cases the tea ch er of t h e cl ass bcill{!; added will be asked to gi ve ap p rova l. ,

;>. Take th

signed slip to the bu si n es s office and pay

the S2.00 change of

registration fee.

The st u dent is responsible for comp le t i n g the above steps within a week after obt a i n i n g the c ha n g e sl i p .

DI \Tl

PRO EDlTflE�

WITHDRAWALS A student wish i n g to w ithdraw from the U n i versity must secure a w i thdrawal sl i p from the registrar's office a n d get the a p p roval o f the dean o f the col lc!!c concerned. The student is e nti tled to h o n o r a b l e d i , m i ot'al if h i s record of c o n d u c t is satisfactory and if he has satisfied all fi n a n c i a l o b l i gat i o ns. Oflic i a l w i thdrawals d u r i n g the first four weeks of c lasses o f the semester are i n d icated by W. A fter that t i m e a stude n t wi thdrawing o ll"w i a l l y w i l l recf'ivc e it her a WI' ( wi thdrawal with passi n g ) or W E ( wi thdrawal with fail ure ) . A n u nofli c i a l w i t h d rawal from a co urse w i l l b e recorded a s E . Withdrawal d u r i n g the fi n a l s i x weeks o f a semester w i l l be a p p roved o n l y u p on co nsidera t i o n (;f factors beyond the (:o n t ro l o f t h e student.

GRADES The fo llowi n g fi n a l grades are used in j udg i ng the q u a l i t y o f a student's work : A, superior, B, Good ; C, average : D , passi n g ; E, fai l u re. The letter I' is used when credit has been allowed witho ut defi n i n g the grade, and hat' n o b ea r i n g u pon the student's grade p o i n t ratio. Special ci rcumstances ma y warrant the use o f the tem porary m a rk I ( i ncom· plete ) t o i n dica te tha t the student is d o i n g passing work in the course bu t has been u na b l e to comp lete a major assi [! n m c n t because of factors beyon d his c o n trol. An I is n o t [!iven when the student has neglected h i s work or failed to take the final exam i n at i o n . T h e i nstructor g i v i n g an I must file w i th the dean of the c o l l ege co ncerned a "tatement specify i ng the reason fo r the i nc o m p lete and the a m o u n t o f work to be comp kted. An I m u st be removed d u r i n p: the fir,t six weeks o f the fol l o w i n g st'mester o f residence u n l ess the student, pre· \'ioll� to tbat da te, h <ls received an offici a l extension of time from the dean concerned.

GRADE POINTS C rade p o i n t s are gra n ted ae fol lows : A , fuur grade p o i n t s for c<lch c re d i t hom ; fl , three grade p o i n t s ; C, t w o g r a d e p o i nts ; D, one g r a d e p o i n t ; E , n o � r a d e poi nt. A frc,IHlla n or so pho m o re receiving a D o r E in any cou rse m <ly repeat the course, a n d i n such case the second grade will be counted in c o m p u t i ng the c n m ul at i ve f!rade p o i n t average, provi ded tha t the repeti t i o n o f freshmen "ou r",,, O C C L l rs hy the e n d o f the sophomore year and sophomore COUI'ses by the end o f the j u n i o r year. :\ j u n i o r o r " e n i o r also m a y repeat a course in which he received D or E ; hut hoth the o rif! ina l a n d the repeated record w i l l be i nc l uded i n tip;uri n p; the clIIll u la t i ve grade point average.

ACADEMIC PROBATION A

student

i s p l aced

academ i c

p ro ba t i o n

fai l s to m a i n t a i n

the

m i ni m u m grade p o i n l average accor d i ng to th followi n� sca l e : freshmen, l.75 ; sophomores, 1 .90 ; u pp e r c l asomen, 2.00. Both the studen t a n d h i s parent. ( i f the stu dent i s under 21 ) wil l receive o Hi c i al notice of such acti o n . Academic probation is n o t a di,c i p l i na r y measure but an attem pt to encou ra�e the student in the di rec t i o n o f h i s h i ghest efficiency. The probationary st udent w i l l b e required to reduce e i ther h i s acad e m i c o r extracu r r i c u l a r a c t i v i t i es, o r both,

\C OEl\lTf

rHO EOU m

until his average shall meet the sta nd a rd s i n d icated above. The student on probation who fails to show adequate i m p rovement during the follow ing semester will not be allowed to re-register un less, because of extenuating ci rcumstan ces, he is reinstated by the A c a demi c Status Com mi ttee. fTc may apply for readmission after the expiration of one semester unless in formed otherwise. Failure i n more than one course during any semester result, in ineligibility to continue the followi ng semester except by special action of the Academic. Status C o m m i ttee.

A sen i or on probation wiJI not be included on the list of candidates for graduation.

ELIGIB ILITY FOR PARTICIPATION IN STUDENT ACTIVITIES A student must carry at least 12 hours, have a cumulative grade point aver age of 2.0, and have e arn e d a 2.0 grade poi n t average the previous semester in order to be eJigihle to ( a ) hold an office in student organizations, ( b ) ac cept a position of honor to which one might be el e c t e d by the Student Body as a whole, ( c l represen t the u n i versity in intercollegiate contacts, ( d ) par· tic i p a te in dra m atic or musical performan ces, ( e ) be a staff member of the Sag a or Mooring Mast. It is the responsib i l i ty o f the organization to r.le a r students' el ig i b il it y ; the student himself should withdraw from ollic; e i f he finds he is not eligihle. Participation in i nt ercollegiate athletics is governed by the code of the Pacific Northwe�t In tercollegia te Athletic Conference.

CLASSIFICATION OF STUDENTS Students are classified as follows : Fresh m e n : st ude nt s who have met the entrance requirements. Soph om.ores : students who have completed 24 semester credit hours and have earned 48 grade poi nts. Junio r., ; re gu l a r students who have fulfilled lower division requirements and have co m p let ed 56 semester hours and' have earned 1 1 2 grade points. Selliors : regular students who have completed 88 semester credit hburs and have e a rned 1 76 grade points.

HONORS COURSES H o n o rs c o u r,c, lIrc offered by c e r t a i n depa rtments fo r student, of supe " ior a ca demi c abili ty. Freshmen ranking i n the u p per ten per cent of their high ,chool classes a n d making an acceptable s core on the college aptitude test are f , l i g i blc for c o n , i d " r a t ion. Registration i n hOllon; cOurses is by invitation only. O p portunity for superior students to do i ndependent study and research i n their major field is available during their j unior and sen,ior years.

GRADUATION HONORS Degrees with honors of Cum Laude, Magna Cum L au de and Summa Cum Laude are granted to students receiving the required cumulative grade point ave ra ge. To be el i gi b le for these honors a student must have earned an average of 3.30 for Cum Laude, 3.60 for Ylagna Cum Laude, and 3.90 for Summa Cu m l.aude. Physical Education ac tivities are n o t t o b e included in t h e de t ermi ni ng of hOllor,.

Acadenzic Organization The Programs of study offered by the Un iversity are organized into the fol· lowing colleges and schools: College of A rts and Sciences, Co llege of Profes· sional and Graduate Studies (School of Busin ess A dministration, School of Edu cation, School of Fine and Applied A rts, School of Nursing, Division of Graduate Studies) .

GENERAL U N IVERSITY REQUIREMENTS A candidate for a bachelor's degree must present credit in a p p roved courses amounting to a mini mum of 128 semester hours and have maintained a grade point average of 2.00. He must meet the general requirement of one year i n residence, earning a minimum of 3 0 semester hours a t the University during his senior year. A minimum of 40 semester hours of u pper division cou rses earned i n the ju n ior and senior year is required.

Courses Required in All Curricula Each candidate for graduation must complete the following general course requirements:

1 . English Compo.�ition and Literature-9 hour.§ Composition 101, 102 ( 6 semester hours ) or its equivalent i s required of all freshmen. The three·hour requirement in l i terature may be met by any cou r-e in the department except 101 , 102, 21H, :302, 318, 321, :322, 404.

2. Fine Arts-3 hours This requirement may he met by a course in art or music. Applied music courses will not meet this requirement .

'1. Healt" and Physical Education-4 hours

•

Physical education activi ties must he taken during the freshman and sophomore years.

4. Religion-8 hours Religion 1 0 1 is required of all freshmen ; two courses must he completed from 1 12, 201, 202 by the end of the sophomore yea r ; with the remain ing cou rse to be taken from upper division olTerings in th., ju nior or senior year.

5. Philo.mphy-3 hours This requirement may be met by any course i n Ph ilosophy except P h i· losophy 233, 324, 4 1 1 , 414, or 427.

3 6. Scienc� houn The science s�lected mu�t meet the specific requirement of the college o r school concerned.

7. Social Sciences-1 2 hour.� The 12 hours required must be taken in no less than three departments, w i t h n o morc than six hOllrs in a n y one department. The COll r�cs Illay lw �dected

from the d", p a r t l llP,nts o f economics, geography, h i , to r y, p o l i t ical

gci(,nce, prychology a n d >ociology.

�fajor Area

of Study

Ea(;h candidate for a degree must complete a field o f con entration. Require ments for a major and/or a fiel d o f concentration are ou t l i ned by the in dividual colle�e o r school concerned. A major shall include a m i n i m um o f 24 semester hours with at least 12 hours in upper division COUTses, 6 hours o f which mll:;t be taken during the senior y ear .

COLLEGE OF ARTS AND SCl ENCES

The Colleg

of Arts and Sciences, the heart and center of the Uni ersity,

i res t o provide the educational experien ces through which the student may

receive a broad, general preparation for l i fe, secure a sound ba" i " fo r profes �ional tra i n i ng, or acquire a spec i fi ' knowledge and skill for service in a chosen /"icld. It is the purpose o f this college to bring the often repeated terms "liberal" ann "p rofessional," or "vocation al," int o mutually helpful relation to each other.

Degrees OffCl' d our es leading to the de�reeli of Bachelor of Arts, Bachelor of Science, and B achelor of Scienee in Medical Technology are off red by the College of Arts

and

eiences.

COllrse Requirements Candi dates for the Bachelor of A rt s and Bachelor of Scienec dewees must meet the general U n iversity eourse requirements described i n the prece d i n g

p ages. In addition to courses req uir ed ill a ll curricula, candidates mu_t ha e a m i nimum of 14 sem est er hours of c l as s i c al or mode r n language in high

who pre�e n t les." than two un i t s in one ' o l l egc combiner!. S tu dcn or modem language must meet the requirement by c o m ple ti n g the f i r't and ,ceond year ( 14 ) , ou rs ) in the "arne or another la nguage. Studmlh prese n t i n g two o r three un.its from high ,ehool a re rCI]uired to ea rn �i x credits ( "econd }"ear) in the sUllie language or fou rteen h o u rs in another languuge. Four u n i ts in o n e language i n h igh �(:hool will "utisfy the requirement.

school ancl c la�,ieal

The science req u i relllent may b� ,utisfied hy one of the followi n g : Biology 121, 122 ; Chemi,try 1 09, 1 1 0 ; Geology 101, 102 ; Phy,ics 109, no o r 151, 152. Mlljor Require.ments A major is a sequence of c ourses within one department. The selection of the field of major concentration must be made by the end of th sophomore year. The ch oi e e must he approved by the hairman of the departm ent and

I I

01 ( ,

I Z \T l O

the dean of the college. The general m I nimum requirements, as well a� the selection o f supporting subjects required, are determined by tbe department concp.rned. A t least 12 hours of the work for a major must he taken in the junior and senior years. Six hours of the major mu�t he taken in the senior year. The quality of work must be "C" or better. Any �tudent receiving a p:racle of "D" rna)' count the credit toward graduation but not toward the major. The subjects recognized as major areas in this college are biology, chemistry, classical languap:es, economics, English, French, general science, German, health and physical education, history, mathematics, philosophy, physics, po· l i tical science, psychology, religion, and sociology. Students planning to earn a Bachelor of Arts dep:ree with a major in art, music, or speech register in the College of Arts and Sciences. Not more than 40 semester hours earned in one department of study may be applied toward the bachelor's degree in the Col· lege of A rts and Sciences.

Deparlmenls and Divisions To correlate the work of the departments in the College of Arts and Sciences the following groups are organized :

1 . Division of Humanities-Departments of English, Foreign Languages, Phi· losophy, and Religion. 2 . Division of Natural Sciences-Departments of B iology, Chemistry, General Science, Mathematics, and Physics.

3. Di\·ision of Social Sciences-Departments of Economics, H i story, Health and Physical Education, Political Science, Psychology, and Sociology.

Suggested Freslaman Program. * First Semester

Ifrs.

Second Semester

Ifrs.

3 Engl 101 Composition Foreign language 3 or 4 2 tRcl 101 Life of Jesus Science (a year course) 4 ocial science or mathematics 3 or 4 1 PE activity ...

Engl 102 Composition 3 Foreign language . 3 Or 4 4 Science (a year course) Social science or mathematics 3 or 4 3 Elective PE activity . 1

16 or 18

1.5 or 16

* A student planning to complete requirements for the Bachelor of Science de· gree should follow the outline given under his major in the section, Courses of Ins tme tion.

t May be taken the first or second semester. Each student normally completes the majority of the general cou rse require· ments in the freshman and sophomore years. Exceptions usually occur in the case of students i nterested in a program leading to the Bachelor of Science degree. Science students should con fer with the departments in the D ivision of Natural Sciences for i nformation regarding recommended science sequences.

\ ( mr I I

O l l r. \ I Z \TlO

Bachelor of Science in Medical Technology Students who desire to train in laboratory methods used in hospilals, phy s i c i ans' oITice�, puhlic health bu rea us , a n d labora tories concerned with medical diagnosis and investigation should follow the curriculum below. It is based on the require m e n ts of the Registry of Medical Technologists and o n the general course requirements o f the College of Arts and Sciences. On successful completion o f the designated 98 credit hours of cou rse work and of a 12-month period o f technical t raining in a medical technology school laboratory approved h y the American Medical Association, the degree Bachelor of Science in V l ledical Technology will be conferred. The graduate is then eligible to take the ex amination conducted by the Board of Registry of Medical Technologists of the Am erican Society of Clin ical Pathologists for certification as a n MT ( A SC P ) . The Registry recommends a courtie i n physics ( e.g., Physics 1 5 1 , 1 52 ) , and this could be taken during the junior year. Medical Technology Cllrriclllllm Freshman Year

Hrs.

(hemi,try 109, 110 ChemistryB Physics 6 Engl 101, 102 Compo,.;itioll B 'Foreign language 101 102 . 3 Math 131 (ollege Algebra 2 or 4 'Religion requirement 3 Elective 2 P E activity

Sophomore Year

IIrs.

Bioi 121, 122 General Biology. . 8 Chem 1 1 2 Organic Chemistry 4 Foreign language 201, 202 . 6 'Religion requirement . . 2 or 4 9 Soeia l Science requirements PE . ac ti v i ty . ... 2 __

3 1 -33

32-34 Ju nior Year

firs.

B i oi 201 M icrobiology ... Bioi 231, 371, o r 441 7 or Bioi ,H I H istology .llem 321 Quun titati vc Analysis .. Fine arts requ irement 'Literature requirement 'Philosophy requirement 'Religion requirement 3Social scien('e requirement . __

Senior Year

Special ized technical tra in i n g

Hrs.

.. 30

4 4 3 3 3 2 3

34 'Students who present two high school units in one language will be eligible

to meet the language requirements by laking the six credit hour, second year

cuurse in the same language. 'See page 37 /nr requirements in religion. 'At least one 0/ the courses thus designated must be taken at the upper divi sion level ill order to accumulate the required credit.

hours 0/ upper division

ODn

nne

IZ TIO

PROGRAjUS FOR CAREERS Preparation for Engineering In line with the trend to augment engineerin!'; education with a liberal arts background, the University offers, in cooperation with certain affiliated univer sities, a 3-2 program o f l i beral arts and engineering. A student will spend three years on campus. I f his work is of satisfactory grade and i f he has satisfied all the specific requirements o f hath schools, he may be recommended to one of the cooperating engineering schools ( Oregon State U n iversity, Stanford U niver oity, or the U n i versity o f Denve r ) for the completion of his engineering course. At the end of his first year of engineering ( and completion of 1 28 cred its ) he will he eligihle for the B.A. or B.S. degree from Pacific Lutheran U n iversity. At the end of his second year of engineering he should recei"e his engineering degree from the affiliated university, Any student who i s i n terested in engineering a n d bas been accepted for admission to the University may register in the pre-engineering eOllrses. To qualify for the 3·2 engineering program, however, he must meet certain specific requirements.

Entrance requirements : In order to qualify without deficiency, entc ring freshmen must have had three semesters of high school algehra, onc year o f geometry, and one year o f either physics o r chemistry. A d d i tional courses i n mathematics a n d science are de s ir able. He must b e proficient in the use o f the English language, hoth reading and writing, and two years of a foreign language is highly recommended. All pre-engineering students are screened during their sophomore year by a committee from the science faculty and only those who, by their scholastic record, character, and personality, indicate that they arc c a pabl e of doing satisfactory work i n the engi neering field are accepted for the 3·2 program. To qual ify for the 3-2 program students should maintain a gra de point average of 2.5 or better. Prospective engineering students who have deficiencies from high school should e i t he r ( l ) make up sueh deficiencies in summer school before matricu la tion a t the University, or ( 2 ) p l an to attend summer school after their fresh· man year, or ( 3 ) plan to take more than three years to c omplet e their pre engineering program. The program for the first two years is the same for all brancbes o f eng i n ee r ing. Electives for the third year must be chosen to meet the requirements for the particular engineering school and the branch of engineering chosen.

01 L \

I Z 'rIO

Sliggesle,l Schedule 0/ Courses Freshman

Year

A r t l l O Introduction t o Vi,"al

A rt s

C h e m i , t ry 109, 1 10

Engl 101, 102 C o m p os i t io n

Math l l 2 Tri �(Hlome try , l�ehra

anu CalC'ulm; req u i r e m e n t

Hr.<.

Geom0lry

8 Ii 2 3

'la th 200 A n a h· t i c Geonwtry

t R cl igion

SUflhomore Year

G E 151, 152 Engin eering Drawing a n d D esc r i p t i v e

'hemi, t ry-

Physics

M a t h 1:11 Co l l I·ge

IIrs.

Elee t i ve

2 2

PE a ct i vity

Social Seience elective"

Math 201, 202 A n a l y t i c Geom e t r y

6 8 4 2 2

and Ca l c u l u s . Physirs

1 5 1 , 152

t Re l i g i on

requircment

Elenive PE aet i vity

:)2

.32 Junior Year Econ .300 C"ncral Eeono m i n

Ulnatllre I!lective P h i losophy req u i rement Phy" :1<12 H I edlll n ics

tRel igion rrqll i rement t5ee

flage

3 3 .3 4 2

S" ience electives Soc i a l

,cit'nee

l l- H 3

el ect ives

Speech 101 Fundamentals of SpeeC ' h

:� 32-35

37 for requirements in religion.

Preparation for Law �rost l a w

s ch oo ls require at least three years of l i beral arts as a foun dation

for pro fessional s t nd y ; however, they r e g a rd four years of study i n liberal arts

a n d a Ba� h el or of Arts degree as a better preparation for the study of law. Tn a d di t io n to meeting the degree requirements, the prospective law student i s a d v is e d to complete at least one year of accou nting and t o i n c lu de in his [lrogram at least one addit ional course i n economics, history, philosophy, po l i tical science, psych ol o gy soci ol og y , and speech. The student should plan his conrse a cc o rd i n g t o thc requirements o f the law school in which he is i nterested. ,

Preparlllion for Medicine and Dentistry Students desiring to enter the medical or dental professional fields should p l a n to devote not less than three y ea rs and preferably four y ears of s tu d y at this institution to secure the broad educational background indi spensable to a succe ssf u l professional career. The professional schools in these fields require a thorough preparation i n science. They also recommen d extensive study i n other departments, such as the social sciences and humanities. Students are asked to confer with the pre-medical advisers in regard to their p ro g ra ms. ,

lZ 'J I O

Pre-Medical and Pre-Dental Curriculum IIrs.

Freshman an d Sophomore years : 16 to 17 h ours per semester

' Ch e m is t ry 109, 1 1 0 Chemi>try·Physics .. Chel11i,try 132 Chem ical Prin(,ipl(�s

B iology 1 2 1 , 122 General B i ology

Iati"'I1111 tics 131 Coll ege A l gebra, Math 1 1 2 T r ig o n om et ry or Equ ivalent

E ngl i " h 101, 102 Compo,ition

6 6

t Religion n"J l l i rement Physical

Echwa t i o n-eaeh

seme,ter

14 o r 6

<1Foreign Langllage*

Social Seienee reqll i rements.. Chemistry 203, 204 Organic Chemistry+ Biology 231 Genetic,,+ ' Students who Mil th

h a ne

caken

1 3 1 , and s /.lI de n t .'

high school chemi.stry and are who

have

had

the

eligible

eqaimlent of Math

take

131

mill'

register for chemistry ; tho.,e H.'ho do not meet the qllalification .,h ol/ld register for biology dlL ring their freshman year. ' Stlulents who enter the University with two years of elect tu

modern langllage may

ulke second year COlLrses in the same language during their fresh·

mlln year. They ",o/ltd then register for 20 1 , 202. * Seqllence

of these cO/l rses

may

m ry to meet s/.ll dent's need.

tRecommended when feasible. Junior and Senior

Years :

recommended courses listed below should be Hrs.

arranged lind scheduled with the aid 0/ the adviscr. B i o lo g y 361-Com parative Anatomy .. . _. B iology .364-Vertebrate Embryology _. Biology 411-Histology Biology 441-Vertebrate Physiology .. Ch emist r y 321-Quantitative A nal ysis Chemistry 302-Biophysical Chemistry Physie� 15 1 , 152-Esscntials o f Physics P h i l o so p h y req u i rem e n t t Religion requ i r'ement Fine Arts-elective English Literature-elective Social Science-electives . Elect ives

4 4

4 4 4 8 3 2

3 3 3

t Sc e page 37 for requirements in religion. Prepnration for Parish Work Students desiring to enter parish work are encouraged to obtain the bro a d general education leading to the Bachelor of A rts degree.

Ex perience reveals that a parish worker is requested to perform duties i n

nr:\ 1 I C OB G "

TZ no -

more than one field. The responsihili ties may be c � nter e d in one or m ore of

th("�e maj or areas: t h e educational work of th e conp;re�ation, the p;uidanre of

horne visit a t ion office and secretarial work, or conductin� the mtl�i('aI o rga n i z a t i o n s i n the congr�gat i o n . Students eXfwc L i n g t o p.nter church vocation, will confe r w i th the As,;i,tant to the Dean o f Studcnts.

youth activitie,;

Preparation (or

oeial Work

In a d di t i o n to eompleting the re!!ular req ui re m e n t s for a degree in li ber al arts, student expec t i n g to e n te r the field o f social work should p l a n for a w 1l.rOLwded preparation in th social · ienees and some ha�ie work in biology.

church nd general agencies should once nt ra t e on i n sociolo!!y and pqyrhology, w h il e tho e planning for gove rn m en t service sh o u l d add a on ce nt r at i o n i n economics or p ol i t ic a l sciencc'. Students ex p e c ti n p; to enter this fi eld are u5ked to con fer with the D e p a rtm e n t of Prm'peeli,'e workers in

cour�e$

Sociolo�y in regard to their progra m s.

Preparation for Theology As

cultural fo un da t i o n for the st udy of t h e ol o gy and entrance into

a hroad

the Co s p e l mi nistry, a pr th eo lo g ic al student s ho u l d complete the require· ment. for a Bachelor of rts degree. B esi des th e ge ne ral degree requirements,

" stucIent i

I t o supp l emen t his program w i t h additional courses in ' iences, peech, and claSSical a nd modern I nguages. A faculty adviser will assist the student in the selec t i o n of courses necessary to meet the urge

En l!l i sh, sOl, ial

req llirement� of the theological

sc hool of his choice.

COUEGE OF PROFESSIONAL AND GRADUATE STUDIES

col lcp;e em b ra ces the Schools of Business Admini'lration, Ed uca tio n, and A p plied Art" and N ursi ng and the Graduate D ivi si o n Students who dcjre to prepare for praf :sional work in �ll'h fie l d s as h u s i n ss, public school tea c h i n g , art, speech, mu�ic a n d graduat studies lea ding to the Ma_ ter' degree in education enroll in this col le�e. O p por t u n i ty is given for professional s[lc(" i :t1 i�alion, and stu den ts also benefit from studies in the arts a. n d sciences. h e d grees offered and the requirements for each degree Bre outlin ed in this This

Fine

ser t i on.

SCHOOL OF BUSINESS ADMIN ISTRATION Purpose The pur pose of the S('hool of Bu i ne ss Administration is ( l ) to prepare the stude nts fo r busine�s responsibility in self-owned b us i ne es, or, as e mp loye es of a c o rp o rati o n or a p u b l ic inst itutio n ; ( 2 ) to pre p a re t h Doe who wish to c n t i nue th ir professional business st udy in graduate school ; ( 3 ) to assist in th e e duca t ion of high sc hool tea ch ers of busin ess education ; ( 4 ) to pro\�de a limited number of service courses usef u l to both majors and non-major s ; an d ( 5 ) to encourage t u den t s to acquir a ge n era l understanding of ec on om i c problems so that th y may be m ore enlightened citizens.

DFJ\T J C OH , \

I Z TI )

In order to promote these aims ev ery student will he given a hroad p ro fes sional Illl,ine&; core curriculum hui l t upon the g e ner al University course re

'l u i rement'. Student,; p r e p a r i n g; for stalT po,ition, in In"iness may take 'pe

ciaJized cou rse.- beyond the core i n accounting, economics, finance, marketing, and administrative services_ Pri n t ed explanations of each of these specializa

tions may be obtained from the School of Business A d m i n istration, Room 225,

A dmi nistration B ui l d i n g. Admission

For admLsion to the School of B u si ness AdmLnistration, a student m u st have :

1 . completed the fn'shman year w i th a m i n i m u m of 24 semester hours ; 2. earned a gr a d e point average of at l ast 2.00 ; 3. presented a com plete record of his college work for approval by the School of Business A min istration ; R quiremenlS for the Degree of Bachelor of Business Admi nistration

1. The gene ral University requirements must be completed by all c a n d i d a t es for the B ac he lo r of Business A d m i n ist r a tion _ t ha n 11;2 high school u n i ts in algebra must take 2. S t u d e n t who pre,ent Ie Math 101 o r its e'l u inllent. 3. Ec o nomi cs 101 and 102 is a requirement which sh o u l d oc met d u r in g the f r�shman year.

4_ S tudents who present le�s than two high school unit, in a fo r e i g n l a nguage IlIllst compl ete a Inini nltll11 of �iJ!:ht Se nl e!'i ter hours in one foreign language. Candidates for the B a c h e l o r of A rts i n Education degree who are p l a n n in p: a tea ch i n g major in Busi n • . Administration should refer to page 55 u n d e r ACA D EMI C PREPARATION. Professional Requirement

1. Professional core curriculum : The following cou rses are to he after admi si o n to the S bool : B A 2 1 1 Financial AccountinO' B A 212 Managerial A ccount i ng B A :351 Organization a n d Management B A 352 P rod u cti on Management or B A 354 OnIce Management

ompleted

B A 364 B u s i ne.-.s Finan('.(�

B A 371 B A 441 B A 452 B 491

Mark eting

Statist ics B u s i n e s;; Policy BusineS' l.a\\'

One course from the following g ro u p is required !

B A 301 Intermediate Economic A n a l ysi s B A

331 International Trade

B A 36 1 Money and Banking B A 362 Public Finance

2. Busin ess electives : At least one course in addition to those presented to meet the professional core requirements must he completed in the SchooL These cour:

must be chosen with the aid of the s t u den t ' s adviser.

.3. Ot h er requirem ents : ( a ) A stu dent may not present more t h a n 60 hours in c o m b i n ed courses i n

J) 1

Oh , \

r Z \Tl

business admin istration and economics for the degree o f Bachelor o f Business Administration. ( b ) A minimum grade point average of 2.00 for all courses taken i n business administration i s required for the Bachelor o f Business Administration degree.

( c ) Fifteen hours must be elected from among recommended supporting subject areas. Curric.dum

Business Adminislration

Fresh man l' ear*

Sophomore Year

/I rs.

Eeon. 101 , 102 Principles of Economies .

6 6 3

Engl 101 , 102 Composition .... Soc.ial Scicnee elective . ( Psychology recommended ) t Religion requirement 2 or 4 3 Fine Arts elective 8 S<:ience (a year course) 2 Elective 2 P E activity

Hrs.

B A 2 1 1 Financial Acco u n ting

B A 212 Managerial Accounting

4 ;3

3 L i l erature elective . . . . . . . 2 or 4 t Religion requirement Social Science elective . 3 Electives 13

PE a c t ivity

2 30 or 32

32路34

Junior l'ear

Hrs.

Senior Year

R A 352 Production Management

B A 452 Business Policy B A electives 路Jectives

B A 364 B ns in ess Finance . B A 371 Marketing B A 441 Statistical Methods B A 491 Busi ness Law Philosophy requirement tReligion requirement B A elective Eleetives

3 3 3 3 3 2 3 9

Hrs. 2 6

. . 24 32

* Assumes that the

student has

of two units of olle n d I ll:! units ill algebra.

presented the equivalen t

foreign langllli ge from high school

tSee page 37 for requirements in religion.

SCHOOL OF EDUCATION

The School of Education, by utilizing the resources of the University, offers both undergraduate and graduate work to prepare students for careers i n the teaching profession. The undergraduate curricula, leadin g to the Bachelor of Arts i n Education degree, meet the certification pattern i n the State of Wash路 ington.

DE li e on ! ,

12 TlO

The selection of desirahle candi dates and assistance i n the placement of teachers are also responsibilities of the School. I n addition to the accreditation of the entire University hy the Northwest Association of Secondary and Higher Schools, the School is accredited hy the Wa�hington State Board o f Education and by the National Council for Accredi tation of Teacher Education for the preparation of elementary and seeondary teachers with the )I,{aster o f Arts as the highest degree a pproved. This accredi tation gives Pacific Lutheran graduates clear reciprocity in many other states. Programs for the preparation of supervisory personnel a r e available.

school

counselors,

administrators,

and

The School also offers work toward the conversion, renewal, o r reinstatement of teac:hjng certificates. Pu rpose

The general purpose of the School of Education is to contribute to the de,'elopment of professional elementary and secondary school personnel w i th l i beral a n d �cientific education integrated within a Christian frame of refer ence. The School regards itself as sharing this purpose, as well as the means and responsibility for attai n i ng it, with the U niversity as a whole and with each activity of the Uni versity as set forth i n the statement of its philosophy. Desirable un derstan d i ngs, abili ties, and attitudes are : U nderstandings of the obligations of the teaching profession to guide chil dren and youth i n the pursuit o f knowledge and skills, to hel p them to become happy, useful, and self-supporting ci tizens, and to prepare them in the ways o f democracy. Understandings of the economic, political, social, p�ychological, and philo �ophieal atipects o f education. Understandings o f a n d ability to function in the roles o f the teacher as a director of learning, a counselor a n d /!:uidance worker, a mediator of the clllturf>, a link with the community, a member of a school staff, and a member o f the profe&-;ion. Understandings of research tech niques and ability to use them. Attitude� conducive to conscientious professional work and carefully planned experimentation. Attitudes conducive to continuous evaluation a n d revision o f means and ends. Admission

Students anticipating careers in education take two years of basic general

education i n the College of Arts and Sciences. In the sophomore year, and six weeks prior to registering i n Education 202, the student shall make appli eation for a d m i s,;ion to the School o f Education. Students will hecome candidates for the Bachelor of Arts i n Education de gree when they have met the following requirements:

1. Have earned a cumulative grade point average o f 2.25.

\ ( \ 1 F.\1 T t: ( I{I: \ l Z \TlO

2 . Have com pleted successfully the course i n Education 202, Introduetion to

Education.

3 . Have completed s a tisfa ct oril y a series of screening tests i n c l udin g scho las揃 tic aptitude, achievement, interest, a n d personality.

4. Have received ap proval of speech a nd vo i c e . 5. Have i d ea ls and p e rs o nal i ty qualities w h i c h make for successful teac h i n g .

6. Have a clearly defined purpose or goal. 7. Have selected a p re fe rred level of preparation and th e area or areas of concentration to be followed. 8. Have received ap proval during an i n dividual c o n ference with representa足 tives of the School. This conference i s held after screening tests have been completed a n d profiles s e t u p . The candi date is required to maint a i n these standards in order to retain his standing in the School. Students who have taken the Bachelor's de gr ee at Pacific Lutheran or at

another i nstitution are e x p ect e d to meet the same requirements for admission. Such a p rog r am will norm all y require a summer and two semesters, or th ree seme :-::o t er s.

If a student has questions concerning h i s program in the field of e d u cat i o n , he should i n q u i re at the School of Education.

Professional Program as Related to Teacher Certification in Washi ngton The preparation pattern that l e a d s t o standard eertification in the S t a te of Wash i n gt on consists of the following three phases:

1. Pre-service education leading to the Bachelor's degree i n education and a provi sional certificate.

( a ) Provisional Certificate. This c erti fi ca t e is a temporary (3 to 5 years)

license to teach in grades K through 12.

( b ) Provisional Elem entary Certi ficlZle. This certificate i s a t emp o ra ry (3 to 5 years) license to teach in el e me n t a ry sc hoo l grad es. ( c ) Provisional Secondary Certificate. This cert i fi c a te is a tem porary ( 3

t o 5 years ) l i cense t o teach in junior o r senior high school.

2. One to five years of i n i t ial te ac h in g experience on a full-time basis u n der the j o i n t supervision of the employing school di stri ct and the Un iversity.

3. A fifth year of co ll ege course work. Thirty semester hours must be com足 pleted before the sixth year of teaching. Upon completion o f the fi fth year of col l e ge and two years of successful t e ach i ng the Provisional ( tempo足 rill'Y ) Ce rti fic a t es are c o n ver t e d into Standard ( p er m a n en t ) Certificates at th.e same level or levels.

Fifth Year and Stllndard Certification The fifth year of teacher education is to follow

period of one year of

i n i tial teaching experience. The student must complete a minimum of eight

semester hours in residence after his first year of teaching and before begin

n i ng tbe third year. Thirty hours mllst be completed before begi nning the sixth yea r o f teaehin/!:. I f the first teaching is for a part o f a year on l y , study taken the next summer may be a p pl i ed with pe rm i ssi on of t he department.

The student may choose the i nstitution i n which h e wishes t o take his advanced work as follows :

1. If he r:hoo

to work at Pacific Lutheran University or any other of the teacher education i nstitution in this state, that i nstitution shall he re sponsible for rer:ommending him for the Standard Certificate up on success ful completion of the fifth year program.

2. If he wi ·heg to undertake th fifth year in an out-o f-state i nstitution, Pacific L uth era n Universi t y w i l l be responsible for re co mmen d i ng h i m f o r the S t an d ar d Certificate. The student must secure general ap proval of h i , p l a n f r o m the U n ive r si t y in advance. There are four provisions governing the fifth year p a t t er n o f work, accordin/!: to State Board regulations :

1. The fifth colle 'e year must i nclude which at least fi ft y p e r cent c o u rs es.

minimum of 30 semes te r hours o f

must h e upper division and/or g ra d u a t e

0 m or than eight 'emester hours of extension a n d/or correspondence study may he approved as a part o f the 30 semes t er hours in the student's Ii fth ye ar pr o g ra m .

3. Pac i fic Lutheran University graduates must take one semester of the fifth college ye ar i n resi den c . A transfer student who wishes to he recom mended hy Pacific Lutheran niversity must take a m i n i m u m of 20 semester hours in residence. 4. The :tudent may take 20 of the required 30 semester hours prior to or during the first year of teaching experience. Fo l l ow i n g are requirements and procedures for the approval o f fifth year programs o f work at Pacific Lutheran University :

pecilic course requirements a re : ( a ) Education 557, E v al u at i o n or its equ i v al ent . ( Education 416, PaTe n t Teacher Conference may he used by elementary teachers. )

( h ) Education 571, School G u i d a nc e Pro!!;ram or Educat ion 370, Prin ciples o f Guidance or Psyc h ol o gy 473, I ntroduction to Counseling. 2. A n y c o u rses recommended Jor the i n dividual �tudent prior to t h e granting o f the Bachelor's degree must be taken. These may he rec om m en de d hy eit he r the an"a adviser or the Sch o o l of Education. 3. Co urse s taken should s tr engt h e n areas of concentration and hu i l d stronger general education background as well a s fil l needs in the pro fe ss i o n a l field. This program of studies is to he selected by tht:: student with t h e gu i d anc e o f those w h o have worked w i t h h i m d u r i n g h i s period o f i n itial teaching a n d the a d vi sers at the rt::c ommending institution.

AC \DE\rIC ORGA

IZATION

4. The student secures approval of the recommending i nstitut i o n for work taken elsewhere before the work is begun. Some of the work taken duri ng the fifth year may also apply toward the Master of Arts degree for those who meet the requirements. A student must not plan that these two curricula shall coincide. The p rogram as set up for the fifth year shall take precedence and must be finished first.

Principal's Credentials *The candidate for the principal's eredentials will be guided by the follow· inl( :

1. He must meet graduate standards for the Muster's degree. 2. He m u s t work toward the provisional principal's r-redentials at his chosen level. To receive this it is required that he have completed work for his Standard Teaching Certificate plus six semester hours.

3. He must complete experience and study requirements for the Standard Principal's Credential at his chosen level. To receive this he needs to have ( 1 ) had adm i n istrative e x p erience, ( 2 ) earned a minimum of eight more semester hours, and ( 3 ) earned his ;\'hster of Arts degree. Students who intend to work toward the Master o f Arts degree in the field of education must ap ply for adm ission to the Graduate School and meet the req uirements outlined by that School. Candi dates should see the course require ments as set forth in the * * Master of Arts brochure. "Details 0/ the program are available at the University upon request. at the Universit y upon request.

* * Available

Cu rriculum Requir ments In addition to the general Un iversity courses required i n all curricula, certain speci fic: requirements i n general education must be met. 1. Hi story 210,

Pacific Northwest, lIIust

be i ncluded in

the twelve hours

required in social sciences.

2. The eight-hour science requirement should be met by completing Science 121 and 122. Exceptions may be made in the case o f students preparing to teach science in J lInior and Senior h i gh school. A year course in one laboratory science may he substituted by those who have adequate high school backgro und in the other sciences.

3. A student must demonstrate competence i n health by achieving a satisfac tory score o n a proficiency test given by the Health and Physical Educa tion department or by completing Health and Physical Education 210.

4. A student must demo nstrate competence i n speech by achieving a satis factory score on a proficiency test given by the Speech department, or by com p leting Speech 101.

PROFESSIONAL COURSES Requirements I. Education 202, Introduction to Educatioll : 3 Iwurs This course may be taken during the second semester of the sophomore

H : D E He ORC <\, 'TZ\TTO '

year or later. ( A cumulative grade point average of 2.25 and C grades in English

101,

102 and

Psychology

101

are

minimum

requirements

for

registration . )

Profe.•.• ional Core Curriculum : The following courses are to be completed after admission to the School : Education 301 -Human Development

3 hrs,

Education 3 1 1-Methods and Observation

3 hrs.

Education 312-Teaching of Reading-Elementary or Educa tion 3 1 4-Teaching of Reading-Junior and Senior High

2 hr,.

Education 463-Student Teaching

9 hrs.

( at preferred level )

Students wishing to qualify for certification on both the elementary and seco ndary levels should register for Education 461.

Laboratory Experience Students have the opportunity to study the social, emoti onal, physical, and intellectual growth pat terns of school-age children and youth through. out their pre-service years. An understanding of the learning process as related to growth and development is emphasized. This is done through regular course work, demonstration,

observation, and participation with

children in their activities both in and out of school. The following are specific requi rements in the area of laboratory experience : ( a ) Septem.ber Experience During at least one September following the successful completion of Education 202, Introduction to Education, and prior to Education 463,

Student Teachi ng,

part icipate in weeks)

the student is required to observe and to

acti"itics during

the opening days

( preferably

two

of school. This September Experience may be either in his

home town or in the local area, Plans and definite assignments must be approved by the School of Educa tion before the end of the preced

i ng spring semester. ( b ) Student Teach ing Students who elect to do their student teaching on only one level are re q u i red to rcgister for Education 463, Student Teaching on a half day schedule. Students who elect to qualify on both the elementary and secondary levels will

to Educa tion 463 and

Education 461.

Student

Teaching on both levels may be done concurrently or on the pre· ferred level first, followed by the alternate level.

A successful experience in student teaching is vital to the student's success. It is therefore recommended that

the student carry not more than

fifteen

-\CAD Ei\I I C OJ

IZ TI O

semester hours during his student teaching semester. It is also expected that outside work or college activity will be kept to a mi nimum. Exceptions to these rec.ommendations are allowed only by special permission.

Teaching Areas 1. Business Education. 2. Fine and A p plied Arts-including art and music .

.3. Health and Physical Education. 4. Language Art!;-including Engl ish ( composition, li tera t u re ) , foreign lun· f!;unge, speech ( in cl u d i ng drama ) , and jOllrnalism. S . Science and Mathematics-including biological and physic.al sciences and mathematics. 6. Social Seien ces-illcluding history, soeiology, political science, economi cs, geography, and psychology.

ACADEMIC PREPARATION Preparation for Senior High School Teaching: 45 hours A student preparing for Senior High School t"aching must complete 45 semester hours in the academic area in which he plans to teach. This normally consists of a Teaching Major of 24 to 30 semester hours o f study i.n one depart ment, supported by 1 5 to 21 hours in related departments. A student, with the a pproval of his adviser, may elect to complete a departmental minor of 1 7 to 21 hours i n another area appli cable to teaching in the Senior High School. In either case, the adviser from the major area will assist the student in planning his program. Teaching Majors are offered in the following fields: Art, biology, business education, chemistry, English, French, German, healt h and physical educa tion, history, mathematics, music, physics, political science, science (general ) , social sciences, sociology and speech.

Preparation for Junior High School Teaching : 45 hours A student preparing for Junior High School teaching normally must com plete a Teaching Major ( usually interdepartmenta l ) of 24 to 28 semester hours and a minor of 17 to 21 hours in another area. Students planning to teach on the Junior High School level should confer with the School of Education regarding combin ations of teaching fields which would be most a p propriate. A n adviser from the major area will assist the student in plan ning his program. Teaching majors and minors are offered in the general a reas of fine and applied arts, health and physical education, language arts ( i ncluding English, journalism, speech, German and French ) , science ( including biology, chem istry, physics and general science) and mathematics, and social sciences.

, O Fi\lI r: one j IZATIO

Preparation for Elementary School Teaching : 4 8 hours A student preparing for Elementary School teaching normally must com足

plete a m inimum o f 24 semester hours in a major area, with not more than 16 i n any one department, and two area m i nors consisting of 12 hours each.

One o f the minors must be in professionalized suhject matter ; and one i n a

teaching field other than that covered i n t h e 24-hour concentration. An

adviser from the major field will assist the student i n planning his program. The courses included i n the two m i nors are to be determined i n consulta足 tion w i th the School o f Education. In general, the Teaching Major ( 24-hour concentration ) for Elementary School teachers follows the Teaching Major reqnired for Junior High teaching.

Art Senior High School Preparation : 45 hours

Teaching M jar : 45 hours Required: Art 1 1 0, I l l , 1 1 2, 2 1 0, 2 1 3, 215, 2 1 8, 231, 4 1 1 , 4J2, 42 1 , 440a a n d electives to com plete requirements. Junior High School Preparation : 45 hours

Teaching Maj o r : 28 hours rt 1 1 0, 1 1 1 , 112, 210, 2 13, 215 o r 231, 218, 4 1 1 , 412, 440a, pins four hours o f electives to total 28 hou rs. T ching ]Vlinor : 1 7-21 hours Required :

Required : Art I l l , 213, 21B, 4 1 1 , 4 1 2, plus 4-8 hours of electives to total

2 1 hours. elemen tary School Preparation : 48 hOlLrs

Teaching Major ; 24 hours Required: Art 1 1 1 , 213, 218, 4 1 1 , 412, plus 11 hours o f electives to total 24 hours. Teaching Iinor ; 12 hours Required : Twelve hours in the area, courses to be determined In consul足

tation with the School of Education.

Biology Senior lligh School Preparation : 45 hours

Teaching Major : 24-30 hou rs. Required:

Biology 121, 122, and nine hours of upper divi,ion uiolog;y

courses. Suggested supporting courses: Chemistry 109, 110; 132 ; Mathematics 13 1 ; and dectivcs from the fol low ing : Geology 101, 102 ; Chemistry 203, 204 ; Physics 151, 152. Junior High School Preparation : 4.5 hours

Teaching Majo r ; 24-28 hOllrs Required: Biology 121, 122 and 16 to 20 hours in Biology app roved by the

department.

f E\rI

ORG.

IZ TJO

Suggested supporting courses : Chemistry 109, no o r 1 32 ; G en er a l Science 122 ; Mathematies 131. Reco mmended : P hysi cs 1 5 1 , 152 or G eo l o gy 101, 102.

Te a c hi n g Minor : 17-21 hours Required: Twelve to sixteen hou rs chosen in Biology; General Science 122. Elementary School Preparation : 48 hours

Teaching Maj o r : 24 hours Required: B io l o g y 12 1, 122. S U<Tg("ted sup porting cou n'es : Chemistry 109, 1 l 0 ; General Science 122. Teaching Mino r : 12 honrs Required: Twelve hours in the area, cou rses to be deterlllined in consulta

tion with th e School of Education.

Busine.�s Education Senior High School Preparation: 45 hou.rs

Teaching Major Required: Business Administration, 103, 142, 2 1 1 , 212, 241, 273, 340, 391, 440b. Economics 101, 102 a re pre requ is ite: to the co u rses a bove .

Sugl'\ested su p po rt i n g courses : One of three areas of em p h as i s ; ( l ) Sec retarial ; Business Administration 245, 246, 342, p lu s six h ou rs of busi ness electives ; ( 2 ) A counting : Business Administration 3D, 31.3, 315, plus six hours of business electives ; ( 3 ) Economics: E c o n om i c s 301, 302, plus njne hours of lectives.

Chemistry

Senior High School Preparation : 45 hours Teaching Major : 30 hours Required: C h e m i s t ry 1 09, l lO, 203, 204, 3 1 1 , .3 12, 32 1 , 422. Prerequ isite :· Ma thematics 1 12, 131, 200, 201 ; Physics 1 5 1, 152. Suggested supporting course : B iol og y 121, 122; Physics 382.

Junior High School Preparation: 45 hOMs T ea ch i n g Major : 24-28 houn; Prerequisite :· Mathematics 1 12, 131, 200, 201 ; Physics 151, 152. Required: Chemistry 109, 110 ; 203, 204; 3 1 1 , 312 ; 314 ( 321 optional ) . Suggested su pporting cou rses : B io l ogy 121, 122 ; Geology 101, 102. Teaching Mi no r : 17-20 hours Prerequisite :· M a t h e ma t i c s 131. Required: Chemistry 109, 1l0; 203, 204 ; 321.

Elem enta ry School Pre pa me ion : 48 hours an el menta r y school teaehing major o r mi n or : Chemistry 109, 110 ; 303, 204 ; 321 ( Mathematics 131 is a prerequisite for this c o n rse should it be elected ) .

Suitable c h e mistry cou rses for inclu�ion in

*Mathemntics 101 or its high school equivalent in instruction is a prerequisite lor all chemistry cou.rses as well as lor all other mathemntics courus.

r. \ D l

J I C 01 r, \�TZATI O_

Recommended : Eight hours from Physics 1 5 1 , 152 or Mathematics 101, 1 1 2 and/or 131 or Biology 1 2 1 , 122 or Geology 101, 102. Teaching M inor : 12 hours R equired: Twelve hours in the area, courses to he determined i n consulta tion with the School of Education. English Senior High School Preparation : 45 h ours

Teaching Major : 27 hours Required: One of the following program s : ( l ) English 241, 242, 382, 38.3 or 384, nine hours of upper division electives in English literature and six hours of electives from any other courses listed ; ( 2 ) English 25 1, 252, 382, 383 or :�84, n i ne hours of u p per division electives in Ameri can literature, and six hours of electives from any other cou rses l isted. Junior High Sch ool Preparation : 45 hours

Teaching lVlajor : 27 hours Required: One of the following programs : ( l ) English 241, 242, 382, :3 83 or 384, nine hours of upper division electives in English l i terature and six hours of electives from any other courses listed ; ( 2 ) English 25 1, 252, :�82, :383 or 384, n i n e hours of upper division electives in American l i tera ture, and six hours of electives from any other COllrses Ii 'ted. Teaching Minor : 17-21 hours Required: English 241, 242 or 251, 252 ; 383 or 384 ; plus six honrs of upper division i n the area in which the sophomore survey cOll rse was not taken, and three hours of any other course in English except 101 and 102. Elem en tary School Preparatio n : 48 hours

Teaching Major : 24 hours Required: Twenty-fonr hou rs in the department as l isted u n der teaching majors for Senior High Prepara t ion, except English 382. Teaching Minor : 12 hours Required: Twelve hours in the area, courses to he determ ined i n conoulta tion w i th the School of Education.

French Senior lIigh School Preparation: 45 hours

Teaching Major : 24-30 hours Relluired: French 101, 102, 201, 202, 221, 222 and twelve advanced hours

from the follow i n g : French 301, 302, 351, 352, 401 , 402, 440m. Suggested supporting courses: Fifteen to 21 hours in speech, English or another foreign language. Junior High School Prepara tion : 4.5 ho/us

T�aehing Major : 24-28 hours Required: Eighteen hours of a pproved courses in French. Suggested supporting courses: Nine hours selected from English 233, 241, 242, 251, 252, 383, 384 ; or six hours from the ahove group, plus four hours

\DE n

ORC

IZ\TIO

from English 2 1 7, 2 1 8, 302, 318, 404, or Journalism 203, 204. Students electing this program are urge d to add English 321 or Education 440c or 440d to the required courses. Teaching Minor : 17-21 hours Required: Seventeen to 2 1 hours of approved cou rses i n French_ German Sellior llir;h School Preparation: 45 h ours

Teaching Major : 24-30 hours

Reqltired: German 101, 102, 201 , 202, 221, 222 and twelve advanced hours from the following : G e r m a n 301, 302, 335, 336, 4 1 1 , 412, 440k, 451, 452. Suggested supporting courses : Fifteen to 21 hours in speech, English or another foreign l a nguag e. Junior High School Preparation : 4.5 hours

Teaching Major : 24-28 hours

Required: Eighteen hours of a p p roved courses in German_ Suggested supporting courses: Nine hours selected from English 233, 241, 242, 251, 252, 383, 384 ; or six hours from the above group, plus four hours from English 2 1 7, 218, 302, 318, 404, or Journalism 203, 204_ Stu dents electing this program are urged to add English 321 or Education 440c or 440d to th e req u i re d co u rses_ Teaching " 1 l ioo[ : 1 7- 21 hours R equired: Seventeen t o 2 1 hours of a p p roved courses III German_ Heahh and Physical E(lllcalion

Senior High School Preparation : 45 hours Emphasis on Health and Physical Education Teaching Maj o r : 45 hours R equired: Men and Women : Health a nd Physical Education 210, 274, 292, 310, 312, 322, 323, 334, 341, 342, 345, 450, 465, 497, and four hours of electives; Men : 363 and two hours from 270, 271, 272 or 273 ; Wome n : 290, 333_

Required supporting courses : Biology 1 6 1 , 162, Emphasis on Cor rec t i v e Therapy in PhY3ica! Education Teaching Major : 45 hours Required: Men and Women : Health and Physical Education 210, 290 ( women ) , 292, 3 1 2, 322, 323, 334, 34 1 , 345, 346, 363 ( men ) , 391, 392, 450, 497, and two hours of electives ( women ) from 274, 342, or 333 ; Biology 161, 162, Sllggc,ted supporting cour�e� : P"YI,hology, 301, 321, 473_ Junior High School Preparation : 45 h.ours

Teaching Mujor : 24-28 hours Required: Men and Women : Physical Education 210, 274, 292, 312, 322, 341, 345, 450, 497 ; Men 363 and two hours selected from 271, 272, 27:1 ; Wo m en 290, 3.3 3, <lnd two hours of electiye ; Biology 1 6 1 , 162,

\ ( \ OE'IH .

He:

'TZ 1'10

Teaching '.1inor: 1 7-21 hours Required : iVlen a n d Women : Physical Education 2 1 0, 292, 341 , 345 ; Men :�(i3 and six hours selected from 270, 271, 272, 273, 346, 450, 465 ; Women 290, 333 and four hours selected from 346, 450, 465. Elemcnt(lry School Prep(lralion : 48 hours

Teaching V l lajor : 24 hours Required: Physical Education 210, 292, 310, 312, .3 4 1 , 345, 346, 450, 465

and five hours o f electives. Teac hing Minor : 12 hours Required: Physical Education 210, 292, 310, :�12, .14 1 , 345.

HiSlory Senior High School Preparation : 45 hours

Teaching Major: ,� o hours Required: History 103, 104, 20:3, 204, 210, plus 1 6 hours in history.

Suggested supporting courses : Fi fteen hours selected geography, political science and sociology.

from

economics,

Mathematics Senior High School Prep(lf(ttion : 45 hours

Teaching 1\<lajor : 27 hours Prere(luisitc.� : Math 112 and 131 or equivalent. Required: Twenty-seven hours of mathematics numbered 200 or ahove,

including Ma th 200, 201 , 301 , .321 , 341, 453, 454. Suggested su p porting course s : Physics 109, no or 151, 152, a n d len hours of scie nces. Junior High School Preparation : 45 hours

Teaching ivlajor : 24-28 hours Prerequisites : l"lath 1 1 2 and 1 3 1 or equivalent. Required: Math 200, 201 , 301, 321, 453. Suggested supporting courses: Physi<:s 109, 1 1 0 or 1 5 1 , 152. Teaching Minor : 17-21 hours Prerequisites : Math 1 12 and 131 or equivalent. Req/lired: Math 200, 301, 321 and 3 hours selected from Math 201 , 34 1 ,

453. Elemen tary School Preparation : 48 hou.rs

Teac.hi n g Major: 24 hou rs Prerequ. isites : Math 1 12 a n d 1 3 1 or equivalent. Required: i"luth 200, 201 , 301 , 321 ; 341 or 453.

Suggested supportinr-; courses : Eir-;ht hours in a related area. Teaching M i nor : 12 hours Twelve hours in the area to be determ i ned in consultation with the School o f Education.

\ D F.\f Jr. OR

IZ.\TIO '

Music Senior lligh School Preparation : 45 h ours

Teaching Major : 45 hours Required: Music 1 1 1 , 1 12, 2 1 1 , 212, 221, 222, 1 4 1 , 142, 243, 244, 340, 341, 342, 440f. Eight hours of private instruction, four of which must be in piano. Four hOllrs of ensemhle must he earned during the junior and senior years. Five hours of upper division music courses are also required. Jullior High School Preparation : 4.5 h ours

Teaching Major : 28 hours Required : Music 1 1 1 , 1 1 2 , 2 1 1 , 212, 221, 222, 341 or 342, 440f, plus four hours of private study, two of which must he in piano and two hours of choir, chorus, hand, orchestra, madrigal singers, or chamber ensemble plus two hours of electives to total 28 hours. Teaching Minor : 20-21 hours Required: Music 1 0 1 , 120, 341 or .342, ,'340 or 440f, plus four hours of private study, two of which must be i n piano, and two to four hours of choir, chorus, hand, orchestra, madrigal singers, or cham her ensemble. In addition, one hour of voice class and one hour of instrumental laboratory is required. Elementary School Preparation : 48 hours

Teaching Major : 24 hours

Required: Music 1 01 . 120, 341 or 342, 340 or 440f, plus four hours of private study, two of which m ust he in piano, and two to four hours of choir, chorus, band, orchestra, madrigal singers, or cham her ensemble. I n addition, one hour of voice clas.., and one hour of instrumental labora足

tory is required. Four to six hours of electives to total 24 hours. Teaching M i no r : 12 hours Required: Twelve hours in the area, courses to be determined in con足 sultation with the School of Education. Physics Senior High Sch ool Preparation : 45 h o u rs

Teaching Major : 25 hours Required: Physics 109, l lO or 151, 152 ; 3 1 1 , 361, 362, and at least one additional lahoratory course. Requi red supporting courses : One additional course in Chemistry; Mathe足 matics 200,* 201, 202. Recommended : i\'lathematics 31 1 . Junior High School Preparation : 4 .5 hours

Teaching Major : 24-28 hours Required: Physics 109, no or 1 5 1 , 152 ; :3l l, and at least one additional la bora tory course ; Mathematic.s 200,* 201. * Students

who are not pre/xLTed to enter Mat h 200 must take the lower d,:vi揃

sian. prerequ isites, but credit lor these courses will not be counted in the major area. Political Science Senior High School Preparation. : 4.5 h ours

Teaching Major : 27 hours

nF.:\ l I c on

IZ \TIO .

Required: Political Science 101 or 30 1 , 251, 252, .3 3 1 , plus fifteen addi

tional hours of electives. Suggested supporting courses : Economics 101 ; 8 hours ; Psychology 101 ; Sociology 101 or 300.

Geography 101 ; H istory,

Science ( General) Senior High School Preparation : 45 hour s

Emphasis on General Science Teaching Maj or : 45 hOllrs Prerequisit e : Mathematics 101 or equivalent. Requ.ired: Riology 121, 1 2 2 ; Chemistry·Physics 1 09 1 10 ; Geology 101, 1 02 ; Physic� 3 1 1 ; Math emutics 1 1 2, 131, 200. E m p h asis on Earth Science Teaching Major : 4 5 hours Prerequisite : Mathematics 131. Required: Geology 1 0 1 , 1 0 2 , 203, 204 and 497, 498. Suggeqed ,upporting courses : General Science 122 ; Chelllistry·Phy,ics 109, 1 1 0 ; B i ology 121. 122. Recommended : Geology 360 may be substituted for Geology 497, 498 ; Gener a l Science 136. ,

Junior - High School Preparation : 45 h ours

Emphasis on General Science Teaching Major: 24-28 hour5 Prerequisit e : Mathematics 1 0 1 . Required: R iology 1 2 1 , 1 2 2 or General Science 1 2 1 ; Chemistry-Physics 109, 1 1 0 ; Mathematics 1 1 2 and/or 1 3 1 ; Geology 101. Emphasis on Earth Scienee Teaching Maj o r : 24-28 hours Re1luire d : Geology 1 0 1 , 1 02, 203, 204. Suggested supporting courses : Gencral Science 1 2 2 ; Chembtry· Physics 109, 1 1 0 ; Mathemutics 1 3 1 . Rec o m mended : Biology 1 2 1 , 1 2 2 ; Geology .3 60 ; General Science 1 :�6 ; Phy,ics 151, 1 52. Emphasis on General Science Teaching Minor : 17-21 hours Courses selected and total hours subjeet to approval of science depart ments and w i l l vary depending upon high. school background of the indi vi dual student. Empha!'-is on Earth Science Teaching "l in o r : 17-2 1 hours Required : Gcology 101, 102, 203, 204, and three to seven hours selected from other general science areas. Elementary School Preparation :

E m p h asis on General Science Te a ching Majo r : 24 hours

hours

Individual programs to be planned by the General Science department i n consultation with the School o f Education. Emphasis on Earth Science Teach ing Maj o r : 24 hours Required: Geology 101, 102, 203, 204 ; General Science 122. Recommended : Chemistry路Physics 109, llO; or B iology 121, 122. Social Science Senior High School Preparation : 45 hours

Teaching ]I,'laj o r : . 45 hours Required: History 103, 104, 203, 204, 2 1 0 ; Economics 1 01 or 300 ; Geog颅

raphy 1 0] ; Political Science 101 or 2.51 or 301 ; Sociology 10l or 300 and Psychology 441 or Sociology 441. Suggested supporting courses: Sixteen hours to b e taken from not more than two of these fields: economics, political science, psychology or sociology. A minimum of ten hours mm;t be in one field. Junior High School Preparation : 45 hours

Teaching Majo r : 24-28 hours Required: Economics 101 or 300 ; Geography 1 0 1 ; History 103, 1 04, 203,

204, 2 1 0 ; Political Science 101, 251 or 301 ; Sociology 1 0 1 or 300. Teaching Minor : 1 7-21 hours Required: Twelve hours in history and n i ne hours selected from other social science areas ; or eight hours of history and 9 t o 13 hours selected from the other social sciences-economics, political science, psychology or sociology. Elementary School Preparatio n : 48 hours

Teaching Majo r : 24 hours Required: Sixteen hours from the following social sciences :

economics, geography, hi.- tory, poli tical science, psychology or sociology. History 203, 204 and 210 are re'luired. Teaching M i n o r : 12 hours Twelve h ours in the area, courses to be determined i n consultation with the School o f Education. Sociology Senior High School Preparation : 45 hours

Teaching Maj o r : 27 hours Required: Sociology 101 or 300, 202, 341 , 412, 431, and twelve additional

hours of electi ves. Su"gested supporting courses : Economics 101 or 300 ; Geography 1 0 1 ; History 8 hours ; Political Science 101 or 300 ; Psychology 101. Speech Senior High School Preparation : 45 hours

Teaching Majo r : 24 hours

OEM I

�

ORC \

IZATT

Required: Speech 101, 104, 250, ,ix hours from 220, 256 or 270 and n ine hours of u p per division electives. Suggested supporting courses : One of the following : ( l ) twenty·one hours in English approved and numbered above 102, or ( 2 ) twenty·one hours in a modern or classical language. Junior High School Preparation : 45 hours

Teaching ["fajor : 24·28 hours Requir ed: F i fteen to eighteen hours in Speech, plus nme to twelve hours in sup porting fields. Tea ·hin!!: Minor: 17·21 hours Required : Speech 1 0 1 , 104, 2.50, plus nine to twelve hours of electives. Elementary School Preparation : 48 h o u rs

Teaching Major : 24 hours Required: F i fteen hours i n speeeh and nine hours in English. Teaching Minor : 12 hours Courses to be determined i n consultation with the School of Education.

PROFESSIONALIZED SUBJECT MATTER Elementary School Teaching In the area of Professionalized Subject 1\.fatter under Elementary School Teaching, a minimum of 12 hours is required. A rt 325 Art i n the Elementary School Education 312 315 319 413 414 416 423 426 429 442

The Teaching o f Reading Instructional Materials The Teaching of Ar ithmetic Science i n the Elementary School Social Studies in the Elementary School-open to experienced teachers only Parent·Teacher Conference Language Arts in the Elementary School-open to experienced teachers only Primary Reading-open to expericnced teachers only Diagnosis of Reading Problems Speech for the Classroom Teacher

Engl ish 321, 322 Children's Literature

Music 340 ivl usic in the Elementary School Health and Phy. ical Education 312 Physical Education i n the Elementary School 341 Methods in Folk Games 342 Problems i n Teach ing Rhythmics

\ ovm

01'( , \

IZ \TIO

SUGGESTED SCHEDULE O F COURSES Elementary School Preparation Freshman

Year

Enp;1 101, 102 Cornpo,ition tReli gion req u i rement Sci 1 2 1 I n trod ucti on to Biological S c ie nc e Sci 122 I n t roduction to l'hy" ical Sciences Soc ial Science electives PE activity *

Electi v,,,

Hrs. (j 2 or 4 I 4 6 2 8 or (, 32

Sophomore Year

Hrs.

A r t 1 1 1 Fundamentals of A r t or :t:Music 1 1 0 Fun da m en t a l s of Music , Geog 1 0 1 World Geography H i,t 2 1 0 The Pacific Northwe't Psy 101 Gen e ra l P.'),chology tReligion requirement 2 or Educ 202 I n t roduction to Education Engli�h elective PE activity Elccth'es

3 4 3 3 2

32 Junior and Senior High School Preparation Freshman Year

Enp:l 101, 102 Composition tRelip:ion requirement

Science Soc'ial S c i e n ce electives PI-: activitv * Elcctin,s

H rs. (, 2 or 4

8 6 2

Sophomore Year

Hrs.

Art o r Music eleetive Hi,t 210 The Pacific Northwest Psy 101 G en era l Psychology ,Religion requirement 2 or Educ 202 I n troduction to

Educa tion

.� 3

.3 4 3 :I 2 11

English elective PE activity §Electi,·e�

:1 2 tSee page 3 7 f o r requ irements in religion.

* Th e s t ll de n t -< h o uld in elude Speech 101 if his score on the proficiency test in s{'eech is not satisfactory. tRelju ired of swdents l,/tlll ning to be el e m e n ta ry school teachers. § Th e swllent should include Health and Physical Edll wtion Oil the {!ro,ficienc), test

210 if h is sco re

in health leas not satisfa ctory.

CHOOL OF FIl"E AND APPLIED ARTS

The School of Fine and A p plied Arts com prises the Departments of Art, M us i c , a n d Speech, offering a broad cultural edu(:ation i n the fi n e arts and special train i ng i n the following areas of study : sculpture, painti ng, applied music, music history and l i terature, theory and composition, drama, speech arts, speech pathology, and telec.ommunications. The objectives of this school are to provide the student specialized traininp; in one of the fine arts ; to provide a cul t u ra l background through the study of the relationship of al l the arts ; and to prepare the student for the profes sional application of his knowledge and traini ng.

D E l i t. oJ I ,

IZ TIO

Degrees Offered The School of Fine and A p plied Arts offers the degrees Bachelor of Fine Arts and Bachelor of Music. Candidates for the Bachelor of Fine Arts degree may concentrate in the Department of Art or Speech. Candidates for the Bachelor of Music degree must complete both the specific courses i n music and the all·university requirements and must meet the ap proved standards of musicianship. In addition to the all·university course requirements, candidates for a degree i n this school must fulfill the following requirements: 1 . The foreign language requirement may vary from 0 to sixteen hours dependent upon the total number of credits earned i n high school and the evaluation of the student's needs by the chairman of the department concerned and his recommendation to the D irector of the School. 2. The science requirement may be met by a year course in science or by Science 1 2 1 ( Introduction to Biological Science) and Science 122 ( Intro duction to Physical Science ) .

Art Candidates for the Bachelor of Arts degree are registered in the College of A rts and Sciences and must meet all general requirements of the College. The specific requirements for the major are found under A rt in the section COURSES OF INSTRUCTION. Candidates for the Bachelor of Arts in Education degree who are planning a teaching major i n Art should refer to page 54 under A CADEMIC PREPA RATION. Candidates for the Bachelor of Fine Arts degree may complete their majors with an emphasis in either oil p ainting , or seulpture, or ceramics. Requirements for a Bachelor of Fine Arts degree with a major in art are 55 credit hours in art. Cou rse requirements for a major in art are A rt l I D, I l l , 1 1 2 , 210, 213, 215, 218, 231, 4 1 1 , 412, 421, and addi tional upper division courses ,to complete the major req uirements.

Freshman Year

Hrs.

Art l I D Introduction to the Visual Arts Art I I I FundamentalH of Art Art 1 1 2 Drawing and Painting Art 210 Creative Design Engl 1 0 1 , 102 Composition Foreign language 101, 102 t Religion req u i rement PE activity Elective,

Sophomore Year

Hrs.

Art 21 5 Sculpture 3 3 2 2 6 8 2 2

T2 t See page 37 for reqli.irement in religion.

Art 2 1 8 Lettering an d Layout A rt 231 Oil Painting ,Religion requirement Science requirement _ Social science elective A p p roved art courses PE activity

__ .

2 2 2 4 8

3 ....... .... 9 2 32

IZ TIO

\C D E.\l l L OUG

Ifrs. 15

Junior Year

Upper division art courses Literature elective Philosophy requirement

3 3

Senior Year

U pper division art courses Social science electives Elect ives

�

t Rel i g i o n requirement

Social science elective

6 11 32

3 6

E l et' l i n!s

Ifrs. 15

tSee page 37 for requirement in religion. Speech The Department of Speech embraces four sec tions: speedl arts, drama, tele communications, and pathology. Candi dates for the Bachelor o f A rts degree are registered i n the College of A rts and Sciences and m u s t meet all general requirements o f the College. The spec i fic requirements for the major are found under Speech i n the section CO RSES O F I STRUCTION. Candi dates for the Bachelor of Arts i n Education degree who are planning a teaching major i n Speech should refer t o page 62 u n der A C A D EMIC PREP

A RATION. Candidates for t h e Bachelor o f Fine Arts degree m a y complete their m ajors with an emphasis in speech arts, drama, or a combination major involving speech arts, drama, telecommunications, or pathology. This degree req uires 48 hours of work within the Department o f Speech.

Badlelor o f Fine Arts Major in Speech IIrs.

Fresh m an Year

Engl 1 0 1 , 102 Composition t Rd igion requirem e n t M u s i c or Art elective

6 2

Science

3 8

Social science elective

Spch 10 1 Fundamentals of Speech Speh 104 Fundamentals of S p eec h Structure Electives

Sophomore Year

Modern language 101, 102 t R e l igion " cquirement A p p roved speech courses _______ PE activity Electjves

llrs. 8 4 12 2 6 32

:3 2 2

PE activity

.3 2 Ifrs. 3

Junior Year

Philosophy requirement t Re li g io n requ i rement Social science electives A p proved speech courses Elect ives

2 ._

,See page 37 for requirement

_ _____

6 15 6

Senior Year

Ifrs.

Literature elective Social science elective

3 3 15 11

Approved speech electives

Electives

32 religion.

A. lastrurnelltal Performance

lu.nior Year

Hrs.

Mus 350 Piano (Advanced) or ·Ius 352 Organ Mus 360 Class Piano or Mus Vi2 Class Organ Mus 311 Modal Counterpo i n t Mus 312 Tonal Counterpoint Lvlus :321 Mmic in the Renaissance Mus 322 !Vlusie in the Baroque IVlusic ensemhle Approved musi" electives Literature elective Philosophy requi rement tRcligion requirement

Senior Year

Hrs.

'1\1115 350 Piano (Advanced) or 4 2 2

.1 3 2 6

3 .3 2

'Mils 352 Organ Mus 360 CIa,s Piano or Mus 362 Class Organ Mus 411, 412 Form :'1'1115 423 Classic and Romantic \Iusie MilS 424 Contemporary Music M�c ffi�m� Mus 1.37 Chamber Ensemble Music electives Electives

2 4

3 3 2 2 6 6

.12

'12 'Studcnts planning to major in vocal or instrumental performance must take llJ)O credits a semester. During the first year a voice major will take one hour of piano and one hour of voice each semester. 'Not t(lken by majors in vocal or instrumental performalice. 'F arm III recital rcrluired during senior year.

tSec page .37 for requirement in religion. B. VOCflI Performance Junior Year

Ifrs.

1\"lus 354 Voice (Advanced) 1\"1115 321 Music in the Renaissance !\Ius 322 Music in the Baroqlle ;\'Ius .311 l\Iodal Counterpoint Mus 312 Tonal Counterpoint l\!us 341 Choral Conducting \OIus 135 :Vladri�al Singers and Vocal Ensemble Music ensemble Mus ISO Piano 'Foreign language tReligion requiremcnt

4 3 3 2 2

2 2 2 8 2 32

Senior Year

'Mus 354 Voice (Advanced) Mus 423 Classic and Romantic 'rlusic Mus 424 Contemporary lI,'Iusic 'rIus 4] I, 412 Form 1'1'luoir. ensemble \-Ius 435 Opera Work -hop 'rIusic electives Literature elective Philosophy requirement

II rs. 4 3 3 4 2 4 4 3 3 ,30

\C\[)fol\Il( nIH": \ 'IZ TIn

C. History and Literature Jnnior Year

Senior Year

Hrs.

Mus 311 Modal Counterpoint Mus 312 Tonal Counterpo i n t Mus 321 Music in the Renaissance Mus 322 Music in the Baroque Mus 427 Bar.h Music ensemble Mus .'\50 Piano (Advanced) 'Foreip;n lan嚙線ap;e Mus 141, H2 Strings Music dective tRcligion requiremen t

2 2 3 3 2 2 2 B 2 4 2

Hrs. 4

Mus 4 1 1 , 412 Form Mus 42.3 Classic and Romantic Music Mus 424 Contemporary Music Mus 428 Musicology \1usic ensem blc Mus 426 Music in Antiquity and Middle Ap;es 1\'fusic electives Literat ure elective Philosophy requirement

.3 2

3 6 3 3 .'\2

D. Theory and Composition Jnnior Year

Hrs.

Mus 141, 142 Strinp;s Mus 321 Music in the Renai,sance Mns 322 Music in the Baroque Mus 3 1 1 Modal Counterpoint Music :,12 Tonal Counterpoint .vIusic ensemble iVIus 341 Choral Conducting i\-Ius ISO Piano or Mus 350 Piano (Advan ced ) j'vIus 491 Com position Mu.,ie electives Philosophy requirement tHclip;ion requirement

2 3 3 2 2 2 2

Senior Year

lIrs.

Mus 411, 412 Form Mus 423 Classic and Romantic Music Mus 424 Contemporary Music Mus 415. 416 Orchestration Mus :142 Instrumental Conducting Mus 491 Composition Music elective Li terature elective

2 5

.3 .3 4 2 6 3 3 .30

4 3 2

32 'The number of honrs rc"nired is determined upon the evaluation of the student's needs by the chairman and his recommendation to the Director of the School. 'Formal recital required during sellior ycar. tSee IJUge 37 for require/nen! in religion.

SCHOOL OF NURSING The School o f Nursi ng is a professional school which meets the University requirements for the degree of Bachelor of Science in Nursing. It is accredited by the Washington State Board o f Nursing which qualifies the p;raduates of this school t o take the licensi n g exam i nation. Graduates who pass this examination ( R egistered Nu rse) are qualified to fi'll first level staff nursing posi tions i n health agencies.

C \DD11

OR,

IZ TID

Philosophy and Purpose The School of Nursing accepts the ehallenge to p repare p rofessional nurses who recognize and participate in the r espon sibili ties and op po r tu ni tj es for Christian service in nursing. The faculty acknowledges i ts resp onsibil ity to p romote high quality p rofessional nursing services for manki nd. The School believes that nursing as a profession should be concerned with the physi cal, mental, emotional, social and spiritual health of the individual. Therefore, the faculty strives to guide the students to develop a sense of responsibi l ity and to acquire the knowledge and skills for nursing. The prepa ration of the professional nurse also includes cultural growth through the use of tbe vari ollS di sci pl i nes of the University.

Health The nursing student maintains her own optimum health and is a pr o moter and teacher of health. Physi cal exam i nati ons, x- rays, and immunizations arc requ ired prior to a d m i ss ion , to the cl ini c al arca and periodically thereafter, and are the resp o n si b i li ty of the students. Students should carry personal health i nsura nce while in the clin ical program.

Special Fees In addition to regular university costs, students should be prepared to pay the ('ost of tram' p ortation between the campus and the c l inical u nit;:, health exam ination fees and student un iforms ( appro x ima tel y $70.00).

The Nursing Program This program is planned for high school graduates a n d may be completed i n four ac ademi c years b y students who meet the School requirements. Through this p rogram o f g eneral and professional edu(:a tion, �tudent� may prepare themselves for beginning po�itions in p ro fe;:" i onal nllT'>ing, and are prepared for conti n u i ng th ei r educa tion at the graduate level.

Admission and Curriculum Requirements In additio n to the requirements for admission to the University, the School of Nu rsing requires a one-year high sc hool course i n both biology and chemistry, and a minimum cumula tive grade point average in high ;:chool of 2.5.

Deficiencies will need to be remo v ed prior to enrolling in the foar-year course. To enroll in the clinical nursing courses a student must have a cumulative grade point average for the freshman college year of 2.0; must give evidence of physical, emotional, mental and manual a p titu de for nurs ing ; must posse s personal altitudes and i deals which are desirable in n u rsing ; and must he a pproved by the School of Nu rsing faculty. This approval follows completion of th e cOllrses listed under the freshman year i n the curriculum. Standa rds required for admission must be maintained throughout the pro gram if the candidate is to retain her standing in the School.

(/Hi:; \

IZ TI

A candidate who hae attended some other institution, including graduation a degree in nursing provided she meets the general requirements for admission to the School of Nursing, TransIerrable ('[edits will be evaluated on an individual basis, The graduate nurse applicant may receive nedit for her earlier education on the ba.,is of the policy of the l:niversity for Advanced Placement. (See Advanced Placement .Program, page 1.5.)

from an approved sehool of nursing, may receive credit toward

The School of Nursing faculty reserves the right to request the withdrawal of a nursing student who fails to demonstrate competency, or who faile to maintain professional standards, Re

OllJ'Ces,

Facilities and Servi(,es

To provide the best learning experience in the vanous clinical fields under the direct supervision of its faculty, the School utilizes the hospitals and health agencies in its immediate vicinity induding their libraries and classrooms. Clinical laboratory learning is directed by regular University faculty members in the following facilities: GOOD SAMARITAN HOSPITAL, Puyallup, Washington (71 beds) Paul Teslow, Administrator Virginia Lovett, R.N" Director of Nursing Service

LAKEWOOD GE NE R A L HOSPITAL (l00 bed,)

Hnrry Sanislo, Administrator Walter Wilhelm, As.sistant Administrator Ortha .I, oble, R.N., Director of Nur:-;ing MADICA

GENERAL HOSPITAL (.5:ifi beds)

Drip;. Cen. Byron L. Stegar, Hospital Commander Lt. Col. Theresa S. LaPlante, ANC, Chief, Nursing Service MOU

TAIN VIEW GENERAL HOSP-ITAL (287 beds)

Claris Allison,M.D., Superintendent Agnes 路Wilson, R,N" Director of Nurses TACOMA路PIERCE COUNTY HEALTH DEPARTl\!ENT

C. R. Fargher, M.D" Director of Health Edith Mitchell, R.N., Chief of Nursing Division

VETERA S

DMINISTRATION HOSPITAL (American Lake) (904 beds)

Thomas A. March, M.D.,Hospital Director Florence (\01, taske, R.I., Chief, Nursing Service Florenee H. Muehlhauser, R.N" Associate Chief, Nursing Service for Education

"DDnr (me

rz TIn

Curriculum in Nursing PrOb'Tam Freshman Year

li rs.

Biology 161, 162 Human Anatomy and Physiology Biology 201 Microbiology.. Chemistry 112 O rganie Chem i, try Engl 101, 102 English Co III po,ition Nursing 103

4 4

Sophomore Year lirs. Nursing 235 , 2.36 Mcdical·Surgic:al Nu n,in g Religion-two e1ec.tivcs from cou rses 112, 201, 202

Psychology 240 Elementary A na lysi, 6

Sociol ogy 101 PE activity.

P�y 101 General Psyc hology

3 3

Re ligion 101 Life of Jesus..

Introduction to Nursing

Introduction to Sociology

3 3 2

PE activity

32 Junior Year

IIrs.

ursing 335 Maternal·Child , !u r� ing 10 Nursing 435 Psychiatric: Nur�ing. 8 Psychology 301 3 Human Development Religion elective Social. Science elective Sociology 430 The F amil y . Fine A rt� elective

Senior Year

lirs.

3 N IHsin g 402 Trends in Nursing Nur,i ng 436 Public. Healt h Nu rs ing 9 Nu rsi ng 4iS Senior Nu rsi ng 10 Literature elective 3 3 Philosophy elective Elective and/or Independent Study 4

3 3 3

32 Purpo�e

DIVISION OF GRADUATE STUDIES

The Division of G rad uate Studies is an aU· u ni ver sity division coordinating and integrating the work of the unde rgraduate schools and colle ges, which through its various departments provides graduate level work. Its general objective is to further the hasic objectives of the University by providing advanced graduate level academic and professional work. Its s pe c ifi c objectives are: (l) to in· crease the breadth and depth of understanding of the graduate stu dent in one or more of t he liberal arts discipline�, (2) to increase the student's kno wl ed ge of the research being done in his field of co nce nt ration and to increase his ability to read the professional journals of his area of interest, (3) to d eve lop the student's ability to do i nd e p endent study and research, and (4) to prepare students through the upper division and graduate division, and through the University's profession al schools, for entry into a vocation directly, or to ent er other graduate schools for further advanced study lea din g to the Docto r's degree. Adm ission

Students hol din g a Bachelor's degree from an accredited col le g e or univer sity who attained an undergraduate !'cholastic honor·point ratio of 3 . 0 during their senior year of college may be admitt ed and granted regular slaWs in the Division of Graduate Studies. Those with less than an average of 3.0 will not he considered for regular MaillS until they have de mons trated their ability to do graduate work by a minimum of 10 semester hours work with a grade point average

74 of ,1.0. Stu de nt s maJormg in an area of professional education must have met all requirements for teaching certification. All students expecting to enter Divi�ion of Graduate Studies will he exppcted to take an admission examina tion at the niversity's Office of the Director of Testi n g and have the results forwarded to the OAice of the Director. Further supporting evidence in the form of personal recommendations may he requested. Students applying for admission to graduate study as regular status students should submit the completed application blank (available from the office of the Dire tor of Graduat Studies) plu two official transcripts. This should he done before or during the first session of registration in graduate courses. Approval of adm ission to the Division of Graduate Studies does not imply admi sion to I'and i dacy for the degree. II corre pondence concerning admission should be di rected to the Di rector of Graduate Studies. Classification of Students Admitted to GraduDte Study 1. Those stud nts approved for unqualified admission to graduate study hy th ir resp cti ve !!;cuduate committees are granted regul a r status. 2: Students adm itted u nder the provi ions of special stallls may include those who wish to pur ue eourse work with no intention of qualifying for an advanced degree, those who are tr ansient registrants and those who fail to qualify for admission to r egula r status. Assignment to Advisers Regular st at u s students are assigned the Director of Graduate Studies as their major dviser. The c h airma n of the department in which the student takes his minor field of concentration b comes thp. student's minor adviser. pedal status students are dvised by the chairman or a member of the student's major department.

l\olaster's Degrees Offered Master of Arts· This program of study includes a major concentration in education or a teaching field and a minor completed in one of the departments of the niversity. For his major the student selects one of the following fields: Elementary or Se('ondary School Adm in istration, Guidance and Counseling, o r Elem ntary or Secondary Classroom Teaching. Students w ishing to minor i n departments orher than those offered may complete work at another i nstitution if prior approval is given by his graduate committee. Master of B u siness Administration· The purpose of the program is to provide, through education, a founda tion for responsihle leader hip in business. faster of Natural Science· This program is designed e. pecially for teachers who need to extend and hroaden their knowledge in the fields of sci nce and mathematics. Th" total g ra dua te program, in cluding approval of the student's research work, is supervi ed by a graduate committee composed of the D i rector of Gradullte Studie, two representatives of the colle e or school offering the major, and the chairman (or his representative) of Lhe department of the • Dewils

0/ tltis program "uzy be obtnined from tlte office 0/ the Director 0/

Graduate Studies.

DDII

OJ(

minor field_ A minimum of thirty semester hours is

IZ\TIO -

required. Six sem ester hours

of graduate work may he taken at another institution provided that approval h as been given by th e student's graduate committee_ Regular status stu dents must have their proposed programs of cour,es ap proved hy their resp e cti ve gr aduat e committees along with approval of admis�ion

before or during the first session of registration as

regular status st udent.

Standnrds of Work The m i n i m um standard acceptable for regular status students is a grade point average of .'l.0 in both the m aj or and minor. Resellrch Requirements A,

an importanl part of h.is MaRler" pro"ram, the "lUdent io re<jllired to

show that he ean do independent research. For t his purpose he may el ec t to follow one of two plans: (, ompl ete a thesis or write two or three resea rch papers. Whichever plan he elects to follow, before embarking o n his res ea rc h , the ca nd id a te must present an outline of his proposed research to his com mit tee for approval. This outline should fo ll ow a p res cr i b ed plan obtainable upon request. After his proposal for research has been a pp rov ed, he must report

to the a p prop r iate adviser periodically for evaluation of his work. The res earc h its final form must be prese nt ed to the graduate r.ommittee for its approval. This mu t be done at least six we e ks before the awarding of the de�ree. If the stud en t elects to follow the first pl a n , the thesis must be wri tten in his major fidd o f con cent r ation. If he follows the second plan, the research may in

all be do n e in the major field or pa rt l y in the maj or and partly in the minor . Under the the3is plan, the student is required to submit two typewritten

copies of his thesis (to be bou nd later) , the orill i n al for deposit in the U n i ve r sity li br ar y and the first carbon copy for the D i vi sio n of G raduate Studies. Under the r esear c h paper plan, the s t uden t also must deposit typ ew ri tte n copies of each paper with the Di vis i on of Graduate Studies. Examinutions A writte n comprehensive examination over the required

courses

and

the

major ar ea of concentration, a s well as an o ral examination on th e thesis or re;;enrch, is r eq uire d . The wr i tt e n exami nation is under the direction of the

D ir ect o r of Graduate Stu die s and must be s uccess fu ll y passed not later than six weeks pr i or to co mm encement. Examinations in the mino r are optio n al with the department concerned. The oral examinati on over the thesis or research is u nd er the d i r ect i on of the graduate committee and must be c omplet e d not later than four weeks prior to commencement. Time Limit All requirements for the Master's degree must be completed within

seven

years. The seven-year period covers all wo rk submitted for the com pl etion of the Master's degree regardless of whether the work was taken as special status or reglliar status, as well as credit transferred from a nothe r institution, com· p rehen si v e examination, thesis, and final oral �amination. Residence Requirement All candidates for the Ma. ter', degree must cOl1lplete a minimum of 24 hour, in residence. This requirement may be fulfilled by either Olle ful l academic

year in a ttendanc e or three full Slimn ers.

se le ct i on

of Di r e c t o r of Graduate

minor

rcports

re·

written examination

research

thesis

Graduation

fee and f(�e for binding

Business Oflice

Graduate Committee

Final oral e;o;amination on thesis or

research papers

Graduate Committt:e

_\[inor Department

Dire ct or of G ra du at e Stu dies

Registrar's Office

Adviser

Filing of thesis or n�search papers

minor where reqllired

Comprehensive examination over

over major

Comprehensive

papers

the,is

Rep:istration for th esis

search papers

Progress

Graduate Committee

ment

major, Chairman of depart

of School or Collcp:e of the

Studies, Two represf;ntatiH�s

regular .<talUs student.

Not later than the semester hdore the

t ration as a

�tlldent.

the semester in whieh stud ent

year

six

hut not latcr than

but not later than

four weeks before commencement.

tinal

year

fOllr weeks h,'fore COI1lIllCIH"elllcnt.

During

During final

weeks before commcneem.;nt.

Durinp: final year hut not later thun

student takes hi, dep:rec.

weeks before eommencement in which

During final year but not later than six

student takes hi, degree_

weeks hefore eommeneernent in whid,

During final year but not later than "ix

takes his degree_

before

Not later than the last rep:istration dates

Periodic e"aluation and apprond.

commencement in which student take"

of dep:rec

slatus

sessi on of rep:is

regulal

his degree.

approval

istration as a Before or durinp; fll-st

papers

and

Graduate Committee, composed

Before or during the first >,es�ion of reg·

Dale

tb(;si ;; problem or prohlems for research

Selection

progranl

trati on ,

major and minor areas of Goneen

A pproval of admi,sion,

Director of Graduate S tudies

i\ pplieation for admis<;ion to the Di

,·i"ion of Graduate Studie,

Under the Direction 0/

Procedures

Summary of Procedure5 for Master's Degree

�

§' '"

c: T-

�

:n'

" ....J r1l

T-

c::: 't8-=.. "I, ::; � '; ' �

� E C�

� �

�

:;::::"'("tl

: �� E

o' ?

if. '.I,

....

c;:.,

Or.

'" :.,.,

" ;3 :t ., �� == � :; =.

� "

�� 0.. 0

� '�' �

Q ...,..

�

� g(t :0

�.

(J::! "

�

::1. � � ;' ("\) . (j ::: 0 rJ=? .. .... ..... ;::-.. =' ....., =-c::.o....o. (t . (tI

g-�s

'-"

j -.

N >

.....

;)

::2 ....

..,

'-l 0;

78 Courses of Instruction The course requirements for the College of Arts and Sciences and the Col· lege of Professional and Graduate Studies, including the School of B usiness Administration, the School of Education, the School of F ine Arts, the School of ursing, and the Division of Graduate Studies, are listed in the preceding !'eetion, Academic Organization.

In the following pages will he found the courses of instruction. While most of the courses listed are given every year, a syste m o f alternating upper division suhjec;ts is practiced in some departments, t hereby assuring a broader offering. Courses open to freshmen and sophomores are numbered 101 ·299 and are considered lower division subjects. ourges open to juniors and seniors are numbered 300·499 and a re regarded as upper division su bjects. Cou rses num· be r ed 500 or above are open to graduate students only. Courses num· bered in the 300's and 400'5 are open both to graduates and upper division undergraduates. Such courses may be a part of the graduate program provided they are not specific requirements in preparation for graduate study. The st udent should h av e his entire program made up of subjects in the division in which he classifies. In exceptional cases second semester sophomore students may be as igned t� an upper division course if the prerequisites for the conrse have been met. In such cases the course cannot be counted toward lhe 40 hours of upper division courses required.

The University reserves the right 10 modify specific c ou rse requirements, to discontinue classes in which the registration is regarded as insuffi cient, and to wi thdraw courses. Explanation of Symbols Number after course title ind ic a t es semester hours credit g iven. Symbols are explained as follows: I

II I,ll

I TT

Cour. l e offered first semeHer Cou.rse

offered second semester

Course offered first and second semester in sequence Course offered either

semester

Course offered in the summer

aly (G )

Course offered alternate years beginning with year listed Course may be used on graduate programs as major

ART Mr. Roskos, Mr. Elwell, Mr. Kittleson, assisted by Mrs. Engeset

Tbe aim of this department is to offer instruction and gui dance to those who d ire to give expression to their creative ability in the actual practice of art, 10 those who wish t o study art for i ts cultural value, to those who plan to teach in elementary, jUllior or senior high school.

OF r

flO

The re quireme nts for the B achelor of Fine Arts with a major in art arc outlined under the School of Fine and A ppl ied Arts in the section, Academic Or�anization. Req uire m ents for a major in art for thr B ache lor of rts degree are 27 credit hours including Art Ill, 112, 210, 213, 411, 412, 421 and electives to c omplete requirements, Candidates for this degree are re g istered in the College of Arts and Sciences.

Candidates for the Bachelor of Arts in Education de ree who are planning a teach in g major in Art should refer to page 54 under ACADEMlC PREPA RATIO .

1 10 Inlroduclion to the Visual Arts .'l ,

An introductory survey course of the visu a l arts of all times. An ap proach is made to s eeing the products, and understanding the processes, of the artist-painter, sculptor, architect and designer. The survey in cludes: a re view of the artist's materia ls and ter minolo " ', plastic or ganization, sym b ol and content, natural forms, and aesthetic critici:;m. Slide-lecture course and museum field trips, when possible . I II III Fundamelllals 01 Art 3

This is a course giving the basic: fundamentals of art, ill cludi nf( a otudy of .proportion, values, composition, per 'pective, and co lor theor., which are necessary for creative expression. Media ar e pencil, charcoal, water colors, and pastel. Six h ou rs laboratory per week. 1 1I

1 12

DrQloing arid Pairuing 2

This is a concentrated course of stu d y in the drawing of the human figure, color and composition, and watcr color t echniq ues. Prerequisite: rt Ill. Four hours laboratory per week. I II

210 Crealive Design 2 Attention is concentrated on the principles of design which are devel oped through the study of line, mass, color, and spa c e relationships. Four hours laboratory per week. II

213

Ceramics 2

A course for beginners in ceramic techniques and methods incl uding modeling, potter's wheel, kiln firing, mold making and basic glaze preparation. I

215

Sculpture 2

A c ourse for beginn ers in the various techniques and methods of sculp tural form. I I

218

Leuerirl1: and LaYOld 2

Principles of l et tering and lettering construction followed by layout de sign and its ap pli c ation to the visual communic ati on and adve rti sing arts. II

c l ) l1 r.

I "' I U CTI O

2 3 1 Oil Painting 2

A course for beginners in oil paIntIng techniques and a study i n be ginninp: composition and criticism. I 3 1 3 Ceramic.� 2

Emphasis on i ndividual study of form and desip:n in pottery includinp: an experimental study of the I:omposition o f bodies and gl azes. I

3 1 4 Ceramic.. 2 Continuation of Art :l 1 3. II a/y 1 964-65 3 1 5 Sculpture 2

Offers c.oncentration in more and varied media and technique. Media are clay, plaster, stone, wood, and welded metals. Prereq u isite : Art 2 1 5 . II

3 1 6 Sculptllre 2 Continuation of Art :l I S . II a/y 1965-66

325 Art ill the Elementary School 2 A course planned for those who intend to teach art in the elementary grades. Appropriate projects i n drawing, design and eonstrnqion are

worked in various media to illustrate the types of work which are su i t able to the i nterests and abilities of these pupils. Prerequisi te : Prefer· ably Art I l l. Four hours of combined lecture and laboratory. I II

33 1 Oil Painting 2 Pictorial arrangements of still·life, figure, and l a ndscap e work rendered in oil!;. Emphasis placed on composition, values, color, a n d brush tech nique. Prerequisi t e : A rt 231. Four hours laboratory per wet'k. I

332 Oil Painting 2 Conti nuation of A rt 3.3 1 . II al y 1 965-66 4 1 1 History 0/ Art .'1

The course is planned to i ncrease the student's appreclatlOn o f works o f art. A general survey is made o f architecture, sculpture, and paint· ing from the pre-classical arts to the arts of the Renaissance. I alY 1964·65

4 1 2 History 0/ Art 3 This course is planned to i ncrease the studen t's a p preciation of works of art. A general survey is made from the arts of the Renaissance to the twentieth century. II 413 Ceramic.� 2

A continuation of Art 313, 314, with emphasis on the i n dividual student direction and specialization in style and technique. Prerequisi te : Art 314, 314. I 414 Ceramics 2

Con tinuation of Art 413. II a/y 1964·65

COl Ii F...; OJ

1 In (TI O

4 1 5 Sculpture 2 A continuation of Art 315, 316 with an emphasis on dividual direction and specialization in the chosen media. Prerequisite Art 315, 316. 1 1

4 1 6 Sculpture 2 Continuation of Art 415. II alY 1965-66

421 Hi'�'ory 0/ Modern Art 3 A course in which a comprehensive survey is made of architecture, sculpture and painting from the early nineteenth century to the pres· ent. I aly 1965-66

431

Oil Painting 2 A continuation of 331, 332 with an emphasis on individual student direction and specialization in style and technique. Prerequisite : Art

331, 332. I 432 Oil Painting 2 Continuation of Art 431. II aly 1965-66

440a Art in the Secondary School 2 A course plan ned for those who intend to teach in the secondary grades. Four hours combined lecture and laboratory per week. Prerequisite : Art

1 1 1 .or consent of instructor. II a/y 1965-66 450 Special Problems 2-4 A course planned for advanced students majoring in art who wish to secure greater proficiency in any particular field in which the studcnt feels more training is needed. I II

550 Re.• earch 2·6 For those Master of Arts candidates who elect t o write a research paper in the arts. Candidates will be required to review their research papers before the graduate committee. I II

BIOLOGY Mr. Leraas, Mr. Gerheim, Mr. Guilford, Mr. Knudsen, Mr. Ostenson, Mr. Pattie, Mr. Schamberger The cour>;e of instruction i n this department is planned to give

funda

mental background in the principles and developments of modern hiology, a n acquaintance with scientific methods a n d discoveries, a n d an ap preciation for its significant contribution to modern life. Programs may he designed to give the student the foundation necessary to enter a variety of fields. Among career opport unities available are teaching, medicine, dentistry, veterinary medicine, medical and hospital technology, nursing, public health, graduate study, medical and industrial research, agri culture, forestry, fish and wildlife, microbiology, entomology and related fields. A major in biology consists of a minimum of 24 hours, at least 12 in upper division courses. Required su pporting subjects for the major are one year of

or I

Chemistry and Mathematics 1 3 1 . Strongly recommended courses are Chemistry 20.3. 204 and Physics 151, 152. a

Candi dates for the Bachelor of Arts in Education degree, who are planning teach ing major i n B i ology should refer to page 54 under ACAD EMIC

PR E PARATION. A major for the Bachelor o f Science degree (;onsists o f a minimum o f :'15 hours. Required supporting '5ubjects are Chemistry 1 2 1 , 122 or Chemistry 131, 1 32 ; Chemistry 203, 204 ; Physics 151, 152 ; Mathematics 1 3 1 . A m i n i m u m of 60 credit hours i n ,cience and mathematics is requi red. No more than 40 hours in biology may be counted towa rd gradu a tion. The general course requirements o f the College o f Arts and S" iences !l1lht abo be fulfilled.

CurricullLm in Biology lor the Bachelor 01 Science Degree Freshman Year

B ioI 1 2 1 , 122 General Biology Engl 101, 102 Composi tion 'Foreign Language 101, 102 t Religinn requirement Social Science requirement PE activity

llrs. 8 6 8 2 6

2 :32

Sophomore Year

Biology a p proved courses Chemistry 109, 1 10 Chemistry足 Physico Foreign language 20 1 , 202 Math 131 College Algebra t Religion req u i rement PE activity

Hrs. 8 8 6 :j

4 2 32

Junior Year

llrs.

Fine rt;; r,lective Biology approved courses Chemistry 203, 204 O rganic Chemistry Physics 1 5 1 , 152 Essentials o f Phy"ics t Religion requir,ement Social Science elective (u pper division )

3 8 8

Senior Year

Biology app roved cou rses . Literature requirement Philosophy requirement Soc ial science ele{;tive App roved electives

8 2

Hrs.

12 3

3 3 11

3 32

'Swdents who enter the University with two years of

m odem language may

elect to take second year courses in the sam e la n g uage durin g the fres h m an ycar. tSee page 37

for requirements in

religion .

1 2 1 , 1 2 2 General Biology 4, 4 An i n tegrated ,tudy of hasic concepts concerning living organisms. A n exploration o f plant a n d animal commun ities, structure, function, reproduction and hehavior, including princi ples o f genetics, molecular biology and evo l u tion. Two lectures and two laboratories ( or field trips) per week. I , I I

1 6 1 , 1 62 Human Anatomy and Physiology 4, 4 A study of the structure and functions of the human hody. Two lectures and two laboratory periods per week. I, II 20 1 Microbiology 4 Introductory study of mic.ro-organisms that include their metaholi�m, morphology and staining properties. Two lec:tures and two laboratory periods per week. Prerequ isite : Biology 122 o r 161. II

208 Plants 0/ tlte North'f)est 2 Primarily for teachers who desire to become familiar with ,the common plants o f the region. Instruction i n c.ludes the collec.tion and identific.a tion of plants_ II

22 1 Biological Techniques 2 Methods of collecting and preservi ng biological materials for classroom and research study. Prerequisite : Biology 122. S

222 Conservation 0/ Natural Resources 2

;urvey

of the p r i nc.iples and problems of public a n d private steward

�hi p of our resou rces w i t h special reference to the Pacific Northwest. II

2 3 1 (;enetic.� .'1

A study o f the dynamics o f VarIatIOn and inheritance. Upper division credit may b e earned with additional studies. Prereq uisite : Science 121 or Biology 122 or 162.

242 Sy..rematic Botany .'l Historical survey of classification systems ; the use of taxonomic keys i n the identification of plan ts. Prerequ isite : Biology 122. I I a / y 1965-66

272 General Entomology 4 Classification and natural history of insects with a strong emphasis on lahoratory and field studies and collections. Upper division credit may be earned with additional studies. Prerequisite : Biology 122. II a/y 1965·66

274 Microtechnique 2 Principles and practice in methods of preparing histological, embryo logical and cytological specimens for microscopic study. Prereq uisi te : Biology 122 o r 162.

( ( I

n L OF I STI H Tit)

3 1 1 Ornithology 2 A study of the bi rds, with emphasis on local kinds. Designed for stu· dents with a hobby interest in birds as well as for advanced students in biology. Prerequi,ite : Biology 122 or conseM of instructor. II 323 Natural History 0/ Invertebrates 4 An ecological, physiological and taxonomic consideration of invertebrate natmal history with an emphasis on marine biology and field studies. Lectures, l a boratory studies, and field collectiom'. Prcrequi,ite : 122. I aly 1964·65 324 Natural History 0/ Vertebrate.5 4 Cla,sification, natu ral history and economic importance of the verte· brates with the exception o f b i rds. Lectmes, laboratory studies and fi"ld collections. P rerequisi te : B iology 122 ; 361 recommended. IT aly

1964·65 344 Plant Phy.�iology 3 Cell physiology pert a i n i ng to plants and mineral nutrition, water econo· my, ,",oils and auxin,. Prerequ isite : B iology 122. I 3 5 1 , 352 Natural History 0/ the Pacific Northwest 3, .1 A n extensive field a n d laboratory course covering major phases of the natural history o f the region. Designed as a workshop i n outdoor educa· tion especially for teachers of science at elementary and junior high levels. Lectures, laboratory studies, and field work. Prerequisite : Instn;c. tor's consent. S 3 6 1 Comparative Anatomy 4 A comparative study of vertebrates with dissection of representative forms. Two lectures and two laboratory periods per week. Prerequisite : Biology 122. I 364 Vertebrate Embryology 4 The development of the vertebrate embryo from the germ cell through the embryological states until birth. Prerequisite : B i ology 102 or 1.32. I I 3 7 1 Para.• itology 4 A study of the morphology, life histories and host· parasite relationships of the common varieties o f parasites o f vertebrates with emphasis on those of man. Prerequi,ite : Biology 122. I aly 1965·66 4 1 1 Hi.•tology 4 A m i r roscopic stuuy of the normal tissues and organs of vertebrates. Two lectmes and two l a boratory periods per week. Prerequ isite : Biology 122. 424 Ecology 4 A study of plants and animals in relation to their environment. Two lectures and two laboratory periods per week. Prerequisite : B iology 122.

un n S F

or I

:,TI' UCT lfl

434 Applied Physiology 3 The animal's response to chemical, physieal and psychological stimuli is explained. Prerequisite: Instruc tor's consent.

441 Vertebrate Physiology 4 A course designed to acquaint the student with fundamental mecha nisms of physiology_ Three lectures and one lahoratory period per week_ Prerequ isite : Instructor's consent. II

471 History 0/ Biology 2 Fundamental concepts of h iology. The rise of scientific thought and method are traced_ Prerequ isi te : Instructor's consent. I

481, 482 Seminar 1 , 1 Selected topics in biology based on l iterature and/or original research. Open to juniors and seniors majoring in biology. I II

497, 498 Indepentlellt Study 1 .2, 1 .2 Investigations in fields of special i nterest, not covered by a regular course, may he carried out by qualified students majoring in biology. Prerequisite : Consent o f the chairman of the department.

504, 505 Graduare Research 1·3

BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION Mr. Zulauf, Mr. King, Mr. Peterson, Mrs. Hilbert, Mr. Stintzi, assisted b y Mr. BOlliger, Mr. Harrington, Mr_ Jaenicke, M r . Schimke, Mr. Stevenson

Requirements for the Bachelor of Business Admi n istration degree are listed under the School of Business A d m i n istration i n the section, Academic Organ ization. Candidates for this degree should follow the course outline. Prerequisite t o enrollment i n courses above 300 : Admission to the School of Busi ness Administration or the consent of the Schoo!.

50 lJegillning Typewrir;ng�no credit 103 lJus;nes.� MarhemrJlic.� and Mrlchines 2 Fundamental operation of 10-key and rotary calculators. Application of machines operation to problems in busi ness mathematics. I

142 Advanced Typing 2 2 1 1 Financial Accoullting 4 Balance sheet, income statement, accou nting cycle, adjustments, asset valuation, partnershi ps, corporations, basic cost accounting, fund state ments, analysis of financial statements. I

2 1 2 Managerial Accounting :J Accounting systems, records, standards and analysis to facilitate budget ing, conu"ol, and decisi on-making within the firm. II

:-;THl

'r I O

241 Rusiness Commrmication .1 Letters of i n q ui ry ; orders and acknowledgments ; s al es letters, employ m ent letters ; claims, a d j ustm e nt s , credit, and collection letters ; buoiness re p o rt s . P rprequ isites : B A 50 or eq u i va l e n t , and Englbh 1 02 . I 245 SllOrtiland I 3 Gregg Shortha n d ; for those who have not achieved a minimum standard

in previous trai ning ; emphasis on theory dictation and beg i n n i n g tran·

scrip ti o n . Five hours per week. I 246 Shorthand II .1

Grf'gg Shorthand I I ; em phasizes sust ai n e d sp eed b u i ldi n g i n di c tation a n d transeription. Des i g n ed for those who h a ve c om p l e t e d Busi ness A d m i n istration 245 or who have ac h ieve d II m i n i m u m s t a n dard in pr e· vious t ra i n i ng . II 261 ln ve.� 'ments 2 Place of i nvestment i n e("onomy, rbks of investment, financial informa· tion, sto c k markets and hrokers, financial analysis, concepts of invest· ment valuation, i n \'estment policies, media, and ma nag em e n t . Prerequi. site : 2 1 1 . I 273 Family Financial Planning .1 See E c ono m i e s 273. May c o u n t as credit for major tration.

III

b u s iness a d m inis·

301 Intermediate Economic Analy.• i.• .1 Sec Economics 30l.

302 Intermediate Economic Analysis .1

See Economics .302. 3 1 1 , 3 1 2 Intermediate Accounting .1, .1 Fundamental p rocesses, wo rk i ng c a pi t al i t e m s es p ec i a l l y inventori es, non · c u r rent items w i t h emphasis on i nv p-s t me n ts and pl a nt an d eq u i p · m e n t ac c oun t s , co rp o ra t e c ap i t al , i n c om e de t er m ina t ion , cash· flow and funds statements, an a l y t i ca l p r o c ess es . Pr ere q u is i te : B A 2 12. I , II 313 Federal Income Ta."�ation 3 Tax p r i n c ip l es and tax planning. Personal a n d corporate income tax, includi nl>: capi tal gains. Prerequisite : BA 2 1 2. I 3 1 4 Auditing 3 The princi ples a n d procedures of a u diti ng as they apply to t b e major h a l a n ce sheet and i n c om e ac c o u n ts ; � e n e ral ly acc e pt e d auditing s t and· ards used by CPA's; pro fes si o na l et h ic s . Prere qu is i te : BA 3 1 2 . I I 3 1 5 Cos, Accounting 3 Pr i neipl es of cost accou n t i n g ; job lot and process systems ; standard costs. Use of accumulated and budgeted costs i n financial and mana· gerial accounting. P re re q u isi te : B A 212. I

or I

THl

TIn

3 1 7 Dala Processing Sy.,'ems .'1

Elements of inform ation theory, storage, and retrieval. Business and i n dustrial applications of electronic digi tal compu ters. Fundamentals of programming languages, numher systems, notation, i n put·out, memory devices, peripheral configurations. Familia rization with data processing equipment. I 321 Labor Problems .1

See

onomics 321.

331 In lerrw£ional Trade 3

Spc Economics 3:1 1 . 340 Principles 0/ Bu.line.�s EdlLCaCioJl 2

Objectives of high school husiness programs ; the husi ness curriculum ; sources of i n format ion ; leading business educators ; analysis of current writings ; layout and facilit ies ; evaluating business teachers ; C\'alu ating competence for busi ness occupations ; national and local trends in Imsi· ness educa tion. II 341 Matllematical Stalislics .'1

See :>lathernatics .3 41. 342 Secre tarial Procedure 3

Advanced dictation and transcription ; oOice practice, procedu res and systems ; dictating machines, dupl icating p rocesses. Prerequisites : BA 1 42 and 246 or eq uivalents. II 35 1 Organizalion and Management .'1

Art and science o f management in a dynamic society. Planning, direct· i ng , coordinating and controlling the changing organization. I 352 Production Management 3

Princip les of scientific managemen t ; planning products, physical facili· tics, equipment and materials for production ; methods and techniques of supervision and control of personnel ; production control ; purch as· ing and inven tory management. Prerequisite : BA 441 . II 354 Office Management 3

Application of management principles to office organization. Layout and faciliti c 'J equipment, Aow of work, data processing systems, evaluation and standards. Coordination with other business functions. Prerequisites: BA 212. Il air 1964·65 361 Money ami Banking 3

See Economics 361. 362 P"blic Finance iJ

See Economics 362.

OF I

Tnt

�

364 Business Finance 3 Fi nance m a nagement, short- and long-term financing, instruments of fi nan ce. financial i nstitutions, prom otion, dividend policy, expansion of the firm, and reorga n ization_ Prerequisites : BA 212, 441. n

365 Real Estate 3 Land and huil d i ngs. legal forms, rcal estate market, appraisal . fi n anc ing real estate, puhlic i n terest, p roperty development and management, loca tion th ory. I aly 1965-66

366 Insurance 3 An i ntroduction to the u n derlying p rinci ples of insurance followed hy a descriptive study in the more i m portant branches of the insurance husiness. II aly 1964-65 3 7 1 Marketing .1

Markel i n g functions ; ultim ate consumers : institutions and channels for markd ing consumer and i n dustrial goods ; basic techniques of m a rket ing ; marketing poli cies and government regulation. I

375 Advertising

Role of advertising in the marketing program ; elements of advertise ment, m e di a and methods ; planning and control of advertising pro grams ; psy hological, social and econom i c aspects of advertising_ Pre requisite : BA .3 71. I aly 1965-66

42 1 Penonnel Management :1 Principles and procedures used in obtaining and maintaining an eOicient working force. Prerequisites : BA 441 and Psychology 101. II

422 Collective Bargaining

The princi ples of collective bargai n i n g are studied through the medium of actual cases from American i n dustry deal i n g; with the negotiation and a p pl ication of union- management agreements. Offered on demand.

434 Government and Busines .• .1 See Economics 434. 440b

Busines.� Education in tl.e Secondary School 2

A p p l ication of research findi ngs and psychological principles to the deve10pment of skills, atti tudes, and concepts in typewriting, shorthand, consumer, general busi ness, and oOice practice cou rses, and distributive education. I

441 Statistical Methods 3 See Economics 441

44·2 Records Management .1 The study of fil ing systems and i n formation retrieval. The role of rec ords i n the overall systems approach ; concept of records as an i n forma tion center. In fonnation handling problems i n organization, contml, evaluation, and disposition of records ; protection of vital records ; main tenance of semi-active records ; depository control of archives.

()l H 1

443 5wdies

s rrn

T/(I

in Organizational Communication !l

Problems o f m ai nt a in i ng a Row of oral and wr i t t e n communication as an integrating fo rc e ; c: o n trol l i n g internal activities through a d mi nistr a tive writing. Modern theories and practi ces of organizational in forma tion sy terns and con trols_ Com p re h ens i ve analysis an d evaluation of actual organizational communication situations_

452 Business Policy 2 Formulation of p ol ic ies to integrate all functions of business_ Social, ethical, religious, economi c, educational and i ntern ationa l implications

in t he formulation of busi ness policies and objectivcs_ P re req u isi te : S nior classi fication in the School of B usi ness Admiuistration.

457 Public Arlministralion 3 See Political Science 457.

471 Marketing Management

Product planning ; market invest i gation ; m a rket in g strategy : p r i ce p o l i

cies ; planning and a dm in is t eri n g comprehensive m a rketing programs ; control of m a rk e ting operations. Prerequisites : BA 371, 441. I

473 P"rchasing 3 Organization for purch asi ng ; p u rch asi n g pol i c i es and procedures ; selec tion of so ur ces of ,u p p ly ; q uality and q u ality control of purchased materials ; c ontro ll i n g quantity and price determination_ Offered on demand.

474 Transportalion 3 Functions and characteristics of tra nsp ortat i on services; rates, service and carrier com petition ' coordination o f highway, railroad, air and ocean trarr ic ; i ndu s t ry practices; regulation and promotion by govern

ment. Offered on demand.

477 Sales Management 3 Funetions of the sales manager; o rg a niza tio n ; selection, development, compensation, su p er v i ;;i on and control of salesmen ; sa les pl ann in g and analysis. P rereq u isites : BA 371, 441. I

479 Retailing 3 Physical facilities and requiremenls ; o rg a nization and personnel ; mer

chandise p ol i cy , serviecs;

el ect ion, buyi n g and pricing, and control ; promotion ; managerial controls i n retailing. Prerequisi te : BA 3 7 1 . n

aly 1964-65

49 1, 492 Business Laao 3, 3 Procedures, contracts, agency, n eg ot i a b l e i n struments, business organiza tions, property, trust · and wil ls, tran,portation, i ns ura nc e and

menl. I, II

> m p l o y

499 �fajor Conference 14 In dividual prob lems and assignments, group conferences and research reports. P rereq u is i te : Consent of instructor.

OJ· I

'\ Rl CT I O

552 Seminar i n Managemen t .'1 Advanr,ed reading a n d research i n the management functions o f plan ning, organization, and control. Prerequisite : B A 351 or permission of the School of Busi ness A d m i n istration. Offered o n demand. 599 Independent Research 1-3

Prerequi,'itc : Consent of instructor. CHEMISTRY Mr. A nderson., Mr. Giddings, Mr. Gildseth, Mr_ Huestis, Mr. Olsen

Chemi"try, the study of matter and the ehan/!es which matter can undergo, occ u pies an i m portant posi tion in present day culture_ The triad chemistry, phy,ics, and mathematics provides concepts basic to current work not only in the physir.al sciences but also in the hiolo/!ical sciences, social scient,es, and in the manifold fields of engineering. It is in the light o f this wi de range of present and p o t en tia l service o f chemistry to mankind, service both in tellectual and ma t er i a l , that the department offers instruetion ill chemit'al science. The Jepartment encourages i t s students to give e r io u s c.onsidcration al so to the other ar ea s of "tudy which th ey encounter in this Christian liberal arts institu t io n and which can help them find direction in l i fe . T h e De p a r t m en t of Chemistry is a p p roved by t h e American Chemical Soci ety. T h i s approval a ssu re s students that the department me et s h igh standards in the area of faculty, f ac i l i ties , equipment, and l i b rary reference materiab. a n d it expedites entry of graduates into the che m i c al profes�i on.

tudents planning to b e c o m e p rofessi onal chem ists a r e advised t o follow th e program leading to the Bachelor of Science degree. To be cert i fi ed as gradu

a tes of a c h e m i c a l t ra i n i n g program meeting the requirements of the American Chemical Society, for t h i s degree, c o mp l e ti o n of Chemistry 1 09, no or 131, 132 ; 2m, 204 ; :�09 ; 3 1 1 , 312 ; 32 1 ; :"122 ; 401 ; a n d 422 is required_ Three credit hours o f work selected from the following cou rses also must be com pleted : Chemistry 41 2 ; 441 , 442 ; or 451, 452 or Physics 382 ( Ra di o is o to pe Technol ogy ) . I' 0 more than 40 hours i n chemistry may b e counted toward graduation. Prerequ isites for the above COlm;e;; incl ude Physics 1 09, 1 10 ( or 151, 152 ) and 1athematics 1 1 2, 131, 200, and 201. Recommended supp lementary courses are fathelllutics 202 and 3 1 1 , Ph y s ics 3 1 1 and 312, and Biology 121, 1 22. of

ma j or fulfi l l i n g the requirements for the Bachelor of Arts degree consists

minimum of 24 hours o f chemistry courses plus Mathematics 112 and 13l,

a n d Physics 1 5 1 , 152.

The foreign language requirement for either the Bachelor of A rts Or Bach elor of Science degree should be fulfilled by the st u d y of German. A year of Russian or French is also recommended. The Department of Ch e m istry places great em p h as i s on its undergraduate research and i n dependent study program (d. courses 441, 442 and 451, 452 ) , w h i c h i s conducted both d ur i n g t h e academ ic y e a r a n d during the summ er. In recent ye a rs this program, which provides its student participants special opportuni ties to achieve early professi onal maturity, has been sup ported in

l ar p:c measure by the National Science Foun d at i on. Further information will [(ladly be su p plied by the department.

the nechelor o f Arts i n Education degree who are planning teachinp: m aj o r i n Chemistry !>hauld refer to page 55 u n der ACADEMIC PREPARATION. C a n d i date� for

Curriculum i n Cllemistry for Bacl,elor o f Freshman

Year

Chemi"l r), 109, 1 1 0 Chelll i ' l ry·1'h y,ic,;

6 2 3

lath 1 1 2 Plnne Trigonometry Math 1.31 CoUeg Algebra Math 200 Ana l y t ic Geometry and Calculus

Chern 314 Physical Chemistry l.abor atory Quantitative A na lysi s

422

Advanced

1 6 2 4 4

3 3 2 3So c i a l :--:l : i (�IH'e ref] U i reflJent 6 Elc"tiv . 4 or 5 I norganic Chemistry

'Literature req uirement 'Rel igion requi rt!rnent

fIrs.

re quirement

3 R 4· 7 2

Hrs.

eh . m istry

Ph }'�ic" 'Rel igion ' E l ce t i ve,

4 2 2

Chern ., 09 Ch mical Literature Chern 3 I, 312 Physi c a l

Chem 322 Instrumental Analy�is or .

Year

P I': acti" ily

'ReI igioll req u i rcment PE aClivity

Chem 32

Soph o m ore

Chern 203, 204 Organic Clte mi str y Math 201 An alytic Geom try a n d Calculus Phys 151, 152 E",ent iah o f

R 6

Eng 1 0 1 , 102 Composition 'German 201, 202 Intermediate Ge rm a n

Junior Ycar

dence Degree

H n.

Senior Ycar

Chern 401 Organi

A n a ly i: Chem 422 Advanced Inorgan ic Ch e m i st ry or Chern 322 I nstrumental Analysis Chern 4 1 2 dvanced Organi c ,

Tlrs.

Qualitative

Chemistry

music r qu i remcnt , ociaI science req uircm illS rt or

'Phi losophy requirement Elt'O , tivcs

4 " 4

3 :3 6 3

9-10

32 'As.wm es that two rc ars 0/ German h a ve been cumpleted in. high sch oo l. II not, the language re q u ire men t may have to be met during the sophomore and junior

years.

'See page 37 for requirements in religion. 'Courses thus designated may be taken in any order.

I· :-.E� or I

�1 Bl ( TIl)

103 In 'roductory Organic Chemistry 4 Survey of organic chemistry, in c l ud ing that pertinent to biological sys

tems. Three lectu re, and one 2-hour laboratory period per week. I

104 General Inorganic Chem; .•try 4

Basic aspects of chemical theory a n d inorganic ch emistry . Th ree lec tu res and one 2-hour laboratory period per week. Prereq u isite : Chem i stry 103 or permis., ion of ehairman of De pa r tm en t. II

1 09, 1 10 Chemi.• ,ry-Physics 4, 4

An i n te g ra te d c o u rse in the fundamental prineiples of physics a n d chem istry and their application to physical and chemical problelw;. This cou rse i s a prerequisite for all c h e m i s t ry and physics cou r;;es numbered 200 and abo\'e. Three lectures, one discussion period and one two-hour l ab o rat o ry period per week. P r e re qu isi te : Mathematics 101 o r equiva lent. I, U

132 Chemical Principle.• 1 Supervised s t u dy of [opi."

of u n ique i n terest o r value to the individual student. A d m i "ion only by department i nv i ta t io n . One discus,ion or laboratory period per week. II

203, 204 Organic; Chemistry 4, 4

A n i n terpretation of properties and reactions of aliphatic, aromatic, and heterocyel ic compounds on the basis o f current chemical theory. Labo ra tory work p r ov i d es an i ntroduction to conventional and modern tech niq ues for the synthesis and study of oq(anic compounds. Three lec tures and two 2.5-hour laboratory periods per week. Prerequisite : Chem istry 109, 1 l 0. I , I I

302 Biop'lysical Cl1errustry 4

Introduction to the physical chemistry of biological systems. Intended pri,narily for pre-dental and pre-medical st u de nt s. Three lectu res and one 3-hour l a b orat o ry period per week. Prerequ isites : Physics 1 5 1 , 152, Ch em is tr y 204, and Mathematic.s 131. II

309 Chemical Lileratllre 1 Study of system atic p roce d u re s for l i brary research. One lecture per

week. Prerequisites : Chemistry 204 and rea di ng knowledge of Germ an. I

OF I

TIWCTIO

3 1 1 , 3 1 2 Physical Chemistry .'l, .'l A study of the relationship between the physical and chemical properties and the energy content of chemical systems. Three lectures per week. Prerequi'iites : Chemi,try 110 o r 132 and, p referably, 201 ; Physic, 152, and Mathematics 201. I, II

3 14· Phy.• ical Chemistry Lal)oratory 2 Two three-hour lab oratory periods per week. Should be taken concur· rently with ( or subsequent to ) Chemistry 312.

3 2 1 Quantitatil'e Analysis 4 Chemical methods of quantitative analysis. Two lectures and two 3-hour laboratory periods per week. Prerequisi tes : Chemif;try 103 or 20.3 and Mathematics 1 .1 1 . 1

322 Imtrumental A n alysis 4 Instrumental methods of analysis and molecular structure determ ination. Two lectures and two 3-hour laboratory periods per week. Prerequisites : Chemistry .3 1 1

and 321. Concurrent or prerequisite Chemistry 312. II

aly 1 965-66

401 Orgcmic Qualitative Analy.•is 4 A study of methods for the isolation and identification of orga nic eom pounds. Emphasis is placed on modf'rn techniques such as spectroscopy and chromatography. Two lecture5 and two 2lh-hour laboratory periods per week. Prerequisites :

Chemistry

312

( or 32 1

plus 302 )

and 309.

Chemistry 309 may be taken concurrently. I

412 A d"anced Organic Chemi.• try 3 A study of current organic chemical topics such as electronic theory, molecular structure and reaction mechanisms. Three lectures per week. Prerequisites: Chemistry 204 and 312. II

422 Advanced Inorganic Che mistry .'l A study of modern inorganic theory including atomic a n d molecular structure, periodic trends, and coordination compounds. Three lectures per

week.

Prerequisite:

Chemistry

311.

Concurrent

Chemistry 3 1 2. 11 a/y 1 964-65

.prerequis ite

441 , 442 Indepen den t Study 1-.'l Open to qualified upper division students who wish to study some chem ical topic not covered by a regular course. Proposed project must be approved by the chairman of the department. I II

4 5 1 , 452 Research 1 -.'l Open to superior upper division student�. Prerequisite : Consent of the chairman of the department. I II

5 5 1 , 552 Graduate Research 2-4 Open to M.A. candidates only. Prerequisite : Consent of the chairman of the departrnent. I II

.Ol n ' E" OF I

Tla-r.HO

ECONOMICS Mr. Pierson, Mr. Peterson ; assisted by Mr. Eastman The courses i n ec o n o m i es are des i �l"" d ( 1 ) to offer t o all stu d en ts an oppor· tu nity to a c quire a general understanding of the private and public sectors of the Un i te d t a t es economy so that the y may be mote enlightened c i tizens and voters, ( 2 ) to provide the necessary general economic background for students of bw,iness educ a t i o n , ( 3 ) to p re par"e the student for a career in economics,

and ( 4 ) to provide the student with the n ecessary background for graduate study i n economics. A major i n economics shall consist of a mi nimum of 25 semester hours including E c on o m i cs W I , 102, 2 1 1 , 301, 302, 44 1 , a n d 496. The rema ining three hours to meet the minimal requirements may be sel ec ted from any of the ad d i t i onal advanced courses offered by the Department of Economics. Student contem plating graduate study in economics a re stron�ly advised ( t hotl�h not required) and 202 ) .

t o study elementary calculus O 'fathematics 200, 201,

1 0 1 Principle.t 0/ Economics 3 n analysis of the U. . economy from the a{!gregative point of view : basic concept of the economy, measuring t h e level of U.S. econ omic

activity, factors determin i n g this level, the p robl ems o f i n flation a n d u nemployment, monetary and fiscal policies f o r stabilizing the ecOn· omy. I

102 Principles 0/ Economics 3 An analysis of the .5. economy from the mi c rosco pi c point o f view ; det 'rmin ation of t h e price of specific proclucts a n d of specific factors of production, the q u ant i ty of ou tp ut, and the method o f p roducti o n . The i ntern a ti o nal economy. No prerequisite. IT

2 1 1 Financial Accounting 4 See Busine "

Administration 2 1 1 .

2 7 3 Family Financial Planning .1 Consumer saving a n d sp e n d i ng problem

includ i n g estate planning, tax

planning, l i fc in"urance, investrn nts, i ntelligent buying, budgeting, con· sumer educat i o n a n d needed legal reforms. E thi ca l considerations of gove rn m en t a n d bu i ness f rom the viewpoi n t of lhe c on s umer. The

po we r of the consumer in the areas of production, m arketing, fi nance, as c redi t for a m ajor in economics.

a n d market research. May not c ou nt Offered on demand.

300 General Economics 3 An i n troductory cou rse in economics designed to meet the needs of u p p e r div ision students. Not open to anyone who has rec ived credit fo r Economies 1 0 1 . I

30 1 Intermediale Economic Analysis .'1 hcro·economics at the i ntermediate level. a tional income accou n t i ng and determ i nation i nclu d i n g both the commodity a n d moncy market . Prerequisite : Economics 101. I

( I

TH ( TlO

302 Intermediate Economic Analysis .1

Micro-economics at the intermediate leveL The theory of consumer behavior. Product and factor prices under conditions of monopoly, com petition. and intermediate markets. Welfare economics. Prerequisite : Economics 102. I I 3 2 1 Labor Problems 3

A study of the h istory, nature and treatment of labor problems in the United States. Among the topics discussed are employment and unem· ploymen t ; wage problems ; collective bargaining ; unions and employer associations; industrial u n rest and conflict. II aly 1965-66 3 3 1 Internationtll Trade 3

Regional and i nternational specialization, comparative c osts, interna tional paymen ts, and exchange rates_ National policies to promote or re strict trade. Business practice in international trade and investment. Prerequisite : Economics 101 and 102. I 3 6 1 Money tlnd Banking 3

The nature and functions of money. Credit i n,litutions. The relation· shi p o f money and bank deposits to the national economy. Prerequisite : Eeonomics 101. I aly 1965·66 362 Public Finance .1

Public taxation and expenditure at the federal, state, and local l evels. Types of taxes and expen ditures. The budget. The public debt. Fiscal control of the busi ness cycle. Prerequisite : Economics 1 0 1 . II aly 1964-65 364 Bllsiness Finance 3

See Business Administration 364. IT 434 Got.ernment and Business 3

A study of the relationship of government and business in the United States with special attention to governmental regulation of business. II 441 Statistical Methods 3

Desc r i p tive statistics: measures of position and dispersion, proportions, index n umbers, and time series. Inferential statistics : e,timation and the testing o f hypotheses by parametric and nonparametric techniques. Re· gression and correlation anal ysis. I II 496 Directed Reading.� in tlae History of Economic Tholl�llt 3 A survey of the development of economic thought from ancient to

modern times with emphasis on the period from Adam Smith to J. M. Keynes. This period includes : the classicists, the optimists, the social ists, the nationalists, and the historical and Austrian schools. Prerequi· site : Economics 101 and 1 0 2 . II

497 Independent Study 1 498 Irlliependent Study 2 499 IRliependent Stlldy 3

Individual problems and assignments, con ferences with i nstructor, and research report.

(II

I ;,\'1 Bl LflO

302 Tnt rmediafe Economic Ana lys is .'l !\Iicro-econom ics at the i ntermediate l eve l . The theory o f con�umcr behavior. Product and factor p ri c: es und"r c o n d i t i o ns of monopoly, com

petition, a n d i ntermediate markets_ Welfare economics_ P rerequ i si te : Economics 102_ I I

3 2 1 Labor Problem .• .'3 A study of the h i story, nature a n d treatment of l a b o r pr ob l e ms in the U n i ted States. Amon!! the t op i cs d i scussed are e m p l oyment and unem

p l oyment : wage p ro b l e ms ; collective bargaini ng : un io n s a n d em pl o ycr us.oor- i a t i o n ,, : i n du s tr i al u n rest and co n fl i c t. I I ail'

1963-64

3 3 1 Inlerrwtio nal Tracie .'l Re/!ional a n d

i n t e rn ational specialization,

comparative costs,

interna

t i onal payments, a n d exchange rates_

strict trade_

Bllsine�s p r ac t i ce

Prerequisite : Economics 1 0 1 and

rational policies to promote or re i n ternational trade a n d i n vestment.

102. I

361 Money mul Banking .'3

The nature a n d functions of mo n e y. Credit i nstitutions. The rel a t i o n of mon e y and h a n k deposits t o t h e n a t i o n a l econ omy. Prcreqll i "i t e : Economics 1 0 1 . r aly 1 963-64

ship

362 P"blic Finance .'1 Publ i c . t ax a t i on a n d expenditure at the federal, state, a n d local levels. Types of t a x es and expenditlll'es. The budget. The publ i c debt. Fiscal c on tro l of the busi ness cy c l e. Prereqlli,;ite : Ec on o m i cs 1 0 1 . II a/y 1 964-65

364 Busines .• Finance .'J ee Busi ness A dmi n i str a t i on 364. n

3 8 1 Statistics !l Desc r i p t ive statist i c s : mea su res of central tendency, dispersion, a n d pro portio n:;. I n fer n ti a l statistics : the testi n o- of hy p o t h e cs by u�e of data derived from samples. Regression and co rre la t i o n a n alysis_

I n

434 Covernment arld BII,s;ness 3 A study of the rel a t i onsh i p of government a n d business in the U n i t eu States w i t h sp e ci a l attention t o governmental regulation of b ""i ne�s . II

,1.96 Directed Reading.s in the History of Econ omic Thought .'J

A smvey of the d e velo p men t of economic thought from a n c i e n t to modern t i mes with e m phasis on the period from A dam Smith to J . M . Keynes_ This p e ri o d inclu des : t h e e1assicists, t h e optim ists, t h e social ists, t h e n a ti o n ali s ts, a n d the h i st o ri c a l and Austrian schools. Prerequi site : Economics 1 0 1 a n d

102. II

497 Independent Study 1 498 Independen t Study 2 499 ',I dependellt Siudy .1 I n d ividual p rob lems and assignments, c o n ferences w i t h instructor, and re

a rc h

rep o rt .

H I!. I

01' I

E DUCATION Mr. Johnston, Mr. DeBower, Mr. A. Hagen, Mr. Jones, Mrs. Mathers, Mrs. Na pjus, Mr. Pederson, Mr. Sjoding, Mr. Stein, Mi.<s rr/illiamsoTl ; assisted hr Mrs. KebllJek, Mrs. MacLennan, Mr. Langton

Candi dates for the Bachelor of Arts in Education d eg ree should fol l o w the course ou t l i n e as l i s te d under the School of Education i n the section, A C A D EMIC ORGAN lZATTON.

202 Introduction to Education 3 A su rvey of educational p ro b le ms a n d issues to orient new s t uden ts to

the pro fess i on . A study of the State Manual a n d a "project" i n volvi n g actual experience with children are included. Special tests a n d i nter views are scheduled for the p:n idance of t h e prospective t eac h e r . 1 IT

301 Humnn Delielopmerr ' .'1 A study of the e m o t i o na l , soc ial, in tellectu a l , a nd physiological develop

ment o f the h u ma n orgnni"n from t h e pren a l a l period through adol es cence. Th r e e le ct u res : t wo · h o u r public school observation re q u i re d weekly, to he individually u"igned. Prereq u is i te : P.s ychology 1 0 1 . Stu· dents i n the t acher education program should c o mple t e Education 202 I ! r i o r to 301 . T IT 311

cd MethOlh and Observation .'1

A study of curriculum, materials, a n d methods of tea c h i n g a t the vari ous levels from primary throu�h high school. Observations in ac tu a l school si tuations followed by discussion. Those who wish to prepare primarily for k i n dergarten and primary elect 31 1 a ; those for i n termed i ate a n d u p per grades, 3 1 1 h ; a n d those for j u nior and sen ior high school, 3 1 1cd. P rerequi si t e : E du ca t i on 202 and 301. 1 1 I 3 1 2 Ti,e Teaclling 0/ Reading-Elementary 2 A comp rehensive survey of t ea ch i n g reading in the elementary g r a des . Materials, methods, te ch n i q u e s , procedu res a n d diagnosis of r e a di n g diniculties are studied. I II 5 3 1 4 The Teaching 0/ Reading-Secondary 2 A comprehensive survey of t ea ch i ng reading in the secondary school.

l\.fater i ab , methods, techniques, procedures and diagnosis of reading difficulties are stu d ied. I II 5

3 5 Instructional Materials 2

A survey of audio a n d visual m aterials and aids, their use, organiza t i o n . and a d m i n i stration in the school. I I 5 3 1 9 The Teaching 0/ Arithmetic 2 A n a er-all study of the basie m a t he mat i c a l skills and ab i l i t i es needed by the teacher i n the elementary a n d junior high s ch o ol. Recent devel· o pme n ts and m a terials are considered. I II 5

r ()l h .

I '" ( l l

. 1'1 ' l

loT I O

3 2 0 T aclling 0 / Spallisll i n rile Elementary Sc11001 2 A course planned to assist the elementary t eac h er in teaching conver sational S p a n ish ; training in p ro n u n c i a t i o n and intonation, study u n i ts, p:ames, songs, dialogues, films, filmstrips and records will be presented which can he u t il ized in the classroom. Open to both those with Spanish background a n d t h o se without.

370 Principles 0/ Guidance 2 A study of procedure� used in helping th e student achieve su i t ab l e goals in school and in society. E m ph as i s will be given in testinf!; methods for solving various educational, personal, and vocational problems for the studen t. I

405 Adolescent P" ychology 2 S e e Psychology 405. ( G )

407 Educatiollal Sociology .1 Se e Sociology 407. ( G )

408, 409 Reading" ill ";ducatiollal Problems J ·.1 Students who desire to pu rs u e a s p e c i al l i n e of i n dividual r eadi ng, i n ves tigation, or research may do so for credit, receiving help and guidance from the faculty memher best qualified to assist i n the particular prob lem . Credit will vary with the amount of work done. I II ( G )

4 1 2 The Blind Cllild in tile Public Sc/'ool 2 A eourse to help the teacher assist the blind and partially seeing cbild to adjust emotionally, socially, p hysical l y, a n d educationally t o tbe re::o;ular public sehool classroom si t u a tio n . A n i ntroduction to English Braille and a study of m e th o d s, materials, and e qu ipme n t are included. S (G)

4 1 3 Science in the Elemelltary School 2 A course designed Lo acq uaint the student wi th the objectives, m aterials, and llwthod" of teachin::o; ,eienee in a n integrated program, I ( G)

4 1 4 Social Studies in t'le Elementary Scllool 2 A eOllrse designed to acquai n t thc student with the objectivcs, materials, and methods o f teachi n f!: the 50c.ial studies i n an integrated program. Open Lo experienced teachers o n l y. II S ( G )

416 Parent-Teacher Conference 2 A study of the principles and techniques of parent-teacher conferences. Procedures for i ntroducing a parent· teacher con feren c e program to the school a n d commun ity, Evaluation of various grading systems. Open only to experienced teachers a n d st u de nts who have completed or are taking student teaching. I I I S ( G )

419 Admilli.trat;on 0/ tile Scllool Library 2 Organization and admi nistration of the school l ibrary for teacher-lihra rians i n the el e menta ry schools. S ( G )

( Ol H "F. · or

/'1 0

. Tn

420 Proce.s.� ing School Library Materials 2 S i m p l i fied proeeclures for th"

dassificat i o n , c a t a loging, a n d tec h n ical

processing o f school l i brary m a terials. S

(G)

423 Language Arts in ,he Elementary School 2 t\ course designed to give the elementary teacher, grades o n e through (· ight, an u n d erst a n d i n g of how t o teach the language arts i n a func tional m a n ner. The followi n g ski l ls w i l l be considered : usage, l is t e n p e n to expc i n g , speaki n{!. writin ", spel l i ng , a n d vocabulary b u i l d i ng . rienc,·,d tcachers only_ 1 � ( G l

1-26 Pri.mary R.eading 2 A study of the materials and meth ods o f the modern p r i. m a ry readin{! program and its rel a t i o n t o other ac t i v i t i es_ Open to experienced teach f'rs

only. S ( G l

428 Kindergarten 2 A study of the k i n dergarten chi l d and his

a dj u s t m e n t

prob lems. Spe c i a l

emphasis o n act ivities a n d procedures f o r h i s de\·eloprnent. S ( G )

433 Principles and T c/ Hliqll8S in Secondary Education 4 Pl\rro��s, tr"nd�,

CUlT

' n t i:�l\cs, a n d t e c h n i q u

An .op portl \ n i t y i'i [H·o\·ided for

�

i ll secondary education.

p l a n n i n g curricula on the secondary

level, i n divi dually and cooperatively. R egistration in t h is course is per mitted onl t t) tho 'c tudents wishing to meet special cert i fication reo q u i n'ffl en IS.

permitted for ,tudenh who ha\'c h a d 3 1 1cd, S

436, 43 7, 438, 439 WorksllOps 1 -3 Worbhops in special fields for varyi ng periods of t i me.

(G)

440 Specific Method.� in Teacl&ing Se ondary Sclwol Subjects 2 Studi

of tlw ( ' u rr i c ulum, methods, a n d materi a l " of i n struction in the

various fid el.s of the seco ndary <;(,11001 curricu l u m . These courses offered by d i fT>rcnt departments of the University a a n d may b e taken for r:-raduate credit.

4 Os Art in the Secondary School 2 See

rt 440a. ( G )

440b B.tsiness Educatioll in the See Busines

ecollllary School 2

d m i nistra t ion 440b. ( G )

440c English in the Secondary School 2 (G)

440d Literature i n the Secondary School 2 (G) 440e Mathematics in ri,e Secondary School 2

( G) 44.0f MIl.sic in the Secondary School 2 See M llsic 440f. ( G )

are

i n dicated below

440 Science in the Secondary School 2 (G) 440h Sodal Stu,lies in the Secondary School 2 (G)

440i Speech in the Secondary School 2 See Speech 440i. ( G )

440j Chemistry in the Secondary School 2 (Gl «Ok Methods in Teaching German 2 Sec German 440k. ( G 1

440m Methorl.� in Teaching Fren ch 2 See French 440m. ( G l

441 Srati.dical Methorl.5 .'1 See Psy ch olo gy 441 . Sociolo�y 441, Economics 44 1 . II S ( G )

442 Speech lor the Cla .•.• room Teacher 2 See S pee ch 442. II S ( G )

449 Reading Center Workshop 2 C l i nical � t u d y of reading problems and suggested correetivc measure�. To be t a k en concurrently with Education 469. S ( G )

450 Psychological Testing 2 See p,y c h ol o g y 450. ( G )

45 1 lnrlit'idual Mental Testing 2 See Psych o l o gy 451. ( G )

461ab

cd Curriculum , Methorl.�, ar"l Student Teachi"g 5

A course designed to give some knowledge, understanding, and study o f c h i ldren, subject matter fields, and materials in th e student's alter nate teach i n g level plus student teaching on t ha t level. Students enroll i n 463a or b and 461cd or i n 463c or d and 461 ah. I II

4630, b,

, or

d St.tHlent Teaching 9

Teaching in the public schools under the direction and superVISIon of c lassr oom teachers a n d university teachers. Those preparing primarily for kinderga rten a n d primary e l e c t 463a ; those f o r i nte rm ed i at e and u ppe r gra des, 463b ; those f o r j u n i o r h i g h school, 463c ; a n d those for senior high school, 463d. Prerequisi t e : Education 311 and one sem es· ter in residenee. I II

( 1 )1 H

S 01

•

101

'1 1n

465 Speci al Project 1-5 Students who wioh to do individual study and research on educational problems or a d d i tional lalloratory e x pe ri c ne e in

pubLic school class

roo ms may d o so with speci a l perm ission of the department. I II

468 Lcrl)()rtltory IVork .• /lOp .'1 A pra c t i c al ,'our�e using children o f e le me nt ary age i n a clas room " i t u a t ion workinp; out a speci fic; problem.

Pl'ov i,ion will be madc for

,ome active particip ation of the un iversity students. A conference wi th the i nstructor or the D i rector of Teaeher Education w i l l he req u i red he fore rep;istration c.an he comp leted_ S ( G )

469 Directed Tead,;ng in Heading Center,. 4 D i rected observation and tea 'hing in "'Immel' remedial cl asses in pu bl i e schools. To be tak<:n eoncurrently with Edueation 449. S ( G )

472 Occupational I,,/ormation 2 This course is desi uned for those who a re i nterested in the vocational gui da nce o f young people_ S pec i a l e m ph a s i s i s placed u po n the sources, analysis, fi l i n�, and methods of disseminatinp; o c e up ati onal i n forma tion. S ( G l

4 7 3 Introduction t o Counseling 2 ' See P " ych o lo gy 47:�. ( G )

475 Emotional Pro"'em.� of Children 2 Empha - i s is placed on common emotional problems of elementary a n d �eeondary school-age p u p i l s and t h e teacher's role w h e n these arise i n t h e cla,sroom_ There is opportunity t o v i s i t local c o m m u n i ty agencies. See Psycholo�r 475_ S ( G 1

478 Mental Health lor Teacher.• 2 Pri m a r i ly con ce rn e d with the adjustment of the teacher to the classroom situation.

Some em p hasi s on

the various

mechanisms of adjustment.

II S ( G l

501 lIi.dory 0/ Education 2 A study of the history of education, Occidental and Oriental, w i th par t ic u lar reference to its bearings

011

contemporary education. II S

505 Philosophy 0/ Edu ation .1 A study of the w r i t i n s of the great phi losophers of Education from the ti m e of A risto tle a n d Plato to the p resent t ime.

507 A d va nc ed Educational Psychology 2 Principles and research in human Icarn i n g and their i m p l ications for curriculum a n d instruction. I S

509 Comparative Education 2 A

comparative study of the

backg rounds, developments, trends, a n d

p r o b l e m s o f m a j o r n a tiona l systems of educat ion. II S

102

1 In l TIO

522 Core Curriculum 2

A study of the philosophical bac kgroun d of the core curriculum a n d t h e core. Sp eei al attention will be given to p rohlem sol ving a n d the preparation of u n i ts of instruction. S m e thods of teaching applicable to the

529 Diagno.�i.• 0/ RealliJlg Problems 2 Causcs, p revent ion , a n d correct i o n of rea di ng disability cases are em phasizcd. Various types of read ing

disab il it y cases are

d i agnosed

daS!;. Each member o f t he class wil l diagnose, tutor, a n d com p i l e a case study of a ren d i n g problem , preferably

fro m his own school. Pre

re qu i s i te : 312 or its eq u i va l en t. S

536, 537, 538, 539 Workshops loB

Graduate worksh ops in speci al fields h ld for va ry i ng lengths of t i m e . 546 Curriculum Development 2 A study of types of curriculum orgalllzlltion a n d p rogra ms and tech ni ques o f cu rriculum d evel op men t wit h a vi w of preparing the st u dent

for his own work o n curriculum p ro b l ems. IT S 548 Tile Gi/ted Child 2

A study of the gifted c h i l d , his characteristics a n d p robl ems, and school p roc ed u res d� ·i gned · to further developme n t, S 557 Evaluation 2

Ev al uat io n of the outcomes of �chool ex pe rie nees. Problems that arise in conner.lion with development, organizat ion. and a d m i n istration of tests ( bo t h standard.ized and teacher made ) w i l l he studied. Required of all fi f t h year -tu cien LS. Prerequisit : Student tcac hing or tea c hin g expcrien e . I I S 571 School Gu i,Jance Program. 2

su rvey

·t u dy of the gu ida nce program as o rga ni7.ed and c on ducted

by 8 p u b l i c sehool sy�tem with em ph asi s on the roll' of th e teach r. S

58 1 Public School Administration 3 Adm i n i stl' t i o n a nd snp en'ision of school [", r ' onne!, p l a n t , aud progra m ; t h e -trurture u n d organiza tion o f ti lt! school sy"tem. Prerecy u i site : teach ing experience. S

582 Admin istrative Intemship 2-4 Tntem.hip in �chool ud mi n i t r n t i OI1 planned by the School of I'_ducation

i n c ooperation with selected school arim i n ist ru to "", Prere q u i , i t :

cou r>c

work in ,,,hoo l a d m i n istration a n d admi sion to graduatE: prognlm.

586 School Finance 2 Local, state, and federal contri butions to school finance, it s phi losophy

and development. Special emphasi s on the development and admi nis tration of a school bud 'ct. S

(( 1

n " r.

•

J J:I

1 03

59 1 Bigh School Organization anti Admini.d ralion 2 .urrent viewpoints and issues i n pl an n i n g and organizing the ·high school c u rr icu l um , schcdule making, extra·curric u l a r activities, teachers' meetings, p u p i l acc o u ntin g and control, finance and reports. Prerequi· site : E ducation 581. S

594 Administration anti Supervi.�ion W ork.�hop 4 The p roj ec ts discussed will chieAy be derived from the i n terests and n eeds of the students. Typi c al projects are curriculum p l a n n i n g and adjustment i n line with present needs, p u h li c relation programs, per· so nnel employment and in·service training, an d financing building an d educational program�. P re re qu i site : One course in administration and/ o r 5U pc rv i si o n . S

595 Metlwtls and Techniques 01 Re.�earch 2 A s tu d y of the various methods and tec h n i q u ('s of re�arch with appli· c a ti o ns a n d illustrations drawn from the fields of Education and Psy· c h ol ogy and from such fi e l ds as Economics, His tory, Political Science, and Sociol o gy . Some practice in research is provided. Prerequisite : one semester of statistics and c om ple ti on of most o f the course work for t he ,\'I aster's degree. IT S

596 /(esearch Srudie.� in Education 1-2 For those M aster of Arts c a n d id a t es who ele c t to write two research papers. ( O ne research paper may be in the candidate's m i n or field writ· ten under the s uper vi s i o n of the m i no r adviser.) Candidates will be r e qu ir ed to review their researc:h papers before the Gr aduate Commit tee. I II S

597 lle.�earcJ. Stutlies in Etlucation 1 -2 S ee Education 596. 598 T l.e.•is .1-4 For those Master of Arts candidates who ele ct to write a thesis. The t h esis prohlem will be chose n from the candi date's major area of con· centration and m u st b e approved by his G raduat e Committee. The candi date will be expected to defend his t hesis i n a final oral exami· nation concludecl by his C omm i tt ee. I II S ENGLISH Mr. Ranson, Miss Blomquist, Mr. Hillger, Miss Hollim, Mrs. Johnson, Mr. Klo{Jsch, Miss Knudson, Mr. Reigstad, Mr. Reynolds

The cou r ses i n E ngli s h are designed ( 1 ) to offer a l l stu dent s a n op portunity to d evelo p greater competency in the ordi n a ry forms of writin g and g r ea ter discernment in rea di n g works of literature ; ( 2 ) to provide limited training in critical and c rea tive writing ; ( 3 ) to g ive men and w ome n, re g ar dl e ss of t h eir i n tended vocati o ns , the rich interpretive insights into man's experience, to·

104

1 n I

t il

:-,THI 1:1 TO

I!pther with the aesthetic values, that a n i n ten si ve a n d extensive knowledge of l i teratu re a ffords ; a n d (4) to prov id e tra i n ing for te ache rs o f E ngl i <;h on all levt'ls, includinl!; the p reparation for grad u a t e work lea d i n g to teaching i n

colleg . The th ree - h our general u n ivers i ty l i terature reCfu iremen t can he met by a n y cour�c i n t h e dc pa rtmen t except 101, 102, 2 1 B, 302, 3 1 8 , 321 , 322, 404_ For the major in Engl i sh at least 27 credi t hours are r e Cf u i red i n a d d i t i on to English 101 a n d 102. Each major shou l d follow one of th e following pro

grams : ( 1 ) 2 4 1 and 242, 382, 3B3 o r 384, 9 hours of upper division electives in Engl i s h li terature, a n d 6 hours of electives from any other courses listed ; ( 2 ) 251 a n d 252, 382. 383 or 384, 9 hours of upper division eler.ti ves in A m er i (�an l i te rat ure, and 6 houL o f electives from any other courses listed. English majors who plan to do graduate work should take 404, 497 and 49B. Candidates for the Bachelor of Arts i n Education degree who are p lan n in g a t eadl i n g major in E n gl i sh should refer to page 56 under AC. DEMIC PREP R TIO . 1 01 ComJU)silion 3

The course aims to train students to develop ideas ac cura tely and effec tively in the sentence, in the paragraph, and in e x ten ded written d i s cn�ion. Es. ys are read and a nalyzed to p rov id e m odels of good expo �ition, to stim u late thought and discuss i on , and to develop accuracy i n reading. I II 1 02 Composition 3

hrief study of the technique of preparing a r esearc h paper. Other wi�e, furt he r work in xpository writing combined with the study of rep re"en tative works o f e_ posi ti on , fiction, drama, and po dry. I II 2 1 7 The Shore Story 3 study of the sho r t story as a n a rra ti ve form. Practice in writing tihor! st o ries . ( U pper divi"ion students may obtain upper division credit. )

2 18 Advanced Composition 3 A i me d to help the

tudent develop greater accuracy, facility and effec

ti eness in wri ting exposition, description and narration. II 233, 234 World Literature 3, 3

study of the l iterature of We.s te r n Europe-ancient, medieva l , and modern. I, II 24 1 , 242 Survey 01 American Literolltre :l, 3

tu dy of A merican l i terature from colonial times to the twentieth J, II

c e n t u ry .

250 Contemporary Literature 3

A st udy of se l ected works by major wri ters, chiefly Eng l i sh a n d A m er ican, represen t ing main trends in poetry, fi li o n and drama £rom World War 1 to the p resent lime. II 2 5 1 , 252 Survey 01 English Literature 3, 3

A study of English classics from Beowul f to Hardy a n d Wilde.

1 06

OF I sTI'1 ( '1 1 0

302 Tile english Language 3

A st u d y of the development of the E ng l ish language, pIus intensive review of syntax a n d grammar. I I 3 1 8 Creative Writing .'1

For those se ri ousl y interested

III

writin� fiction, drama, or poetry. II

3 2 1 , 322 Cllildren's l. ite ra tllre 3, .1

A st udy of children's l i terature a n d juvenile l iterature as a rich body o f literature i n itsel f and as �. g u i de for book sele(:tion in the lower g ra de� . I 332 The Continental Novel 3

study of representative French, Russian, Gcrman, Scan d inavian, a nd S p ani sh novels of the n i neteenth century. II 333, 334 Greek and Latin Literafllre in Translation

3. 3

A study of such writers as Hesiod, Homer, A schylus, Sophocles, Euripi·

des, ri st opha n es, Pin dar, Plato, Th ucy di des, Longus, Theocritus, Apu leius, Plutarch, Plautus, Terence, Seneea, Virgil, Luc retius, Horace, Catullus, J uvenal, Cicero, Epictetus, Marcus Au rel i u s, Ovid. S tro n gly recommended for all E ngli sh m aj ors. Y, II

349 Modern Poetry 3

A 5tudy of recent English a n d A m erican poetry. n S 357 Englisll Drama 3 Plays represe n t i n g the development of drama from the sixteenth cen· tury to the n i neteen th, exclusive of Shakespeare. I al 1965-66 35 8 Modern Drama .'1 Selected

plays re]lre,enting the development of modern drama from '

rea l i,rn to the theatre of the absurd. 11 a/y 1964-65 382 Claaucer 3

E�(le('ially Truilus and Criseyde and The Canterbury Tales. Some study w i ll be made of the development of the English language. II 383 Shakespeare 3 L ove's Labour's Lost, Midsummer-Night's Dream, As You Like It, Rich ard III, Romeo and Juliet, Julius Caesar, Troilus and Cressida, Oth ello, Macbeth, Antony and Cleopatra, Cymbeline. I

384 Silake.�peare .'1 Comedy 01 Errors; Merchant 01 Venice, Richard lJ, Henry I V : Parts 1

& 2 ; Twellth Night, Measure lor Measure, Hamlet, Lear, Coriolanus, Tempest. 11. 388 Seventeenth Centllry English Literature Donne, M i lton and t h e i r contemporaries. II

('f) H L

Of J

T n t ( T IO

107

389 l\ighleenlh Century l\ngli.• h Literature .'1 Defoe, Addison, Sw,ift, Pope, Thomson, S. Johnson, Boswell, Goldsmith, Gray, Col l i ns, Burns, make. I a/y 1964·65

404 Literary Criticism .'1 A study of t.he problems o f creating and evaluating literature as dis· cussed by the great critics, especially those o f the past century, together with the writing of brief and extensive criti cisms o f poems, fiction and drama. IT

441 The American Renais.mnee 3 Hawthorne, Emerson, Thoreau, Melville, Whitman.

442 Development of Reali.� m in American I'ie/ion 3 Twain, Howells, J ames

orris, Crane, Dreiser

443 Maior Southern Writers of the U.S. 3 From Twain to .T. C. Ransom, K. A. Porter, faulkner, Tennessee Williams.

45 1 , 452 The Engli.• h Novel 3, 3 A study of major novels, selected to represent the main developments in this genre {rom the eighteenth !:cntllry to the pre�ent. I , IT 48

English Retwi,.sance Literature 3 Studies in the prose, poetry and drama of Tudor and Elizabethan Eng land, with primary em phasis upon Shakespeare's contemporaries. I aly

1964-65

483 Early Nineteenth Century English Literature .'1 An intensive study of Blake, Wordsworth, Coleridge, Byron, Shelley and Keats. I

484 Late 19th Century English Literature 3 An i ntensive study of the literature of the Victorian period ( 1 830- 1900 ) ; poetry, critic;iom, drama a n d some fiction. I I

4·94 Tloentieth Cent.ury Ameri(,an Literature .'1 495 Twentieth Century English Literature 3 497, 498 Maior Conference 1-2, 1 -2 Designed to enable ex'ceptional senior major students and senior majors who plan to d o graduate work in l i terature to round out their hack ground by an intensive, planned cOllrse of reading. I II

FOREIGN LANGUAGES Mrs. Little, Miss Durham, Mr. G_ J. Malmin, 111r. Pu rvis, Mr. Roe, Mr. Spangl e r ; assisted by Mr. Mednis

The study of foreip;n languages has become a necessity in the present-day world. I t gives the student the information, interest, facility, and enjoyable experience acquired i n the course of achieving a new language. Through the

108

'1 I { l U' l f l

medium o f 11 foreign language, the student augments his understanding o f past and p resent contributions of other peoples in the areas of civilization : history, l iterature, and the arts and sciences. Students preparing to enter graduate school are advised to prepare themselves in at least two modern langu ages ( u sually French, German, Russi an ) .

Classical Languages For a major i ll classical l a nguages, 27 hours are required, including Greek 201, 202, 3 1 1 , 3 1 2, 3 2 1, 322, .352 ; Latin 201, 202, 331 , 332.

ft is recommended that one year of Latin precede the study of Greek.

Greek 201, 202 Elementary Greek 4, 4 Inflections, vocabulary. and syntax ; translat:ons from Greek to E ngli sh and English to Greek. I, II

3 1 1 , 3 1 2 New Testament 1 .1 .

I, n

321, 322 Atiwllceri Grammar anti Reatling 2, 2 I, If Offered on demand. 352 Seminar in Greek Langllage or Literature 2 II Latin

101, 102 Elementary Latin 4, 4 Exerci,es in grammar a n d syntax ; sentences based on ancient authors ; second semester. Caesar's Gallic War. I, If

201, 202 Intermediate Latin .1, .1 Cicero's Orations against Cataline ; Sall ust : The War with Cataline ; second semester. Virgil's Aeneid. I, II

331, 332 The Golden Age .'l , 3 First semester, Ovid's l\Ietamorphoses ; second semester, the Odes o f Horace. Prerequisite Lati n : 202 o r three admission u n i t s i n Latin. T o be offered on demand.

Cla.5sics These cou rses a re based upon a study of Lati n and Greek derivatives : pres路 entation is by the structural app roach of the classical vocabularies. No knowl路 edge of Latin or Greek i s required for courses in classics. They will not count as foreign language credit. Recommended for students of the arts and sciences and the romance languages.

, or H ' L!' OF

sTill

l ID

1 09

301 VocaElIIlary nuilding: Greek ill CUTTent U.•e 2 Designed as a study of Greek elements in English, w i t h emphasis on words in l i terary and sc ientific use. I

302 Vocabulary nuilding : Latin in CUTTent Use 2 Systematic study of the large Lati n element in t.he English vocabulary. Understanding and building scientific vocahulary. I I Modern Languages

The language laboratory provides regular practice in listening t o good models of foreign speech and a large amount of imitation and repetitive drill. Listening practice is intended to lead progressively toward the ahility to exp ress one's thoughts in conversation with pronunciat ion, intonation, and use of gram matical forms acceptable to the educated native speaker. Laboratory drill is requi red as a regular part of course assignments in begin ning and intermediate courses and i n some advanced courses. The aural-oral approach is used in all elementary and in termediate courses i n modern languages. Germanic Langll:lges

Germarl Twenty-four ( 24 ) hours above 1 02 are required for a major including German 301, 302, 4 1 1 , 412, 451, 452 or 440k.

111

German,

Candi dates for the nachelor of Arts i n Education degree who are planning a teaching major i n German should refer to page 57 u n cler ACADEMIC PREPARATION.

101, 102 Elementary German 4, 4 Grammar, selected readi ngs. I, I I

201, 202 Intermediate German :1, :l Readings i n German history and li terature. I, I I

221, 222 Grammar and Conversation 2, 2 May accompany German 20 1 , 202. I, I I

251, 2 5 2 Scientific German 3, .'1 n.asic training in the reading of scienti fic German. Meets basic language requirement. Prerequ isite : Consent of Instructor. I, II

301 German Clas.•;cs 3 Historical and literary studies :

Lessing, Schiller, Grillpa rzer. I aly

1965-66

302 Goethe's Fallst 3 Review of earlier literary expressions of the Faust theme and Faust, Part I. II a/y 1965-66

110

COl It T

OF I

S In

TJ( .

335, 336 German Civilizafion 2, 2

The cultural-historical development of German art, literature, music, philosophy and of the sciences. I, II 4 1 1 TIw German "Novelle" .3

A study of the peculiarly German prose-form, "Die Novelle." Brief studies of the development of the novel in earlier centuries. Master pieces from Droste- Huelshoff, Eichendorff, and Kleist. I aly 1964-65 4 1 2 Epic.� and Lrric.5 ,3 A brief resume o f epic poetry and a reading of outstandinf!: German ep ics, followed by selected masterpi eces of the German lyric. II aly 1964-65

440k Method.. in Teaching German 2

Offered on demand. 45 1 , 452 Advanced Compo.5ition and Oral Expre.•.•ion 2, 2

Particular attention given to facility in the usage of sentence structure and grammatical form. Offered on demand. I 11 497, 498 Independent Study 1-2 Norweg ia n 1 0 1 , 102 Elemen tary Norse 4, 4

Grammar, selected readings. 1, I I 2 0 1 , 202 Intermediate Norse 3 , 3

Stories, periodicals, and publications from Norway. Interpretation of the Scandinavian way of life. I , n Romance Languages French

Twenty-four ( 24 ) hours above 102 are required for a major in French, i n c l u ding French 401, 402. Candidates for the Bachelor of Arts in Education degree who are planning a teaching major in French should refer to page 56 under ACADEMIC PREPA RATION. 1 0 1 , 102 Elementary French 4, 4

Grammar, selected readi ng�, laboratory attendance. .I, II 201 , 202 Intermediate French 3, .'3

Grammar, readings, laboratory attendance. I, II 22 1 , 222 Introduction t o French Civiliza.ion 2, 2

Readings in cultural materials and a selection of edited novels, with some conversation practice. May accompany French 201, 202. I, Tl

tOl H F

o r r �Hl I

TIO

III

2 5 1 Scientific French :J

Offered on demand. 30 1 , 302 Studies i n the French Drama 3, 3

"fiddle Ages to the Iflth Century. I aly 1 964-65. 18th Century to the 20th Centmy. II a/y 1964-65 351 , 352 Composition and Advanced Grammar .1, 3 I, II a/y 1 964-65 401, 402 Frencll Uteratllre .'1, .1 S t u d y and analysis of represen tative French poets m : el writers from the

Middle Ages t o the 20th Century. T , II a/y 1965-66

440m Methods in Teaching French 2 Offered on demand. 497, 498 Indepemlen t Study 1.2 Spani"h

1 0 1 , 102 Elementary Spanish 4, 4 G ram m a r , selected readings. 1 II

201, 202 Intermediate Sporlish 3, 3

Readin�s in Sp a nish history and l iterature. I,n

Slavic Lan guages Rllssian

1 0 1 , 1 02 Elementary RIt.�.�illn 4, 4

Grammar, selected readings. I, II 2 0 1 , 202 l"termediate Russian 3, 3

I, II

GENERAL ENGINEERING Mr. Schmid 1 5 1 , 1 52 E ngineering Draloing and Descriptive Geometry 2, 2 I, II

GEOGRAPHY Mr. Mackey 101 Worlel Geography 3

A survey of the physical and social features of the various coun tries. I, II

1 12

TPl ( Tlfl

GEOLOGY Mr. Ellingson

Geology is the science of the earth ; the study of the ocean deeps, the plai ns, the pl ateaus, and the mountains. Geology gives the student the o p p ortunity to study minerals, rocks, and fossils, and, with these tools, helps him to u n der· stand the developm nt of hi, present environment.

101 Phy ical Geology 4 A study of roeks, m i nerals, and the physiographic features of the SUI"· face o f the earth. Two lectures and two lahoratory periods a week. One Saturday field trip required. I 102 Historical Geolo"y 4

A continuation of Geology 101. A study o f sedimentary rocks, fossils, and earth history. Two lectures and two lahoratory periods a week. Two Saturday field trips required. II

203 Mineralogy 8 Fundamental principles of erystallography a n d mi neralogy, study ing hoth ore and rock forming mi nerals. One lecture and two laboratory periods a week. Pr�requ isites : Geology 101 and Chemistry 104 or 109, or permission. II aly 1964-65 204 Petrology 8

Origin, occurrence a n d classi fication of the more common rocks ; em phasis on h a n d lens identification. Prerequisites: Geology 101 or permis sion. II aly 1965-66 360 Geol"gy 01 Western Washington 5 A course designed for teachers ; giving experience in rock and m ineral

identification and land form study. Two lectures and three all-day field trips a week. Prerequisites : One year of a laboratory science or the permission o f the instructor. S 497.498 Indepemlen t Study 1·8

H EA LTII AND PHYSICAL EDUCATION Mr. Salzman, Mr. R. Carlson, ,'Hr. Lundgaard, Mrs. Poulsen, Mrs. Young ; assisted by Mr. Souza

Requ irements for a major in Health a n d Physical Education for the Bachelor of Arts degree are : 27 credit hours including the following courses : Men-Prere quisite : Biology 121, 122, 161, 162. Physical Edueation 210, 292, 312, 322, 334, 341, 342, 345, .346, 363, 450, 497. Women-Prerequisi te : B iology 121, 122, 161, 162. Physical Education 210, 290, 292, 312, 322, 333, 334, 341 , 342, 345, 346, 450, 497. Candidates for the Bachelor of Arts in Education degree who are plann i ng a teaching major i n Health and Physical 'E ducation or Corrective Therapy should refer t o p ag e 57 under ACADEMIC PREPARATION.

Health Education 2 10 Health Essentials 3 A general course in personal and community health. I II

292 First Aid 2 This course meets the requirements for the Red Cross Standard and Ad vanced Cards. I I

3 1 0 Health Education 2 The health instruction program in the public schools. Prerequisite : Health Education 210. I aly 1965-66

465 School Health Program 2 Includes schoolroom construction, lighting, heating, sanitation, ventila tion, selection and location of equipment, communicable diseases a n d medical inspeetion. II

Phy.�ical Education Activities

1 0 1 , 102, 1 03, 1 04 Activities ( Women) I, I, I , 1 Regular freshman and sophomore activity classes. Two periods per week. I II

105, 106, 205, 206 Adapted Activities ( Women) I, I , 1, 1 Activities to meet the needs of individual students who are not able to participate in the regular activities classes. Two periods per week. 1 II

107, 108, 109, 1 10 Activities (Men) 1, 1, 1 , 1 Regular freshman and sophomore activity classes. Two periods per week. I II

201 neginning Goll (Men and Women) 1 O p tional activity class for sophomores. Clubs are furnished for class work. Students furnish their own halls. Students not owning golf clubs may rent clubs for field work. I II

202 Beginning Badminton and Tennis (Men and Women) 1 Optional activi ty class for sophomores. Students furnish their own ball� and shuttlecocks. Racquets are provided for class work, but students must furnish racquets for field work. II

203 neginning Archery (Men and Women) 1 Optional activity class for sophomores. All equipment furnished. II

204 Beginning Bowling (Men and Women.) 1 Optional activity class for sophomores. Special fee required to cover transportation and shoe rental. I II

207 Gymnastics and Rebound Tumbling (Men and Women) 1 Optional activity class for sophomores. I II

208 Skiing (Men and If/omen) 1 Special fee required.

209 Beginning Swimming (Men and Women) 1 Recommended for students who fail the proficiency test. I II

114

2 1 1 Intermediale Swimming (Men and Women) 1 O p lional activity class

for sopho mores. F:mphasis on developing better

strokes and techniques. Prerequisite : Con,ent of instructor. I II

212 Advarn:ed Swimming (Men and Women) 1

For advanced swimmers. Prerequisite : Consent of instructor. I II 270 Football 2 II 2 7 1 na.s helball 2 II 272 Track 2 II aly 1964·65 273 na,.eball 2

n 274 MelllOd,5 ill Teaching Tumbling 2 Stunts, tumbling, and use of the trampoline. Coeducational. Limited to students majoring i n health and physical edueation. II

275 Methods in Teacllin.g Wrestling 2 290 Mer/lmls in Teaching Individual Sports ( Women) 2 Techniques and methods used in teaching tennis, golf, archery, badmin· ton, bowling and track.

312 Phy.�ical EdlU:alion in Ihe Elemenlary School 2 Progressive series of games and other activities, including physical fit· ness testing, for the elementary grades. Required for men, majOrIng in

health and physical education, who plan to teach in

the elementary

school. I

322 Kine.siology .'1 na lysis of body movements i n relation to physical education activities and posture. Prerequisite : Biology 161, 162. II

323 Principles 01 Movement 2 A study of the principles involved in basic body movements a n d the application

these

principles

to various education

activities.

I aly

1964-65

325 Correcti ve Physical Education 2

urvey of common deviations of posture, functional disturbances, and crippling

conditions

found

school children.

Consi deration

of the

extent and l i m i tations o f the teacher's responsibility for their i m p rove· ment. I S a/y 1965-66

333 Methods in Teaching Team Sports ( Women) 2 Techniques and methods used in teaching soccer, basketball, volleyball, softball and field hockey. I

334 Americ an Red Cros.� Lile Saving Cour.�e 1 II

cm W-i]

F' 1

TIm

1 15

336 Allrletic Training 2 A cou rse designed to aid the physical edu ca to r and coach i n the pre vention and treatment of at hleti c injuries_ Especially valuable to the coach in the fi e ld_ I

337

Water Sa/ety Instruction 2 The American Red Cro" Water-Safety Instru c tor's Course_ Prerequisite : Health and Physical Education :tl4_ I

341 Methods in Folk Dancing 2 A stud y of basic steps and movement patterns t ogeth er with the applica tion of these steps in a variety o f folk, coupl e, square, and mixer dances_ 342 Problems in Teaching Rhythmics 2 Prerequisite : Health and Physical Education 341. II 342 Method.� in Teaching Swimming 2 Prerequisite : Health and Ph y si ca l Education 334, or ,its equivalent. II 345 Principle.s 0/ Phy.�ical Education 2 The place of health and physical education in the school program, aims, . oi>jeeti ves , content of the program, and modern trends_ I 346 School Recreation 2 A course of instruction for those intending to take full or part-time positions in the field of recreation. The course covers program planning, orgal)ization and administration in community recreation, i n cl u ding a st u dy of the relat i o n of public school to comm u n ity recreation. II 363 Methotl.� and Material.� in Teaching SporL.� (Men) 2 A study of methods and techniques in teaching �ames and sports, ex cl usi ve of major s p o rt s . I I 39 1 , 392 CorrecLi"e Therapy 4 , 4 A corrective therapy clinical t rai n i n g program including lectures, lab orat ory experience, and clinical practice. Open only to physical educa ti o n majors in Option I Program 2, and with consent of department. T. II 450 The School Physical Education Program 2 Inrludes problems of organization and administration. 473 Hi.�Lory 0/ Physical EducaLion 2 S a/y 1 965-66 49 1 Reading and Research 1-4 Open to s tudent s majoring in health and p hysi eal education. I II 493 ProlJlems in Physical Education .1 Limited to those who have had teac h i n g expe rience. S a/y 1965-66 497, 498 M.ajor Con/erence 2 Prerequisi te : Health and Physical Education 363 ( Men ) ; or 290, 333 and 341 ( Women ) . I n 505 Graduate Research 1-2 Open only to gr aduate students whose minor IS 11\ the field o f health and physical education, and with approval of dep a rtme n t chairman. I II S

( Ol H I:

OF I

•

117

THLI TIO

HISTORY Mr. Schnackenberg, Mr. Akre, Mr. Nordquist, Mr. Ristuben, Mr. Vigness

The purpose of the study of history is to i n form the student of man's words and deeds that have shaped the world's cultu res, movements, instituti ons, and c i v i l izations. A s sueh, it ,eeks to build a fund of useful inform a t i o n , sharpen

the critical faculties of the m i n d with respect to materials and methods, train the i n tdlect, disc i p l i n e the memory, and probe for those values that po i n t the way toward ul tim ate mea n i ng for modern man's search for liberty and security.

A Major c o m p rises 30 hours i n cluding History 103, 104 a n d 203, 204. Adm ission : During the second semester of the sophomore year, a student i n t e n d i ng to major i n history leading t o the Bachelor o f Arts degree should fill o u t un a p p l ication which is available in the department office. If accepted, the student w i l l be assigned to a member o f the history faculty who will serve a� his adviser. Engli.<h Proficiency : Prior to the Tha nksgivi n g recess of the j u n i or year, a history m ajor must attain a sati sfactory score on an examination in Enp:l ish

pro fi c i ency. Arrangements for taking the examination should be made i n the offi ce of the D i rector of Testing. Senior Sem.inar: In either the first or sec'ond semester of the senior year, a

history major mllst en roll in one sem i n a r ( either American or European ) . Examination : Before the end of 1I'larch o f the senior year, each graduating

history major must take an exam i nation, usually oral, covering the work i n the fidd of history. A rrangements will be made by the department chairman. Candi dates for the Bachelor of Arts in Education degree, who are pla n n i n /! a

teach i n g

major

History

sbould refer

page

under

ACADEl'vl I C

P R E P A R A TION.

103, 104 History 0/ Civilization 3, '1 .

An i n troduction to history emphasizing the u n dersta n d i n g and analysis of historical materials and ideas. The historic foundations and i nstitu tions

civilization-l'vleso potamia ;

Egy p t ;

The

Hebrews :

Greece ;

Rome ; The rise of Christi anity ; Europe to the present. Lectur!'s and discussions. I , II

112 Hi.�tory 0/ the Christian Church 2 The origins, thought and expansion of the Christian Church, the rise of the papacy, the Reformation, a n d the modern era. I II

203, 204 American History 3, .'1 The origin a n d development of the American nation from colonial times to the present. Emphasis upon the factors that have i n fluenced and contributed to American i nstitutions. I, II

2 1 0 The Pacific North1,flest 3 The discoveries, explorations, and settlement of the Pacific North west. The i n ternational rivalries ; the missionary, economic, and political back ground ; the establishment of state and local governments. I II

118

CO TR. ('

OF r T.

TR Ur.TID

241. 242 Hi.� tory of the Ancient World 3, .1 A study of the ancient Mediterranean world. The history of Greece. A l exander the Great ; the oril!;ins and rise of the Roman Empire and civilization. The decline. May he ta k en for upper u ivision credit with consent of i nstructor. I, II 301 Medieval Hi.�lory 3

A stuuy of the h i story of Europe from the disintel!;ration of the Roman Empire to 1450. Extensive reading an d research in selected medieval materials. Prerequ isite : History 103, 104. I aly 1965·66 3 1 1 The Renaissance .1 A system atic study o f Europe in an age o f transition ( 1 300 to the death o f Michelangelo ) . Readings and research i n selected topics. Prereq u i . s i te : History 1 0 3 , 104. I aly 1 964·65 3 1 2 The Reformation .1 An i n tensive study o f the sixteenth century. Political and religious crisi s ; Lutheranism, Zwinglianism, Anglicanism, A n a baptism, Calvinism. Roman Catholic: reform. The Web er thesis, the begi n n i ng o f Baroque art. Readings and researc h in selected s i xteenth century materials. Pre· requisite : History 103, 104. II 333 Europearr History from 1 648 10 1 789 3 An advanced study of men and movement!'; during the early development of the modern, scientific age. The enlightenment, the Old Regime. Read ings and researc.h. Prerequisi t e : History 103, 104. I aly 1 964-65 334 The French Revolution amI Napoleon .1 A n advanced course of lectures, rea u i ng and research i n the revolu tionary events i n E u rope from 1789 to the Congress of Vienna. Pre requi,;ite : History 103, 104. II aly 1964-65 337 Nineteenth Century Europe .'l A ,;tudy of the development a n d expansion of European civilization from 1 81 5 to 1 91 4. L e c tures , discussions, readings, research. Prerequi site : History 1 0:3, 104. I aly 1965-66 338 Twentieth Century Europe .'1 A c ourse o f rea di n gs and discussions concerning the events and trends

since 1 91 4. Prerequisite : History 103, 104. 11 aly 1965·66

351 American Colonial Hi.�lory .1 A study o f the colonial period to the American Revolut ion. The colonial settlements, governments, a n d the economic, polit ical, religious, and cultural progress to the independence period . Prerequisi te : H i s to ry 203, 204. J aly 1964-65 360 Civil War and Reconstruction 3 A course of readings and research in the pol i tical, social, economic and diplomatic trends i n A merica from 1850 to 1877. E m p hasis upon the

)f 1 STI'Ur.TlO

119

i m part u po n the countrr of the Civil \ Va r and the reconstru c t ion. Pre· req u isi t e : H istory 203, 201.

n aly 1964·65

363 The V. S. from .1877 to 1 9 1 4 3 A n in tensive study of the devel op m e nt of t h e United States dllring the period of r a p i d i n dustrialization. Attention given to econom i c , soc ial, p o l i t ic a l and i n tellectual p r o blems a nd a c t i v i t ies. Prerequisi te : l Tistory 203, 204. I a/y 1 965-66

372 Recent A m erican nistory 3 A st u d y of the pol i t i(:al, social, economic and c u ltllral structure and i n s t i tutions of the U n i ted States since 1914. Empha"is u po n involvement i n w o r l d affairs. Readi ngs and research. P rere q u i site : H i s to ry 20.1, 204.

n a/y 1965-66 40 1 , 402 England .'J , .3

A study of

polit ical , s oc i al

ments in the B r i ti sh Jsle�.

economic, lc!!,al, a n d cult ural develop·

Prerequisite:

Hist ory 103,

104. I, [[ a/y

1 965·66

410 Englisll Corrstitrd;orral History 3 The e\'olution of the English concept of the crown, p a rl i amentary gov rnment, the structure a n d

fu nctions of England's central

and

local

gove m m e n t a I i n stitutions, t he common law from A nglo - S a xo n t i m es. Pn,req u isite : Consent of i ns t r u c t or . II a/y 1 964-65

42 1 Hi,dory of ldea.� : European Civilization ,3 A n a d va n ce d study o f the leading ideas developed i n western c i v i l i za

tion �ince the disin tegration ,t r1l(:tol'. I all' 1 %5·66

Rome.

Prc r cq u i� i t e :

Consent

of in

441 History of Russia 3 A �tll d y of various problems in the development of J IIssiu. Emphasis upon the colla p se o f CzariBm, the rise o f Commu nism, and p resent world relati ons. Pre r e qui s i t : History 103, 104. l ull' 1 964-65

444 History of the Far EaJlt 3 General geogra phical a n d historical study of Far Ea s t e rn l i fe � n d thought. Readings and research . Principal emphasis lIpon J a p a n , C h i n a ,

In dia. T h e West i n Asia ; the rise o f national ism, religious, artistic, i n tellectual, soc i a l institutions. Prerequisite : Co n s en t of instructor. II aly 1 964-65 4 5 1 , 452 American Con stitutional History 3, 3 The development of the constitution from colonial ti mes. Stress is l a i d

upon the problems o f imperial o rga ni zat i o n , federal supremacy, p o l itical, social, a n d economic chan ges. P r erequi si te : History 203, 204, a n d con sent of instructor. I, II aly 1965-66

120

( l R :-; F;.; OF I

'1 n Ut

T10

4 5 6 Hi.�tory o f A merican Diplomacy .'1

The basic factors a n d policies in the foreign rdation" of the United States : isolation, neutrality, Monroe Doctri�e, the United States as a world power. Prerequisite : History 203, 204 and consent of instructor. I I aly 1965·66 462 Hi.�lory of Ihe A merican Fronlier 3

A study of the westward movement with emphasis upon the Turner thesis and its critics. Prerequ isi te : History 203, 204. II aly 1964·65 49 1 , 492 'ndependent reading and re.� earch 1-2 495, 496 Seminar in European Hi.�I,ory .'1 , 3 497, 498 Seminar in A merican History 3, .'1 597, 598 Graduate Research 1-.'1

JOURNALISM Mr. Nesvig

203 Journalism 2

A study of the princ iples of news writing and editi ng, and their applica tion i n the preparation of news copy ; headline writing ; proof reading. I 204 JOllrnalism 2

Editorial and feature writing ; a study of the various types of editorial and feature copy ; column writing ; make up ; laboratory work in connec tion with the MOORING MAST and SAGA. I I 208 Editurial Conference 1-4

Provides o p portunity for the publication staff to do practical research work on journal istic problems. Open to advanced students in journalism with consent of the i n -true tor. I I I

MATHEMATICS Mr. C. Adams, Mr. Ehret, Mr. Reitz

Requirements for the Bachelor of Arts degree with a major in mathematics shall consist Qf a m i nimum of 25 credit hours i n cou rses nu mbered 200 and above including Mathematics 202 a nd 301, a nd at least 12 credit hours o f u pper division courses.- Physics 109, 110 is also required. Physics 361 may be substi tuted for five hours of upper division mathematics. Candi dates for the Bachelor of Arts in Education degree who are planning a teaching major in Mathematics should refer to page 58 under ACADEMIC PREPARATION. Requirements for the Bachelor o f Science degree in Mathematics consist o f a min imum o f 3 7 credit hours o f mathematics including Mathematics 202 and 301 and at least 24 credit hours of upper division mathematics. Physics 109, 110 is also required. Physics 412 may be substituted for four hOiJrs of upper division mathema tics. Not more than 40 hours i n the major can he counted to ward graduation.

121

Typical Curri£,lllum in Malhemalics

Freshman Year Engl 1 0 1 , 102 Compo�ition *M " ath 200, 201 Analytic Geo m e t ry and Calculus tRel igion

llr... 6 7

2 8 6 2 2

req u i rement

Science elective SO(' in I Sc i e n" e eie<" li,cs

Electiyc ' PE activity

Sophom ore Year A rt or music elective l\Iath 202 Analytical Geo m e t ry and Calculus Mathematics a p proved cou rse P hy si cs 109, 1 10 C h e m i s try Phy;;ics or Physics 1 5 1 , 152 tReligion requ i rement Electives PE activity

llrs. 3 3 3

8 4 8 2 31

J1U/ ior Y ear Li t e ra t ure elective *' foreign language

lln. 3 !l

?1athematics approved courses P h i l o:,ophy re q u i renlf'nt t R el igioIl rt:ql l i relllcnt

Sc i e nce el,,,, t i V('s

12 :l 2 4

Senior Year Foreign language Mathematir.s a p p roved cou rses Social science electives E l ec ti ves

llrs. 6 12 6 8 32

*Sllldents not qualifying lor lI'fathematics 200 upon entrance should register lor Ma t h ema t i cs 1 1 2 and/or 131 and then take both Mathematics 202 an.d 301 i n the seeond semester 0/ the sophomore year. **Students leh" e n ter the University with two years 0/ modern language

"Ill y

elect to take second year courses in. the same language dnring the /resh man year.

tSee /lage 37 lor requirements in religion. 1 0 1 Inlerme('iale Algebra .'l A thorough review of high school algebra and a continuation Le yond quadratics. Three periods per week. Prerequisite : one year of high school algebra. Not acc e p t a h le for a major. I II

1 1 2 Plane l'rigorlOmetry 2 [ II 1 3 1 College AlgelJru .'1

I II 200 A nalylic Geomelry and Calculus 4

The straight line, l i m i t s and derivatives, applications of derivatives. in tegra t ion , applications of t he definite integral. Prerequisite : Mathe matics 1 1 2 and/or Mathematics 131 or equivalent. I I I

122

2 01 Analyti

un H S I· �

) 1. I

Gwmelry and CalclIllls 3

Transcendental functions, natural logarithms, m eth o d s of i n t egrati on, dete rm i n ants, plane analytical geometry, hype r ho lic function" and p ola r coo rdi n ates. Prerequi si t e : Mathematics 200. I II 202 Analytic

Geometry and Calcllills 3

I n fi n i t e series, sol i d analytic geometry, partial differen tiation, mult i ple

i n t egration. P r e re q u i site : Mathematics 201 . I II

301 Line(fl" Algebra 3 A �tlldy in vector �pace�, ma trices, and quadratic. form�. Prerequ i � i t P : Mathemat ics 200 or consent o f c h a i r m a n o f t h e depa r t m e n t . I I 3 1 1 Di/Je re nfial

Eqllation.� .'J

O r d i n a ry differential equations w i t h applications. Prerequisite : Nlnthe·

m a tics 202. I

3 1 2 Applierl

Mathemalics ,'l

Topics i n c lude Fouri" r series, series solutions o f d i ffe re n tial equations, vector calc;ulus, partial di ffe re nti al equa t i o n , the Laplace tr ans form. Prerequisit : Mathematics 3 1 1 . II

319

Modern Elemen tary Mathematic,� 'l .

A n i n troduction to the mathematical concep t s u n der l yi n g the traditional

com putational techniques, and offeri ng a systematic analysis of ar i t h · metic a n d an i n tu i tivc approach to alge b ra a n d /l:comet ry . Prere q u isite :

consent of instructor. 321

Geometry 3 A survey of the field of geometry foundations and hasic theory i n the areas of E u c l i uean, projective, and non·Euclidean Geo m e try. Prerequi s i t e : hthf'matics 200 or consent of i n st r uc tor. I aly 1 964 · 6 5

34) Mathematical Statistic", .'l Elementary pr o ba J ) i l i ty theory, discrete and conti nu ous distri bution fu nct i o ns, i n tro duc t i on t o sa m p l i n g the o ry a n d h y p ot he' i ,; testing. Pre· requ isi t e : M a th e m atics 201. I I a/y 1964-65 43 1 , 432 Advanced

Calculll.� 8, 3

A rigor o us a nd extended treatment of topics introduced in e l e m e n t a r y c a lculu,. Prerequ i"it(; : Ma the ma t i cs 202 and :301 or conse n t of inst rll c ' to r. I , I I a/y 1964-65 453, 454

Modern Algebra .'l, .'l

Topics i n c l u de matrices, systems of l i near equations, lin ear transforma· ti o ns, vector spaces, introduction to the t h eo ry of groups, rings, fields. Prerequ i"ite : Mathematics 201. I , I I aly 1965·66

460 Elementary

Topology 2

A n i ntroduction to topological spnces. P rereq uisi te : Consent of i nstruc·

tor. On demand.

1 23 495, 'l96 Seminar 1, 1 Open

to advanced students wi th consent of depart m e n t .

497 , 498 Indepe"dent Study 1-2 Open to ad va nc e d students w i t h consent of departm"nt. r II MUSIC Mr. Skanes, Mr. Frills, Mr. Gilbertson, Mr. KnaIJ{J, Mr. Ncwnham, M�\.< Payne ; assisted hy Mrs. Betts, Mrs. Elliot!, Mr. Espc.<clh, Mrs. Tremaine

The reqnircments for the Bachelor of Music dep;ree are outl i n e d under the School of F i n e and A p p l i ed A rts in the sec ti o n , A c a demic. Orp;anizat ion. RN[lIirenw n t · for a major in music for the Bachelor of Arts dep;r 'f' shall consist o f a m i n imum o f 34 semester hours in music t heory , hi st.o ry and l it e ra · t u re i nc l u d i n g Music I l l , ) ] 2, 2 1 1 , 2 1 2 , 22 1 , 222, 3 1 1 , 3 1 2 , 4 ] ] , 4 1 2 , and six hours from ]\1l1sic 321 , 322, 423, 424 a n d 120, p l us eight semester hours o f p r ivate o r class in s truc tio n i n a p pli e d music of w h i c h four must be i n pi ano . FOllr hOlln' of credit i n e n sem b l e must b e e a rn e d . Qlla l i fy i n p; <e x a m i n a t i ons shall he g i v e n to a l l f r es h men and t r an s fe r students pl a n n i n g to major in m ll si c , and a �econd e x a m i n a ti on shall be p;ivl'n at the end o f the sophomore year. All mll"i" Illajors a rc req l l i rt :d to attend the faclllty and student recitals of the Mll,ie Oquntnwnt. Candidates for the Bachelor o f A rts in Education dep;rec who a re pla n n i n g a t eac h i n g major in Music should refer to page 60 un d er ACADEMIC PREPA RATIO .

1 0 1 Fll lldamelllal .• .1 A study of the rudiments of music, i n c l u d i n g rhythms, sip;ht reading,

elemen tary ke y boa rd experience and c r e a t i v e music:. I II

111, 1

2 Theory .1 , .'J

Thorough t r a i n i n g i n the m e lo dic , harmo n i c a n d rhythmic clements o f m u s i c . A co m p le t e correlation o f the materials a n d techniques o f sight· sing inp;, melodic a n d harmo n i c dic tation, rh ythm ic readinp;, and t he ..lements o f harmony i ncluding seventh chords a n d fo u r· p a r t writing.

Five periods per week. J, II

1 20 M,uic Survey 3 An in troduction to the music literature of Western C ivi li za ti o n through the study of the form and meaning o f m usical masterpieces. A course

designed to enhance the enjoyment of muoic. There are n o prerequ i si t es. ot open to music majors.

1 II

132 ConceTt ChOTUS 1 T ryo uts are held at the bep;i n n i ng of earh fall semester. S i n g i n g of both Huered a n d sec ul ar music, with and wi tho ut accompaniment. I II 1 34 ChoiT 0/ the J"Pe s t 1 T ryou t >; arc held a t the beg i n n i n g of each fall ,.emester. Members may b e req ui red to take private voice le",on� at the reque"t of the director. I II

124

C Ol n.r� OF J

" " ( C1'IO

1 3 5 Madrigal Singers and Vocal Ememble 1 1e mh ersh i p determined b y tryouts. L i mite d t o 2 0 members. Singing o f hath sacred a n d . eeular music mainly o f t h e "ixteenth a n d seventeenth centmy. I II

136 Vniver.�ity Orc"e.� lra 1 l\[em h "'rsh i p determined hy tryouts. I I I

1 3 7 Chamber Ensemble 1 1 II Prerequisite : Consent of i nstru c tor.

1 38 VlIiver.•iLy Band 1 Memhership determined hy tryouts. I I T

1 4 1 , 1 4 2 Strings 1 , 1 I nstrumental laboratory. Two hours per week. r, IT u/y 1965-66

1 50 Piano 1-2

1 II S 1 52 Organ 1-2 The tec h n i q ue of organ playing and style through preparatory exercises and works o f clas�ir, and contemporary composers. Prerequisi te : Satis· factory p i a n o technique. I II

1 54 Voice 1 -2 Voiee production, placement, breath control, rliction, i n t"rpretation, re p · ertoire. S i m p l e oratorio and operatic arias and art songs, I I I

1 5 6 Violin, Viola 1 T II

1 57 Cello, B a.• ,. 1 T II

1 60 Class Piano lor Music Majors 1 On rlcmand.

162 Clas., Org an lor Music Majors 1 On demand.

2 1 1 , 2 1 2 Theory 4, 4 Continuation of Music 1 1 1 , 112 through altered chords, modulation, h a rm o n i c counterpoint i n two, three and four parts. Prereq u i si t e : Mus i c. 1 1 2. r, I I

2 2 1 , 2 2 2 Hi,�/ory 1 , 1 Study of the periods and styles as exem p l i fied i n t h e works of the most i m portant composers. I, II

243 Woodwilllis 1 Instrumental laboratory. Two hours per week. T aly 1 964-65

r:m B I'

THl crr

)\;

125

244 llras.� and Percussion 1 Instrumental laboratory. Two hours per week. II a/y 1964·6.5

3 1 1 Modal Cou nterpoint 2 Prereq u i s ite : Music 212. I air 1964·6.5

3 1 2 Tonal Counterpoint 2 Prereq u i,ite: 1Vlw,ic 212. II a/y 1964-65

32 1 M .... ic in the Renaissance .1 I aly 1964-6.5

322 Music in the Baroque .'l II a/y 1964-65

323 lli.�tory 01 Opera 2 The development of opera from the early Baroque till our time. The study of the music as well as production problem". S

340 M!l.�ic in the Elementary School 2 Tec h n i q ues and procedures for the music pro�ram of the first six p:rade s.

The rote �ong, child voice, rhythm activities, and the l i ke. Prerequisite : l\'Iusic 1 01 or equivalent back�round music. I I I

34 1 Choral Conducting 2

A study of the technique of the baton a n d examples of score reading. Consent of in,tructor n�quired. Three hours per week. I aly 1964-6.5 342 Instrumental Conducting 2 Baton technique, score readinp:, laboratory work in conducting instru mental groups. Consent o f i n structor required. Three hours per week. I air 1964-65

350 Piano (Adl,anced) 1-2 Prerequisites: octaves. ( 2 )

(1)

All major and m i n o r scales, hands together, I\vo

A ny prelude and fugue from the Well- Tempered Clavier

by Bach. (.3 ) A das,ical sonata equivalent in difficulty to Beethoven Op. 49, No. 1 or 2. (4) A romantic composition equivalent in difficulty to a Chop i n Prelude or a Chopin Waltz.

352 Organ. ( Adt,ancetl) 1-2 I II

354 Voice (Atlvanced) 1 -2 Technical studies for fl uency and range. Song l i terature to i ndude the recitative and arias from oratorios and operas of Bach, Handel, !I,lozart, etc. Fre nch, Italian and German art songs; student recital and radio appearances. I , I T

360 Class Piarw lor Mruic Major.� 1 On demand.

362 Class Organ lor Music Majors 1 On demand.

T R I CTH

12 7

4 1 1 Form 2 The nature of mu si c and its a p p l i c ation i n smaller forms. Pre requ isi te : Music 212. I a/y 1964-65

4 1 2 Form 2 The larger forms a n d form prohlems In ron temporary music. Prerequi si te : M usi c 2 1 2. I a/y 1964-65

4 1 5, 416 Orchestration 2, 2 A study of the ranp:es a n d characteristics of all the i n s t ru m e n ts of the

hand a � d orchestra. A rrangements for comhination s, band and orchestra. Prerequ i s ite : l\!usic 2 1 2. I, II a/y 1 964·65

421 Hi.,tory 0/ Clrllrch Mu.,ic 2

I a/y 1 965-66 422 Applied CllIlrt:h Music 2

II a/y 1965·66 423 Cla" " ic and Romantic MIl., ic .1

I a/y 1964-65 424 Conteml}Orary Mu" ie .1

II a/y 1964-65 425 Major Con/erent:e 1 -.1 427 floc I. 2 The l i fe a n d music of t h e composer and hi s i m p ortance In Western

c u l ture, II a/y 1965-66 428 Musicology 1 -.1 The methods a n d means o f musical research and thei r application to selce-ted topics in, music history, literature, and theory. S

435 Ope'ra Work,shol} 1-.1 Stage production o f operas. Prerequ isit e : Permission of instructor. I II

440f Music ill the Secondary School 2 The place o f music in adolescent development, the boy's chan g i n g voice, oq(anizing and directing all phases of vocal and instrumen tal music ac tivities in the junior and enior high school. I I

442 Met, hods 0 / Teacl.ing Piano 1 Lectures, discussions, p rescribed reading in methods of teaehing p i a no. Req u i red o f piano majors. Open to others with sufficient preparation. Recommended fur senior year. n

491 Composition 1 -3 A stu d e n t may register for this course for four semest e rs and earn a total o f 12 seme"ter hours. Prerequisite: Music 212 or consent o f in structor. O n demand.

520 Graduate Seminar l ·.'J On demand.

1 28

OUt I S OF I

TH I

TIO

NURSING Mrs. Morken, Mrs. Chase.. Miss Fletch er, Mrs. Fullilove, Mrs. Lau rsen, M�ss Lehman, Mrs. Nielsen, Mrs. R uth, Miss Tolle/son, Mrs. Labes ; assisted by Mrs.

W illwrns

The req u i rement;; for the Bachelor of Science in N u rR i n g degree arc o u tl ined u n der the School of N l w;ing in t h e section, Academi" Organiza tion. These i n ·

clude pr('requi�ites for the pr o fession al c o u rseR.

103 11Itroduction

Nursing .1

A stlldy o f the eha ractcristics, altitudes a n d a b i l i tie� esse n t i a l for pro· fessio n a l n u r,;ing, including commun ications and ohserva tion sk ill.s , i n t ro' duction to pharmacology and no r m al

n u t ri t ion. I I I

235, 236 Medical-Surgical Nu r.s ing 1 0, 10 A p a t i e n t-centered ,;tudy of variolls types of Illlcs i n g; prohlems common to

adu l t

pa t i ents who

requ i re medical care o r s u rg ic a l i n tervention.

Students w o rk roward g a i n i n g a basic knowl e d ge of sorne of the common d i sea se c n t i t i es and

the prohlems they pre"ent. The students will be

given opport u n i ty to a n a l yze the;;e j J rohle1ll5, develop an a h i l ity to ma k c

clcci,ions a bo u t the n u rsing eare to be provided and g a i n some experi ence in a d m i n istering the n u n;ing care involved. Th ree c l i n ic a l l a hora

tory periods a n d seven hours class per week first semc�tcr. Four cl i nical laboratory pe riods and six hOllrs class per week second s c me, t er .

335 Maternal-Child Nursing 10

II n d e n't a n di n g which w i l l e n G b]e the s t u d en t to give c o m p rehensive CGre to fam i l i es d u r i ng the c h ild

A s t u dy of the essen t i a l knowledge and

bea r i n g and <'. hild-rearing proce"c,. The a"pects of heal th promotion u n d care o f t h e

sick a r e included. E x p e rier.ce includes observation a n d care

o f mothers and c h i l d re n in hosp i ta l wa rds, cl i n ics and related com m u n i ty

agencies. Five cl i n i cal laboratory jJcriods a n d five hOllrs of class per I II

week.

402 Trellds ill Nursing .1

A re v i e w of n u r, i ng a c t i v ities i nc l u d i n g historical backgrounds, twentieth century nursing; in A m erica, fields open to profes,ional n u rs i n g and n ursing research. I I I 435 Psychiatric N"r.� ing 8

A study of major concepts of mental h ea l t h and psyc h i a t ri c mlrsing as it relutes to the n u rse in th e totu l tlwra p eu t ie m ilieu of psyc h i at ric: p a t ients. Guidanc.e is given in u n derstun d i n g pe rson a l needs a n d be h a v i o r p a tterns o f a dj us tm ent . Four c l i n ic a l laboratory pcriod� a n d two hours c i a !', per week fo r dass of 1966 (6 credit h ou r ' ) _ Five c l i nical la bora t o ry p e ri od s a n d three hours class per week beg i n n i n g w i t h the class of 1967 (8 credit hours ) _ I II

129 436 PuiJlic Health Nur.�i"g 9 A eou rse de�igned to h e l p the student l ea rn new coneepts a n d review ma terial p rev iously p resented which a re a p p l ic a ble to the ex perience i n t h e field of p u bl i c h ea l t h . Provides the o p p o r tu n i ty for the student to apply n u rsing s k i l ls in a setting o u tside the hosp ital, showing the family

and commun i ty their

im portant u n i t., of health p romotion und i l l u strating

influence o n i n d ividual

health.

study o f the

a d m i n istration,

o rganization and services o f both voluntary and offi c i a l agencies

0 1 1 t1 a �

tional, state a n d local l evel is i n c l u ded. FOll r c l i n ical laboratory p er io d s and five h o u rs of cla,;s per w ee k. I II

475 Se"ior Nur.•i"g 1 0 A course identifying leadersh i p principles i n nursing. Emphasis i s o n o rga n iza tion o f nursing cure, teum n n rsing, emergency a n d db-aster nll r� ing, a n d

p r i n c i p les of n l l n; i n g

management.

Five cl i n ical

lahoratory

periods and five ho u rs of cla ss per week. I IT

497, 498 I"dependent Study l-:J P r e requ i s i te : Perm is,ion of thle D i rector.

PHILOSOPHY Mr. A rbaugh, Mr. !luber NIajor, 24 c red i t h o u r s, i nc l u d i n g P h iloso p h y 233, and any three of t h e follow·

i n g : .3.3 1 , .3 32, 333, 334, :ns. Any COllrse may he taken to sat isf y the t h re e· h o u r philoso p l l Y requi rement ex"e p t Ph iloso p h y 233, 324, '1 1 1 , 414, o r 4 2 7 . F o r more c o m pl e t e c.ou rsc descriptions, "ce m imeog ra l-' hed s u p p l e m e n t

provided by t h e

depa rtnH'nt.

201 Introduction to Philo.w phy .1 A n i n t roduction to a va riNy of philosophical i ss u es , i n tel lectual sy>tems, and t h i n k e rs. I II

22 1 IntrOtluction to Ethics .1 A study of the muin ethical "ystern<; o f western c i v i l ization. I I I

233 Logic .1 A n exam ination of the princ ip les of a rgument and p roof. I

300 Principles of Philosophy 3 An advanced introductory cou r<;e. Not o p en to students w ho have taken P h i l os o p h y 201. I "

3 2 1 System.• of Etllics .1 Not open t o M u de n ts who have taken Ph iloso p h y 221. I II

324 Social Eth ic.� .1

130

OF I

:TIC

331 Ancient Greek Philosophy 3 Philo,;ophy from 8 t h Cen tury B . C. to the 4th Cen tury A . D . I all' 1966·67

332 Medieval Ch ristian Philosophy 3 Chri"tian p h i l osophy from A u g u s t i n e to O"khal1l. I I

333 MOllern Philosophy .1 Philo,oph)' frort! Descartes to Ka n t ( 1650 to 1800 ) . I I

334 Nineteenth Century Philosophy .'1 Significant think!'[',; a n d works of tlw n i neteenth century. I a/y 1966-67

335 Contemporary PI,ilosophy .'1 _

fen, i,,�ues a n d methods of t h e t w e n t i e t h c e n t u ry. I all' 1966-67

361 Orien tal Thought 3 P h i lo"o l ' hy and i t s i m pl i c a t ions for l i terature, religion, a n d c u l t u r e i n h i na , India, a n d J a p a n . I a/y 1 965-66

4 1 1 Philosophy 0/ Religion 3 A n aly,;is of t ra d i t i o n a l p roblems in rel i o-ion. I

4 1 4 Kierkegaard .'J Thoug:ht, l i fe, a n d writ i n gs o f Kierkegaard. 1I all' 1966-67

422 Theory 0/ JIailLe 3 N a tu re of ethical, ..,thet ir·, a n d religious , ;:ducs. I all' 1 966-67

424 Theory 0/ Knowledge ancl Scientific Mind 3 N a t u r e a n d problems of sc i en t i fi c a n d other k n owledge. I all' 1 965-66

427 Books, lclea.•, and Men : A Cooperative Seminar in Philosophy .'1 A ['ea d i n g a n d disclission "ou r.<e conduc.ted hy both fae u l t y members i n t h e department. I air 1965-66

PHYSICS M r. Jordahl, M r. Adams Physics deals with the fun damental princip les which explain natural phe nomena. Therefore a study of physics is basic to all advanced work i n natural scie nce. Pre-engineerinp; and pre-medical students, as well as chemistry a n d mathematics major�, are required t o have at least a year o f college physics. A major i n physics fulfi l l i n p; the requirements for the Bachelor of Arts degree s h a l l consist of a m i nimum o f 26 hours of physics including courses 31 1 , 361, 362, one intermediate laboratory c o u rse, supported by o n e year o f i n o rganic chemi stry a n d mathema tics th rough cou rse 202.

l Ol l sr '

l1H CTIl

Candid ates for the B a c helor of Arts i n Education degree who are planning teachi n g major in Physics should refer to page 60 u n der ACADEMIC PREPARAT JO . .

The Bac helor o f Science degree in physics requi re;; a minimum of .35 hOII I'''; i n physics including cou rses .3 1 1 , 312, 361, 362, 35 1, 461, 462, and a mi n inlll m

of 60 hours ill the areas of sc i e n c e a n d mathematics und the fulfillment of all other req u i rements a s stat.ed for the bachelor's degree. Not more than 40 hours of physics in the major can be cou n t e d toward this degree. Germ a n , French, or Russia n a re recommended for the la ngllage requ iremen t.

Curriculum in Physics for Bachelor of Science Degree Fresh man Year

Sophomore Year

Hrs.

P h ysics 109, 1 1 0 Chemistry路 Physics Engl 1 0 1 , 102 Composi tion

']\"loder n Lang u a ge 201 , 202 'Math 131 College Al gebra

6 3

Math 201 A nalytic Geometry an d Calculus Math 202 Analytic Geometry

4 2 2

and Calculus Phpics lSI, 152

R 6

Math 200 A n alytic Geo metry a n d C alculus 'Relig ion requirement E le c t i \:cs PE acti v ity

Hrs.

Art 1 1 0 In troduction to Visual A rts Social Science electives

2 33

E"entials o f Physics 'Religion requirement

R 4 2

Elective F E activity

2 31

Hrs. Junior Year Math 3 1 1 Differ ential Equations 3 Math 3 1 2 Applied Mathematics ' " .3 6 Social sciences ( upper divis.io n ) Physics 3 6 1 , .3 62 Theoretical Physics

Physics 35 1 Electr i c a l Measurements l .a h 'Religion requ irement Elec t i ,',,;;

1 2

Senior Year Li terat u re elective

P h ilosoph y requirement Physics 461, 462 Adva nced Laho ratorv

Physics 311 Modern P hysics Physics 312 Nuclear P h .vsics Electives

IIrs. 3 3 4 3 3 16 32

32 'A s L U dent who has completed two years o f a modem language in high school mlly

com plete the foreign language requirement in that lan.guage during th e n.ew language the history requirement

freshman year. If t h e student elects a

should be taken during the freshman year an d the language course should be postponed to the sop'homore and junior years.

'A student who has completed two years of algehra in high school should nO! enroll for this course. 'See page 37 for requirements in religion.

132 109- 1 1 0 An

F I

I C ) ':\

TIn

Chemistry-Physics 4, 4 i n t e p; ra t ed c o u rse

<, h e m i ,; t l ' y u n d This course

thei r a

the

fundamental

a p p l ication

prereq u i s i te

princi ples of

phy,ical

and

phy,ics

chemical

for a l l chemistry a n d

phy'ic�

nll mhp.red 200 a n d above. T h ree lectures, one di,;cus,;ion OIl<'

two · h o ll r l a h o ratory

period

p e r week.

and

p ro blcms . cou rses

period a nd

Prerequ i�ite :

M a tbcmati,;,

101 or equiva lent. T , I I

1 5 1 , 1 52 Essenti(lls 0 / Phy.�ics 4 , 4 In troductory course which meets the science requirement for the Bach· clor of Arts degree and i s recommended for pre-medical a n d pre-dental students. F i rst seme,ter : mechanics, heat and sou nd ; second s e me s t e r : electricity, magnet i s m , l ight a n d i n t roduction to modern p hysic;:, Three

lectures and one

2-hour

laboratory

period

per

week.

P r ereq u isi te :

Mathe matics 1 0 1 or e q u i v a lent. I, II

3 1 1 Modern Physics .1 A course co�-e ring important developments in the field of physics since 1890. The emphasis i s o n atomic phenomena, but i ncludes the subjects

of natural radioactivity and an i n t roduction to nuclear reactions_ Pre· reqll i " i te : P lty_, i", 1 0 9 , 110 o r cons"nt of in structor. I

3 1 2 Nlwle(lr Phy.� i"s .1 A c o n t i n uation of course 3 1 1 , dealing with nuc.lear particles, artifi c i a l nuclear d i s i ntegrations, nuclear bind ing forces, e t c . Prerequisite : Physics 311. II

316 Light 4 General princi pies of geometrical a n d phys i ca l optics a n d study o f o p t i cal instruments_ Three lecture-recitations and onc 3-hour laboratory per week. Prerequ isite : P h ysic- 109, 110 or 151, 1 52, V I lathematics 201 . II aly 1965·66

332 Heat L (lboratory 1 A laboratory study of thermal processes and the thermal properties o f Topics covered w i l l include temperature measurement, me cha n ic a l equivalent of beat, calorimetry, heat transfer, change of state,

m atter.

and

heat

o f combustion_

Prerequisite :

Consent o f instructor_

a/y

1965-66

342 Mech(l"ic.� 4 A cou rse i n engineering mechanics dealing with statics, dynamics and k i netics_ Prereq u isite : Physics 109, 1 1 0 or 151, 152, Mathematics 202. II

351 Electrical Measurements L(lfJOr(ltory 1 This cou rse i n t roduces the student to the techn i q ues and methods em ployed in measuring electrical and magnetic phenomena_ Practical d.c. and a.c.

c i rc u i t problems are encountered. Prerequisit e : instructor. I

Consent of

U II H F. 0 r I "'1 H

Theoretical

TIO

133

I .Ii

P hysics

n i n troduction to the o reti e a l mechanics, thermodynamics, a n d k in etic theory of

gases.

Includes

the

study

kinematics,

dynamics,

orbit

theory, moving coordinate systems, generalized coordinates, and an i n troduction to t h e Lagrangian and Ha m i l t o n i a n formulation of me chanics. Also an i ntroduction to thermodynamic systems, fi rst and econd law of thermodynamic�, and t h e r ma l

radiation. Prerequi,i te : Physics

1 10, Math e m a t i cs 202. I

362 Theoretical

Ph ysic s

" 5

The fu n da menta l concepts of k i netic theory of gases a n d sta t is t i cal mechanics are developed with applications. The theoretical ba si s of el ec

t ric. a n d magnetic fields in

and ma t e ri a l media is dc\'Clopcd A lso a brief s t u d y of d .c. a n d a.r-. circ u i t theory. P re requ isi te : Physics 361. II a

vaCllum

leading to Ma xwell's eq u a t io n s.

382 UadioisotolJe Technology 3 The course will deal with the c harac te r i s t ics of n u cl e a r radiations, d e tection and measurement methods a n d eq u ipment. theory of nuclear disintegrations. and a p p l i c at ion to problems i n physics and c he m i s t r y . Two lectures a n d one three-hour laboratory period per we e k . Prerequ i s it es : Physics 109, 1 1 0 (or 151, 152 and C h em is t ry 1 2 1 , 1 22 ) ; 31 1 ; an d Mathematic, 201. II

456 Electronic.• 4 A study of the characteristics of vacuum tubes a n d transistors and the i r use i n rectifiers. ampl ifiers and other electronic devices. Lectu res and laboratory work. Prerequ i�ite : Ph ysi c s 351 or COIlf'ent of i n s t ructor. II a/y 1964-65

461 , 462 Advanced Lahora/ory 1 & " 2, 2 A n experimental a p pr oa c h to some of the classical concepts of modern physics. The student is expected to do i ndependent l ibrary research i n preparation and ana l ysi s o f each experiment. H e will a l so b e required to do a m i nim a l amount of design and construttion of apparatus for certain experiments. Prerequisites : PhYoics 31 1 and satis fac t o ry com pletion of one of the laboratory co un;cs 316, 332, or 35l .

487, 488 Seminar 2 Prereq u isite : c o ns en t of chai rman of the department.

497, 498 Independent Stlldy 1-2 P r e r eq u i si t e : consent of chairman of the department.

POLITICAL SCIENCE IHr. Farmer, Mr. Culver The study o f political s c i e nce train:; the student for the e xe rci se of his rights and duties as a citizen by giving him a better understanding of our democratic political processes and of co n A i cti n g p o l i t j ca l systems.

134

A major i n politieal science shall consist of a nllnJnmm of 27 c re d i t hours i n c:ludin� Pol i t i c al Science 101 (or 30l ) and 251 , .3 1 5, and 3 1 6 . Students majorin g i n Political Science m u s t h av e their registrati on a p p roved b y the Chairman of the department each se m es te r .

C ndi dutes for the Bachelor of A rts in Educ,ation degree who a re p l a n n i n g a teaching m aj or i n P ol i t i c a l Science should refer to p a g e 60 under A C A

DEMIC P R E PA RATION. Political

e l e n c e 1 01

( o r 301 )

i s t.he prereq1Jisite for a l l other COlI I''ieS in

the department. 1 0 ] Introduction to Political Science .1 This course deals with the scope a n d method and the vocabulary of p o l i t i cal science, political hehavior, and governmental organization. It is also d esi g n e d to i n t r od uce the student to problems of p ol i t i c a l theory a n d t o fa mi l i ari ze him with the comparative method of stud)'in� po

l i t i('. al i n - t i t u t i ons. J I I

2 5 1 American Natiorwl Governmen' .1 A st u d y of the A me ri c a n n at i o nal �oveTn rncnt i n c l u d i ng the federal constitution and the distribution of gove rnmental powers. Survey of stmc t u re an d p r oc e d u re of national government with �pecial a t t en t i o n to p r a c t ic a l operat i o ;, a n d c o n t e m po r a ry reforms. I 252 American State Government 3

A c o m p a r at i ve study of slate government in the

n i ted States wilh

s p er. i a l alLpntion to t he Pacific Northwest area. Prerequisi t e : Pol i t i cal Science 251. II

aly 1964-65

301 Principles 01 Political Science .1 An i n t rodllctory course i n poli t ic a l sc i e n c e designed to meet t he needs o f j u n io rs and sen i o rs. Not open to fr es h m e n , sophomores or to anyone who h a s received credit for Polit ical Science 101. I II 315 Hi.�tory 01 Political Thought 3 This course traces the development of thought concerning t h e n a t u re and role of the state from a n c i e n t to modern times. I

316 Recent Political Thoughe 3 A

ritical exa m ination of the major political p h i l oso ph i es of t h e modern

worl d : Democrac y , conservatism, r.apitalism, socialism, anarcho-syndieal

ism, comm u n i sm , racial and political elitism, nationalism, liberalism, Christianity. Contemporary problems_ II

331 Inler1Ultio1Ul1 Relations 3 This i n t roductory course deals with the scope and methods, c once p ts , and t he vocabulary of i nt ern a t i o n a l relations. Survey of the foreign

}

(( 1 I

polir.y

the

major

world

THl

powers

and

contemporary

i n te rn a ti o n a l

problems. I

332 International Organization .1 A study of the World Court. League of l'iations, U n i ted Nation s and its

age,}(:i"" and other i n ternational organizations which attempt t o deal effectively with the problems o f the world com munity. Prerequisite : Politi cal science :� 3 1 . n a/y 1964·65

334 Inlemalional [,aw .1 The nature, historical devel opment, and principles of internat ional law. Prerequisite : Poli t ic a l Science .1 3 1 . II aly 1965·66

354 American Local Govenu nent 3 A

comparative

study

local

governm e n t ,

urhan

U n i t e d States with special attention t o the Pac i fic req u i si t e : Political Science 25 1 . II

and

rural,

the

orthwe,t area. Pre·

a/y 1964·65

3 6 1 American Political Parties 3 Party h i -tory and organizat ions ; nominations and elections : campaigns and

convent ions ;

electoral

problems a n d

local poli tics ; pressure groups ; p l a t forms.

admin i s t rati on ;

bossism

I aly 1 964·65

364 The Legislathe Process 3 A

tudy of the theory, organization, and procedure of legi lalive bodies

in the United States with special attentio n to the contemporary Congress and Wash i n gton state legislature.

Prerequisi t e :

Political Science

251

or 361. II aly 1964·65

434 Govern ment and Business

See Economics 434.

441 Statistical Methods 3 See Economics

441.

451 A merican Constitutional History

See Hi,tory 451.

452 American COllstl tlttional "aw .1 An e xa m i n a t ion o f significant r.onstitutionul issues i n the light of the contemporary i nterpretation o f the Con;titution of the U n i ted States : Church·state

relations, civil

right"

free

speech,

due

process of

Inw,

reapportionment.

457 Public Administratiorl 3 The art a n d science of management a p p l i e d to the affairs of state ; nature of human

behavior

in organiza t ions ; administrative law and

quasi·judicial practices ; civil service ; budget and fiscal control ; cen tralizati on ; coordination, i n tegration in a d m i n i strative areas.. 1 aly

1965·66 483 Democratic Political Systems .1 A comparative analysis of governmental and

political insti t u t i ons of

eontemporary democracies other than the U nited States.

I a/y 1965·66

484 Soviet Political System 3 An a n alr�is of the p o l i t i c a l system of the U n i on of S ov i et Sociali�t Re· p u h l ics with sp ec i al a t t e n t i o n t o i deol ogy , the roTe of the Com muni' ! Party, the natu re of thl' const i t l l tion, a n m i n i "trative ag c n c i e" and n a · t i on al ity po lic y. II a / y 1965·66 497, 498 In dependent RC(I(Jjllg anci Rescarch 1 -2

r ...'req l l i si t c : consent of e h ai rman of d er ar t mc n t . [ n 597, 598 Graduale Research 1 -.'3 I ndividual research projec t for an M , A . e a n n i d a tc with a m i n or I n p ol i t i c a l sci en ce . P re req u i si t e : Consent of de pa r tm en t .

PSYCHOLOGY Mr. iflinther, Mr, !lolmherr;, Mr. Nielsen , Miss

Williamson

Thc object ives of the d ep a rt m e nt include promot i n g knowledge o f th(, basic fnee and p ri n c i p k , of human ex pe ri e n c e a n d he h av i or , w i t h rm rhasis on t h e f o r m a t i o n of a sci en t i fic attitude te,ward behavior and a n a p p re c i a ti o n of the c om pl exi t y of human pcrsol�ali ty. For advanced st u d e n ts an attem p t is made t o provide a b a l a n c e d program a p p l i e d psychology,

of c o u rse offe ri n gs

both theoretical a n d

The career opportu n i t ies in p 'ychology are n u merous and varied. A l t h o u p: h collep:c te a c h i n g and resp-arch ' on t i n ue t o attract the l a rgest s h a r e o f w e l l t ra i lH,d pwchoiogiqs, many a r e b e i n g e m p loye d by b u si n ess and i n d us t ri a l org a n i za t i o ll�, puh l i c sc ho ol systems, a n d fed c r al . state a n d l o c a l govern m en t ap;Pllc i t's. The greatest need is in the field of clinical rsvc ho l og y , One p lan ni n g a career in any a r ea in psyc ho l ogy shouln exree:t to s pen d a m i n i m u ll t of o ne year i n graduate school. l\-l a n y of t he best p os it i o ns req u i re a Ph.D. deg ree involving three to live years of post·graduate t ra i n i ng , In prepa· r at i on for graduate work, students are advised to t a k e slI pporting courses i n mathemat ics, physiology, chemistry, p h ysi cs , philosophy, a n d so ci o lo gy . ;\ rcad· ing k no wl e dge of Freneh and German should also be a c q ui re d . R elated vocations i n which a psychology major is useful a re : s oc i a l work, the m i n i stry, parish work, medicine, business a d m i n istration, and teac h in g .

Requirements fo r a major include P s y ch ol og y 1 0 1 , 240, .30 1 , and either 460 or 490, p lu s 12 a d di t i o n a l hours in the d e partmen t . Psyc ho l ogy 1 0 1 is a pre· req ui si te to a l l c ou rses in the derartment except Psychology l l O.

1 0 1 General Psychology 3 A general course in p sycho lo gy emphasizing the prin c i p les a n d basic facts which are esse nt i a l to an u n derstanding of human behavior. The m a in p r obl em s discussed arc the p hysi c a l basis for behavior, mo ti v ati o n , habits, learning, r ememberi n g, thinking, emotion, ifltelligence, pe rso nal· i ty and character. [ II

COl H . r.� OF I '�TIH Cfm 1

137

no Sllllly Skills Techniques 2 A course designed to assist the student in devel op i n g more effective study techniques. Emphasis is given to i m prov i n g rea d i n g rate and com prehension, developing better skills of co n ce n tra tion , planning effective usap;e o f time, tak ing adequate notes, and preparation o f written ma terial. Class work is supplemented by in dividual counseling periods and/or special trui ning in reading skills. I II

221 The P.�ycllOlogy of AdjrLMment .1 The course deals primarily with the method;; used by normal people i n their adjustment to t h e ordinary a n d t h e serious difficulties of everyday l i fe. The followinp; topics are analyzed : motivation and drives, normal adjustment patterns, adjustment by defense mechanisms, by negativism, by fear and regression, by ailments. Person ality , p sychoanalysi s, and techniques of mental hyp;iene are discussed. I 240 Elementary Analys;.� .1 A n introduction to the language o f research inclu ding descript,ive and i n ferential statistics and hasic exper,imental design. Some c o m put a tion is also incl u ded. II

301 Hllman Development .1

See Education .'\ 0 1 . 3 2 0 Social Psychology .1

A study of the psy(:hologic.al foundations of group l i fe. Analysis of social behavior. Effect of the individual on the group a n d of the group on the individual. Custom, fashion, war, public opinion, etc., i n the light o f p sychologic al p ri n ci ples. Prerequisi t e : Sociology 1 0 1 . I 332 Industrial Psychology .1

A study of the application and use o f psychological theory , research methods, and accumulated knowledge to a variety of industrial areas including personnel select ion, trai n ing, supervision, labor problems, human engineering, and marketing. Prerequisi te : Psychology 240 or 441 or equivalent. 370 Principles of Guidance 2

See Education 370. 390 Experimental Psyclwlogy .1 A n i ntroduction t o expe rim ent al design and basic methodological prob

lems. Experiments ranging from basic ps yc h oph ysics, verbal and motor learning, throu.,;h perceptnal and decision proeesses are condueted and reported by tbe student. One individually designed experiment is also required. Prerequisi te : Psyc holo gy 101, 240. 405 Adolescent Psychology 2

An advanced course dealing with physical deve l op me nt , mental traits, social characteristics and i nterests o f adolescents. Adjustments in home,

I Rl

TI )

school a n d communi ty. Pre requisites : Psycholop:y 1 0 1 , 301 or 305 o r con,ent o f t he i nst ructor. S 421 Abnormal PsycllOlogy !l The application of psycholof!ical facts and principles to the probl ms o f mal adjusted personal i t i es. Symptoms. causes, rem e d i a l procedur 's for abnormal sta tes. IT 426 Psychology 01 Per,wflalily 3 I nclu des a h i storical survey of t he approaches to t he study of person· a l i ty, current t h c Ot' i es of the dynam ics and the del' l o p m e n t of per· �on a l i t y, research on the causes of i n d i vi dual ditTcrcnccs in pCfsonality, perso n a l i ty c h a nge and techn iques of measuring persona l i ty. Prereq ui· si t e : Ps)'chol op:y ,10 1 a n d e i ther Education 478 o r Psychology 32 1 . 1 1

441 Statistical Mel lwdt< 3 Usc und i n t e rpr�tation of elementary statiEtical techn i q ues : i'raphic rep, resentation ; nH�U�L1 res of central tendei1cy ; �inlple {�orrel a t i o l1 analy;-;is� unci s" m p l i lli' t heo n' , I I

450 P,�yc llO'ogical Teslir/g 2 A survey of t he field o f , t a n durdized tests. Tests i n t he areas of i n te l l i · gene" . a p t i t u de, i n u'l'c<t, and per�oll a l i ty a r e con.i dcred, T i l e prop .. r u c , t h e l i m i t a t i o n :;, ancl the i n t erpreta tion of these t�t s arc ernphu,ized, I ·l51 I .. dividual Mer/ tal Te,�ting 2 A n i ntensi " e s t u dy of t h e ·lanford· B i n e t a n d t he Wechsler· B e l l evue i nteil ii'ence 'icale�. Enro l l m e n t l i m i t e d . Prerequisi t e : cOIl>'ent of the i n, t ru('tol'. U

460 P,�y Iwlogy 01 Learning

.�

c i a sital a n d i n st ru m ental con· d i t i o n i n g, rei n forcem e n t , mot i vatio n, e x t i n c t i o n , p u n ishment, p;eneraliza t ion, alld set:on dary re i n forcemen t, aU studied in rela t i o n to theoretical explanat ory poi ntf' of view. Prerequisites : Psyehol0f':v W l , 240, or COllsellt o f i n ,t 1'llr: tor. U

A >'url'ey of ba:.:ic concept. i n learnin l" :

472 Occltpat;ollal 1"lormaliotl 2 ee

ducat ion 472.

473 Introduclion to (.'o unseliJlg 2

:\ course de;;ig ned to acquaint the student w i t h the various theories and tec h n i q ues of cou nsel ing. The course is meant to be an in troduction to t h e fiel d a n d no actual counselin� w i l l be do ne ; however, there w i l l be oppo rtu n i ty for simulated i n terviews and some role playing in connec' t i o n with the development of t he theories and t he tet:hni ques, I II S 474 Principles 01 (.'oun.,eling 3 course desi gned for pastors as an i n t roduction to the field of eoun· eling i ncluding theories and technique . Practical experience 111 coun· sel i n g i s emphasized. Open only to ordained pastors,

OLl S E

r r

"Til

139

TIO

4 7 7 Fieltl JP'ork 2 J II

478 Mental Health lor Teachers 2 S"c Edueation 478.

490 Hi."or�· 01 Psychology 3 Philosophical and experimental background o f scient i fi c psyeholop:y from its pre-Aristotelian Greek origins through recent schools, emp hasizinp: the development of classical concepts and app roaches. Prerequisi tes : 9 hours in psycholop:y or consent of i nstructor.

492 Seminar in P.�ycllOlogy 2 Desi/,:nc c\ for department majors a n d others i n terested

III

special fields

o f psyeholo/,:y. Prerequisite : consent of i n ,tructor. I I J II

497, 498, 499 Independent Sludy 1-2 I II 500 Allvancl'll General Psychology :� A n i nt ensive survcy o f the field o f psychology with particu lar emphasis on motivation, physiolo/,:ical, learni ng, perception, a n d t h i n k i n g , all studied from the most recent c r i t ical perspective.

550 Practic.lln in Group Te.sting 2 An app lication to a practical situation of the theories of group testing. The student is expected to develop and defend a good testing pro,;ram for a particular organization. Some test admi nistration and i n terpreta t io n is required. Prerequisite : Psychology ,353. I I I

553 Prac ticum in IlIIli.)iduul Testin� 2 Supervised practice in the administration and i nterpretation of in di vidual tests with particular emphasis on the Wechsler a n d Stanford B i net. Prerequ isite : Psychology 353, 45 1, or equivalent.

560 P.•ychology 01 Learning :� A n analysis o f the theories of learning and their a p p l i cations. Pre requisite : 9 hours of p,>ychology.

573 Practicllm in Counseling 2 Supervised prnctir.c in counseling. Prerequisite: c o n s 'nt o f the chairman o f t h e department.

Psyc hology

473 o r

REUGlON Mr. Roe, Mr. Christoph erson, Mr. Govig, Mr. Helgeson, Mr. Lee, Mr. Vigness Paci fic; Lutheran U n i versity o ffers a curriculum designed to i ntroduce the student t o the primary sources o f t h e Christian religion, its B i ble, t h e history a n d teachings o f Christianity tbrough the centuries and their a p p lication to the problems of today. Students planning t o continue beyond the basic cou rses

140

. I I

r� or

'IT! C CT I O

required for the first two years should 1,lan their program early with faculty members o f the department. Prerequisites for courses 306, 331, 34 1 , 342, 431, 4.1 2, 440 are courses 201, 202 or 301, 302, or consent of the instructor. Major : 24 hours. 101 Life of je.ms 2 A study of the l i fe a n d teachings of Jesus based on the Gospels and other w r it ings . I II 1 12 History of the Christian Church 2 The origin, thought and expansion of the Christian Church, the rise o f t h e P a pacy, t h e Reformation and t h e modern era. I II 201 The RiMe-Old Testament 2 A study of the l i terature, history and Testament writings. I 1 1

religious thoup;ht in

the Ol d

202 The Bible-Nelli Testament 2 study of the li terature, history and religious thought in the New Testament wri tings. I II

223 Tile CllUrch at Work 2 The orp;anization, procedures a n d practices of the Lutheran Church at the parish level, i ncluding such areas as youth work, evan elism, st(;W a rdsh i p. I 224 Parish Education 2 The needs, materials and methods for Christian instruction at vanous levels. II 301 Biblical Studies 2 ,onsideration of basic Biblical motifs in the Old Testament. Not open to students who have taken 20 1 . I I I

302 Biblical Studies 2 Consideration of basic Biblical motifs in the New Testament. Not open to students who have taken 202_ I II 306 Methods ill Bible Study 2 Relating the form of Scripture to i ts conten t. U n i t, topical, and book studies i l l us t rat ed and applied for the purpose of i m p roving the stu dent's first-hand acqua intance with Scriptu re. I I aly 1 965-66 3 1 2 The Reformation 3 See H istory 3 1 2.

3 3 1 Comparative Religioll 2 The living religions of the world : Judaism, Isl am , Buddhism, Taoism, H i nduism, Con fucia n i sm , compared with Christianity. I aly 1964-65

332 The Life and Leuers of Paul 2 A biographical study from the m i ;;sionary viewpoint. The sources reluted to his ti me and environment. Lea d i ng concepts discussed in rel a tio n to prese n t da y ap pl i c a ti on in c h u rc h life. Survey of Pauline literature. II aly 1 964-65

CTW

341 American Churc he.� 2 The beginni ngs and doctrines of the ma j o r denominations in Amerie". I

342 Contemporary Christia,';ty 2 Mid-century chal lenges and trends in the Christian church with atten tion to C h r i st i an social thought, communism, ecumenical movements, modern sects, the sc i e n t i fie world-view, and existentialii'm. I I

4 0 1 Romans and Galatians 2 A study of the two most influential Pauline epistles for devotional and doc t r i na l content, i n cluding historical and mo der n - da y application. I a/y 1965·66

4 1 1 Philosophy 01 Religion .3 Se e Philosophy 4 1 1 .

421 History 0 1 Church Mnsic 2 See M uSle 421.

422 Applied Church Music 2 See M u si c 422.

43 1 The Lutheran Confessions 2 A nalysis and history o f the basic t h eol o g i c al documents of the Lutheran Church. I a/y 1965-66

432 The Christian Cla.�sics 2 Readings in the great Chri st ia n l i terature of all ages-devotions, biog raphy, theology, po et ry and

hy m ns ; leetures and d iscussions. II a/y

1964·65

435 The Prophets 2 The role of the p ro p he t s i n Old Testament hi s tory , their theology and revelance to the Church today. I

440 The Book of Ret'elation 2 The history of its i n terpretation, i t s structure a n d place in the New Testament. Leading e scha tol o gi ca l concepts, m i llennialism, the return o f Christ, the resurrection o f the body, the C hri st ian ho p e. 1965-66

497, 498 Individual Study 1·2 Permission of the department is required.

II a/y

1 42

UlT 'R�F

f ir

(

'I H l I.TIOX

SCIENCE (GENERAL) Mr. Ostenson, Mr. Ellin gson major in general science may he obtained hy taking two yea rs' work i n either biolop:y, c h em i s t ry, or pbysics a n d o n e year in each o f t w o otber !'ciences ( h iology, chemistry, g eo l o g y , or phl' i cs ) . 1 2 1 IlIlroduction

I f)

Biological Sciellce <I

A survey c ours e i ne l u d i n g a b r i e f s t u d y o f the p l a n t kinp:dom and o f t h e a n i m a l k i ng d om . Th rec lectu res � nd one l aboratory period per week. I II

122 Inlroduclion

Phy,�ical Sciellce,� 4

A survey cour,e whieh

c on s i d ers the phYi'ical laws of the u n i verse h y

i n te/!rating the sc i en ce s o f astronomy, c h emi st ry , geology, meteorology, oceanography, and physics to st u d y the earth, its material", processes, h i"tory, and e n v i ro n me n t . Tl' ree lectures and one lahoratory

p e r io d

week. I II

1 3 6 De,�criptive Astrollomy 2 Top i cs covered in('. l u de the moon, the sol a r �ystem, coordinate systems for l oeating "tellar objects, characteristics of stars. S

SOCIOLOGY ,'dr. Sch iller, Mr. Knnrr, ,Hr. Mackey, Mr. Thuesen

Soc.iology ,tud ies

the

development,

organization

and

behavior

human

groups. Its I'eneral purpose is to e x p l a i n u n i formities a n d p ro c r,se s o f human social h e ha vi or and the nature and relat ionsh i p s o f institu tions : to h e l p the student to u n derst a n d h i s own a n d oth e r cultures ; to stimulate him to a c r i tical and constructive attitude toward so c i a l chan ges ; and to furnish a sound hasis for in telligent c i t izensh i p . A major in the De p a rt m e nt of Sociology provides t h e proper background for activity in thc foJlow i n p: fi e l ds : ( l ) a dvan ce d research and teaching i n sociol ogy ; ( 2 ) soc ial work, welfare administration, nursing, community organization a n d community planning ; ( 3 ) the pr eac h i n g and teaching m i n i stry, paris.h work and all related rel i giou s aetivities ; ( 4 ) the t e a c hi n g of social studies ; ( 5 ) c r i m i nolop:y, prohation work, correc tional a n d other i nstitutions, race relat ions, i nternational relationships, public admi nistration, law and group lea dersh ip ; ( 6 ) all other areas deali n g i n any way w i t h plural relationships a n d situations. The De p a rt m e n t of Sociology holds membership i n the Council on Social Work Education. Majo r : 27 credit hours, including Sociology 101, 202, 275, 412, 431 and 495, Support i n g cou rses in related areas will b e plan ned with the maj o r adviser to fill the specific needs of each student.

Soci ology 101 or 300 is the prerequisite for a l l other c ou rs e s i n the depart men t.

14 4

( Ol H � ES OI

ST l wrT I O

C a n d i dates for the Bachelor o f Arts i n Education degree who are plann i n � a teaching major i n Sociology should refer to page 6 2 under ACADEMIC

PR EPARATION.

101 Introduction to Sociology ."1

A n inquiry into the basic pri neiples for underst anding social relation ships_ This course is desi�ned to arquaint the . tu dent w i th the funda mental laws gove rn i n g h u ma n relations. Problems o f social structure, social processes and soc-ial motivation will be considered. I II 1 32 Cotllemporary Marriage ProMem., .1

;\ practical exami nat ion o f the basic problems i nvolved in contemporary courtship and m a r r i age. No prerequ isite.

202 Contemporary Social Problem., .1

Problems of delinq uenGY, suici de, c r i me, popul a tion, u n em ployment. public relief, poverty, public welfare, mental deficiency , a n d family disorg a n i zatio n will be among the chief p rob lems under consi deration. I II

275 Group Dynamics .1 The function of social in teraction a n d structure in the development a n d adaptive behavior o f t h e individual ; a n d the effect o f in dividual di ffer ences and personality factors on group i nteraction. I . 300 Pritlciples 0/ Sociology .1

An adv an ce d i n t roductory course stressi ng the major concepts a n d fundamental laws operative i n a l l areas o f social relationships. N o t open to students who have taken 1 0 1 . I I I 3 0 1 Social IJegi..tation 2

Historical a n d critical analysis of social le�islation in Europe and America, with special emphasis u po n the social l e g i s l a t i o n in the Unitl' d States a n d in the State o f Washi ngton. S 308 J "venile Delinquetlcy 3

Fami ly and community backgrou nds ; treatment through i nstitut ions, the juvenile court and proba tion ; programs of prevention. II aly 1965-66 3 1 5 P"bli(, Opinion 2

An analysis of public OpIOlon and propaganda from the point of view of modern social science. S 320 Social Psychology 3

See Psychology 320. 3 2 1 Labor Problem., 3

See Economics 321. 332 Modern Marriage 3

A practical i n q u i ry into the forces i n fluencing modern courtshi p and marriage, with emphasis on human experience rather than statistical presentat ions_ ( No t open to students who have had Sociology 132 ) . II

341 Hace Helalion" .1 A study of r n terra c i al c o n t.acts a n d conflicts, w i t h em p h asi s u p on .'\ mer i r a n rac i a l p r obl e m � . I all' 19M-65 344 C"ltu ral Anlhropolol!y :1 A study o f the u n i fo rm i t i e s a n d variations i n man's eultural de\-elop

nwnt, w i th s p ec i a l em phasis u p o n thc ntiue of this ,tudy for ( ' o n tcll I ( l o rar y so ci e t y . J

355

lIuman Ecology .1

The factor, a n d force� w h i dl d e te r m i ne the d i s t r i b u t i o n o f people a n d i ns t i t u t i o n s i n t i m e a n d i n space.

3 .') 9

Ruri,,,,.

Society .1

Or pnization a n d acti v i t y o f urban a n d rural society w i th sper i fi e re f er ence to the i n te�ra t i o n of t h e i r basic c u l t u ra l i n s t i tu tions i n m e e t i n g the total need" of society ; a n d [he process o f urban-rural interpenetra t i o n . II aly 19M-65

360

lIuman

Migralio" .1

The ('on"i ueration o f major quantitative an d q u al i ta t i ve pr ob lems o f pop u la t i o n an d pop u l at i o n movements i n contem p o rary society. I al l' 1965-66

406

Cr; m i ,,,,lo"y

The n a t u re of the soc i a l problems of c ri m e , the c r i m i n a l law a n d i ts a d m i n i,tra t i o n , a n d th(� p e n a l trea tment of th e c r i m i nal. II aly 1964-65

407

Educatio",,1 Sociology A syst e m a t i c

.'J

view of s i g n i fic a n t soc i o l o g i e a l data an d p ri n c i ples applica

ble to educational pol ieie, a n d "radice,. I I aly 1964-65

412

History 0/ Soci,,1 Thollghl

A n e\·aluation of the for ' es e uw,ing sociolop;ical chanp;e, w i t h some h is torical hackground for

p rese n t day social thought and trencb. I

'�3 1 'fhe Family .1 The c ha n g i n g home :

the study o f the f am i l y a n d fam i l i a l cus t o m s ;

fam i l y i n tera c t i o n and organizati o n ; a na lysis a n d t re a tm e n t of fami l y d isorp;anization a n d reorga n ization. I

435 Intmellletion /0 Social WeI/are .1 A survey course o f t he pr i n c i pl es work,

with needs. I

440

and practices i n t h e total field o f social c o m p re h e n s i ve picture of available services and fu t u re

Introduction 10 Soci"l Work .1

Classroom survey o f basic p r oc esses a n d methods used i n social w o rk a n d p ar ti c i p a n t observation of these processes and methods in agencies and i nstitutions in Tacoma. Perm i s si o n o f the d e p a rtme n t is required. J I

1 46

StlltisticlIl Methods :� See Psychology 44l.

445 Socilll Control ,'J

Analpis o f t h e tech n i q l1(�S a n d processes b y which social changes i n indi, idual and col l ective a < ' l i o n a re effected. I I air 1964·65

450 Contempo rary Socilll Institu tion", .1 The ori gins and developments o f major A merican social instit utions and re](ltI�d i r1>'l i t l l t i onal pattern,. all' 1965·66 4-95 Seminnr 1-3 PUlll i •. sion of the department re quire d.

4·97, 'l98 ImJependent Study 1 , 2 Open to students majoring in sociology. Permission of the department requi red. I

5 1 0 Grculuale I:esellrclt I, ."J Pcrmis,ion of the department i s req u i red.

SPEECH Mr. Karl, Mr. Blissett, Mr. DOll.r;hty, Mr. Nordh o/m, Mr.

Steen, Mr. Utzinger

The req u i rements for the Bachelor of Fine A rt s w i t h a major in d ra m a o r speech arc o u t l i ned uncleI' t h e School of Fine a n d Appl ied A rt s i n t h e section, Academic Organization. C a n d i dates for the B achelor o f Arts degree may complete a major with 24 c re d i t hours i n speech arts, or 27 hours i n drama, or 24 hours i n a combination maJor. Speech major : 24 cred i t hours. R eq uir e d c o u rses : Speech 101, 250, a n d n i n e h o u rs chosen from 1 0 4 , 2 2 0 , 256, 270, o r :l08. A I ! students m a j o r i n g i n the field will parti ci pate i n some phase o f dramatics and forensics. Drama major : 27 I ; 1'edi t hour,. Req u i red cour>, '" Specr:h 1 0 1 , 250, 256, 338, 1 2 hou r,; f m Ill the fol l ow i ng : Spcpch :352 , .3 5.3, ,)56, 357, 358, 383, 384. Selection of courses with the app roval of the major a d \-iser is dependent o n student's i n terest in technical or performing drama. :iSO and

Candidates for the Bachelor of Arts in Educa tion degree who are p la nn i n g teaching major i n Speech should refer to page 62 u n der ACAD EMIC

P R E P A R ATION.

Students with p e rs onal problems i n speech therapy are urc<ed to contact the department for i n dividual assi�tance w i th their speech d i fTiculties. A l i mited number can be serviced.

1 0 1 Fundamentals 0/ Speed• .1 Fou ndation course dea li ng w i th basic elements of the speech situations, i ncluding the visible and audible approaches. Some concentration on content. Extensive platform work. I II

01 I .

104 Fundamental,�

Till enn

147

Speech Structure '1 .

Technique. composition and delivery of speeches for various occasions. Group and i ndividual projects. Major portion i s platform work. Pre· requisit e : Speech 1 0 1 . I II

106 nusine.�.� and Prole,�sional Speech 2 Platform techniques, voice adjustment, speech construction. A p plication made to practical speech situations for pro fessions and busin esses repre· sented i n the class. Platform work predominates. II

182, 282, 382, 482 Forensics 1 One year competition in intercollegiate forensics during the correspond· ing academic year. II

206 Parliamentary Law 2 Study of parliamentary law based UpOI) Ro bert's Rules of Order. Prac· ,tical work dominates. Designed primarily to aid those who do or will belong to organizations. II

233 Logic .'1 See Philo:;ophy 233.

250 Interpretat;"e Reading .'1 An i ntroduction to the art of interpretative reading. Emphasis given to develop ing logical and emotional responsiveness to literature. I II

256 Fundamentals

Acting 3

Training of the actor with emphasis upon movement, emotional recall, and responding to imaginary stimuli. Lecture and performance. I

270 Radio and Television Speaking 3 Microphone and camera techniques, and styles of delivery for radio and television programs. Extensive use of recording and television equip ment. I

308 Extempore Speaking 3 Platform work predominates. Special emphasis given to the study of gathering materia'l, methods of preparation , and delivery. Prereq uisite : Speech 101, 104, or consent of i n structor. I aly 1965·66

338 History

the Theatre .'1

A study of the development o f the theatre from early Greece to Modern America. Attention also given to the an alysis of representative plays. I

3 50 Advanced Interpretative Reading 3 Special projects and class exercises directed toward program planning. Development of skill and communicativeness i n reading aloud. Develop· ment of the art of making literature live. Prerequisite : Speech 250. II

3 52 Stage Scenery 3 The design and execution of scenery and costumes for stage productions,

1 48

r J

TH I . IO

i ncluding the training of stage personnel. Open to speech majors or hy permission o f the department. II a/y 1964-65

353 Stage Lighting 1 .

Theory and practice of stage l ighting a n d makeup. Open to speech maj o rs o r by permission o f the department. II all' 1965-66 354 Costume and Make-Up .1

The design and the making of costumes for stage productions, and the theory and practice o f makeup. Open to speech majors or by permi!;sion o f the department. I I I a/y 1964-65

356 Play Direction 3 Principles of play direction, theory, exerc ises and produc.tion of com plete one-act play. For speech majors or hy permission o f the depart ment. II a/y 1964-65

357 f:n lish Drama .1 ee

English 357.

358 Modern Drama .'1 ee English 358 370 Radio and Television Production 3

D i rection and production of radio and television p rograms with exten sive use o f radio, recording, and television equi pment. Lecture and work � shop. For speech majors or candidates for the Bachelor of Fine Arts degree, by permission of the department. I I a/y 1964-65

383 Shakespeare .1 See English 383.

384 Shakespeare .'1 See English 384. 430 Speech Pathology 3

A study of speech dilnculties, with emphasis on identi fication and cause. L i mited to speech majors or to other persons by permission of the de partment. I

432 Com mu nicative Disorders and Clinical Practice.5 2 Clinical school procedures in speech correction and audiology. Emphasis on diagno,tic and therapeutic t ec h niques of common di<o rders. S 434 Voice Science .'1

The physiological, anatomical and physical basis o f speech and hearing. Prerequ i site : S pee ch 430. I I a/y 1964-65

440i Speech in the Secondary School 2 Curriculum construction, speech p h i losophy for the teacher. Co-curricu lar activity. Administration o f drama, ra dio and forensic activities. Offered on demand.

149

442 Speech

lor

the Clan room Teacher 2

A survey o f speech problems and teacher i n the classroom. 11

opportunities which confront

tht

461 C"ildren'.� Drama Works/lOp 4 The children's workshop will consist of four and one-half weeks of in tensive work in chi ldren's drama. A complete three-act play, or equiva lent, will he produced in that time. The students will be involved in direction, stage management, lighting, and all other phases of produc tion.

462 Sum mer Drama Work.�/lOp 5 The summer drama workshop will consist of four and one-half weeks of intensive work i n drama. Acting, stage management, l ighting instruc tion, and all other phases of production. 5

470 Summer Televi.�ion Workshop 4 A practical

and i n tensive study of the creative and production tech

niques of television programing. This course i s designed for the mature student i nterested in the com mercial, educational, or religious use of television. It will feature extensive use of studio fac i l i t i es and equip ment and w i l l require the direction o f va rious televi>ion progra ms. 5

474 Television anti the Classroom Teacher 2 A course designed to acquuin t the cla:;:;room teacher with in-school tcle vi�ion ; exa m i n ing: television as a meuium ; the c1assroom tcacher'� use of television a s an instructional dtOvic e ; the television teacher's problems in planning p roduetion and pre,en tation of i n-school le,sons.

or I I

497 Special Studies in Speech 1 Individual projects and special outside aeth'i ties under the superVISIOn o f the department. Entrance upon a p p roval of the department.

498 Special Studies in Speech 2 Individual p rojects and special outside activities under the supervision of the department. Entrance upon a p p roval o f the department.

499 Special Studies in Speech :J Individual projects and special outside activities under the supervision of the department. Entrance upon a p p roval o f the department.

527 Research in Speech 1 I n d i vidual projects and special outside activit ies u[1der the supervision of the department. E n trance upon ap proval o f the department.

528 Research in Speech 2 Indivi dual projects and special outside activities under the supervision of the department. Entrance upon approval of the department.

529 Research in Speech .3 Individual projects and special outside activities under the supervision of the department. Entrance upon approval of the department.

151 The Register BOARD OF R EGENTS Represents

Ex-O/licio Dr. S. C. Siefkes, 523 Dexter Avenue North, Seattle, Wash. Dr. Robert Mortvedt, Pacific Lutheran U n iv e rsi ty

ALe PLU

Term expires 196.5 Rev. P h i l i p Engstrom, 1905 Indiana A ve n u e,

P u l l man, Wash. /vI r. Harold E. N d so n, 371H N. :35th Street, Tacoma, Wash. M rs. M il to n Nesse, 24:34 N. Lafa y ett e Street, Bremerton, Wash. D r . Erie Paulson, South 3712 Gandy, S poka n e , Wash. Rev. H. Peder Waldum, 621 S. Main Street, Kalispell, Mont.

LeA LeA ALe A Le A Le

Term expires 1966 Dr. Carl B enn e t t, 3115 West Ca n a l Drive, Kennewick, Wash. D r . Paul Bondo, 1 1 723 E. B i n g ham Avenue, Tacoma, Wash. M r. Earl Eckstrom, 3608 Second Avenue N.W., Seattle, Wash. Rev. Lo w el l Knutson, 1509 24th Strf�et, Everett, Wash. Mr. Einer Knutzen, Burlington, \Vasll. Mr. Ed. A. Morken, Genesee, Idaho Mr. lvin Randall, 665 Winding Way Street East, Salem, O re. Mr. Elmer J. White, 3332 43rd Avenue N.L, Seat t l e , Wa s h.

A LC ALe A LC A l umni A LC A Le LeA LeA

Term expire.• 1967 L A n der�on, 1 6 Forest Glen Lane S.W., Taeoma, Wash. C. Bl'\Jeckner, 1 0390 Canyon Rd. S.W., Beaverton, Ore. . Mr. Donald E. Co rn e ll, 1019 E. Ni nth Street, Port A n g el es, \' ''ash. Dr. A. G. Fjellman, 1823 Terry Avenue, Sea ttl e, 'Va sh. Rev. D a vi d C. Get.7.enda ner, 2324 Lo mba rd Avenue, Evere t t, \Vash. Mrs. J. L. l\Ioilicn, 2137 N.E. S c h u y l er , Po rt l a n d, O r e.

Mr. I·Ierman

Rev. T h eodo re

Alumni ALC A LC

LeA LCA ALC

Regents-at-Large (Terms expire 1967) Mr. Michael Dederer, 1008 Wes t e r n Avenue, Seattle, Wash. Mr. George H. Gallaway, 1469 Bellevue ( Apt. 802 ) , Burlingame, Calif.

Advisory Mem.ber� Rev. I v a r Pi h l , 1 1 2 0 North 1 6 t h S t re e t , Corvallis, Ore. Rev. Karl Ufer, 1503 Ru by S tre e t , P u l l m a n , Wa sh . . . . . .

LCA _

Unjversity Attorney Mr. Fred Hen ricksen, Seeurity Building, Ta c o ma , Wash.

...

ALC

152

Til l R F r. l

CHURCH OFFICIALS Americ."ln Lutheran Church General Dr. Fredrik A . S c h i o tz, President, 422 S. Fifth St., Minneapolis, Minn.

Dr. Norman A. i\'renter, Vice· President, 2200 Evanp;eline a t Ford Road, Dearborn Hei!;hts, Mich. 48127 D r. W i l l i a m Larsen, Secretary, 422 S. Fifth S t., Minneapolis, Minn. Mr. N. Burdette Nel-on, Treasurer, 422 S. Fifth St., M i nneapolis, Minn.

North Pacific Di .• trit:t Dr. S. C. Siefkes, 52.3 Dexter Ave. N., Sea ttle 9, Wash. Rev. Judson L. Cra ry, A d m inistra tive Assistant,

Ave. N., Sea ttle, Wash. L. V. Rieke, C h u rc h Council R e r resentative, 5525 60th Ave. N.E., Scattle 5, Wash. 52.3 Dexter

Dr.

Boanl of College Education Mr. Leonard Haa", 123 Roo,>lwclt

Ave. , Eau

l aire, Wis.

Ir. Harold Holm, 3430 S t r a t ford Ave., Racine, W is. Mr. P a u l Kaurer, 1702 Shad,ford Road, Ann A r bor, Mieh.

R,·\ . H a rold 13. K i l d a l d . 515 W a l d ers Sl.. Minot, N . D. 5870] Re v. Fred Landdeck, 2295 Gloryette, Santa Susana, Cal if. R ev. A. Gordon Nasby, 6644 Oshkosh Ave., Chieap;o, I l l . 60631 Rev. John

N. Pa rb�t, .3 741 17th Ave. S., Min neapolis, ;\Ii n n . 55407

Mr. Edward A . Sap;ebiel, Seguin, Tex. 78155 Judge Hil bert Schauer,

:nl "Meeker St., Fort Morp;an, Colo.

R v. Morris Wee, 333 E. Grant St., Minneapolis, Minn. 55408 Rev. Emil F. Wendt, 1553 Pinyon Ave., Grand J u n c t ion, Colo. Rev. Erling H . Wold, 6263 Carpenter Ave., North Hollywood, Calif.

L utheran Church in Am erica, Pacific Northwest Synod Dr.

A. G. Fj e l l mun, President, 1823 Terry Avenue, Sea ttle, Wash.

Mr. Gordon J . Stoma,li, A,,,istant to the President, 1823 Terry Ave., Seattle,

'Vash. The

Pac i fic N o r thwest Synod of the Lutheran Churc h in America has ac·

cepted Pacific Lutheran Un iversity as one of the institutions of higher educa· tion which it endorses and :;uppo rts. The Synod has representation o n the University's Board o f Regents, but does not share ownership of the inst i tution.

Repre.'> enting Boards of College Education Mr. Norman D. Fintel, Execut ive D i rector, Board of College Education, The American Lutheran Church Dr. Francis

C. Gamel in, Executive Secretary, Board o f College Education &

Church Vocations, Lutheran Church in America

153

ADMIN lSTRATrvE AND OTIl ER OFFICERS 1964-65 P re�i den t

Robert A . L. Mortvedt

A cademic Administration

Aeudcmie Viee-Pre,ident

Ph i l i p E. Hauge Li nka K. .Jo h n"on

Regi�trar Director of Slimmer Se;;sion Dean of th e College of A rts and Sciences Dean of t h e College of Profe",ional and Graduate Studies D i rector of t h e Sehool of Ru"i ne"" A d m i n i o t ra t i on D i rector of t he School of Educat ion D i recto r of t h e School of F i ne and Appl ie d Arts Di rector of the School of Nursing D i rector of Gradua t e Studies

Lynn S. S t e i n E r i c h r. Knorr P h i l i p E. Hauge

D w i g h t J. Zuluuf

Ke n n et h A . Johnston Vernon A . U tzi nger Eline Kraahel Morken T h e o d o r e r. Sj od i ng

D i rector of Tea c he r Placement

A me K. Ped rson Frank 1-1. Haley

L i b ra ria n Busin ess A dminis tration B u si ness Manager

. A. Dean Buchanah Allen P. Lovejny William Campbell Carl G . Faulk Edith Dougherty H. l'vlark Salzman

Assistant Busi ness :\'Illllager Plan t Ianager Manap;er of the Bookstore D irector of Food Service Director of Athletics Dcz'clopm cflt

Vice-President in C harge o f D evelop m en t Public Relations D ir ec t o r

Milton L. Nesvig J. E. D an i elson

D i rector of A dmissions Director o f Alumni Relati ons

Lawrence .I . Hauge Roy E. Ol,on, Richard D. Kunkle Jo n Ohon, J'"11e" Van13cek

Di rec tor of C h u rc h Relu tions

News B u reau Chief A d m issions Cou noclo r:; Swdent Personnel Services Dean of S t u dents

R ichard C. I .angton Margaret D . Wickstrom

Assistant Dean o f Students Assistant to the Dean of Studen ts D i rector of Testing, Veterans' Affairs . . _ .. ._ . . ... _ . ._ Nu rse Physician

._._.

Hou se m ot hers

Clayton B. Peterson Cl ilTord O. Olson

Assoeiate in De,<elopment

Leighland Johnson Leslie O. Eklulldtt

Gladys Bergum Louis Rosenbladt, �tD. . Maria Bitschenauer, Linda D odgen, France Fitzpatrick, Marguerite Laugman, M arie Kraabel , Maria Moe, A l ta Pierson, Agnes S h afhnd

I-Iousefa thers .... ._ ... __ ... .. __....... .. . Jerry Dodgen, A l f Kraabcl, S. M. Moe Swdent Congregation Pastor

t esi g ned, effec tive J a n u a ry 1, 1965. [tRetired as of November 30, 1964.

. . . ._. . . . ..__. .. _..Tohn O. Lar�gaard

ri l l

J. F(, l TEll

FACUl.TY *

1964-65

R O B E R T A. L. MORTVEDT, 1962-

President A.B., 5t. Olaf College, 1924 ; A .M., Ph.D., Harvard University, 1930, 1934 ; L L. D . , Pacific Luth e ran University, A ugustana College, 1961 ; Litt. D., Wagner College, 1962. G E R G E E. DAMS, 1 963Assistant Professor of Mathematics

B.S., United States Military A cad em y, 1934 ; M.S., Purdue University, 1960.

I 1 A R R Y S.

:\TS, 1947·51, 1962·

Asso ciate Professor of Physics

B.S., M.S., Kansas State University, 1945, 1947 ; Ph.D., University of M i n ne · sota, 1 962. ELV I N 'M A RTI N A K R E, 1937· Associate Profcs,wr of History B . A . , ConeonJia College , 1928 ; M.A., University of Washington, 1941 ; fur·

ther graduate study, Uni versity of W ash i n g t o n , University of Oslo, Universi,ty of Oxford.

tCHA RLES DEAN A N D E RSON, 1959. Professor of Chemistry B . A ., St. Olaf College, 1952 ; M.A., Ph.D., H a rv a rd Un iversity, 1954, 1959. GEOHGE E

ANS A R B A UGH, 1959·

Associate Professor of Philosophy

B.A., Augustana College, 1955 ; M. A., Ph.D., State University of Iowa, 1958, 1959. A B E J. BASSETT, 1964· Assista n t Professor of Speech B.A., Bowling Gr ee n S t a te U n iversity, 1952 ; M.A., Ph.D ., Ohio State U n ivcr· ,ity, 1956, 1962. G R A C E ELEA N O R BLOMQUIST, 1939Associate Professor of English.

B.A., Concordia College, 1934 ; M.A., Syracuse University, 1 939 ; further g ra d uate study, University of Mi n n eso t a , Goethe University. ROY E. C A R LSON, 1962Assistant Professor of Physical Education, Coach of Football and Baseball

B.S., U n i v e rsi ty of Washington, 1 948 ; M.S., Washington State University, 1962. * Da tc after name i n d icates beginning of the te rm of service. tOn l ea ve , 1964·65.

GEORGAN

A. CHASE, 1964路

Instm rtor in Nu rs ing

B.S.

., M.S.

lll"sing Ed., U n i v e r禄ity of Or ego n , 1955, 1959.

KEN ETH EUGENE C H R I STOPHERSON , 1958路 A ss;:;tant

Professo r

Ilf R e ligion

B.A., A ug ust u n a College, 1 946 ; B.Th. , Luther Theological Semin ary, 1 9S0 ; graduate study, U n i versity of Oslo, U n i vers i t y of Minnesota.

LOWELL U L TER, 1 964路 Assistant Professor 0/ Po lit i ca l Science B.A., San D i eg o Sta te College, 195 4 ; M.A., U niversity of California, 19 S7 . C

R ROL ELVI ! D E BO W E , 1964Ass ista nt Professor of Education

n.s., Midland Coll"gc, 1 % 2 ; M.Ed., D.Ed., U niversity of N eb ra ska , 1959, 1964. JUDD C. DO

GHTY, 1962-

Instmctar in Speech and Assistant in Radio an d Television

B .A . , M .

. , Paeific Lutb c'ran Un iversity, 1955, 1 964.

GAIL DURHA [, 1964-

Illstruetor in French A.B., W i l l u mette U n iversity, 1963 : 1\1. A. , M iddle b u ry Collf'ge, 1964. HA ROLD F. E HR ET , 1963Instructor in Mathematics n. " Iv I.A ., Montana Stat University, 1 95 1 , 1953.

F.l'vThff iT E. EKL N D , 1964Asso ciate Professor of Religion B . A . , Bethany College, 194 1 ; B.D., A u g u s ta n a Se m i na ry , 1945 ; M.A., of C licago, 1958 ; Ph.D., Boston University, 1 964.

ni ,ocr, i t r

J CK A t T O N ELLlNGSO , 196.1' Instmetor ,:0. Geology and General 'science B.S., M.S., . B.A., B. A. E d., Un iversi ty of Washington, 1958, 1959, 1961. GEORGE ROB ERT ELWELL, 1959Assistant Profess or 0/ A rt

B.A., You ng st o w n University, 1 949 ; M.A., New Yo rk

niversily, 1955.

DO ALD R AYMO D FA R M E R , 1955Professor of PoUtical Science B.

Ed., Ph.D.,

M . JOSEPHIN E

niversity of Min nesota, 1944, 1954.

F LETCHER ,

1963-

in.<lructo( in Nursinfi

B.S.N.,

R. BY

orth Park

FRI TT S,

Coll ege,

1960 ; M.S.,

De Pa ul

University, 1963.

1949-

Associate Pr o fess o r of Music B.M., Wittenberg College, 1948 ; M.Mus., A.Mus.D., Eastman School o f

U n i v ersi t y of Rochester, 1949, 1958.

tusic,

EMM

S. FU LLILOVE, 1964·

inslrllclnr in

ursing

n.S. Co lumbia U n iversity, 1960;

tN., U niversity of Washington, 1962.

EARL B. GERHEIM, 1962· Professor

Biology

B.A., 1 . . , Un iversity of New Mexico, 1941, 1947 ; P h . D . , University of N o r th Carol i na, 1949. WILLIAM P. GIDDINGS, 1 962·

Assistant Professor of Chem istry B.A., DePauw U n iversity, 1954 ; ]'I'L A., Ph.D., Harvard Un iversity, 1956, 1959. GORDON O L I V E R GILBERTSON , 19.54·

Associate Profe.,sor of Music B.A., Concordia College, 1937 · M.M., No rt h we stern U niversity, 1 942 ; further graduate study, U n iversity of Colorado, Uni versity of Washin!,:!on.

W A YNE M. G I L D S f:TH, 1964· A ssis tan t Professor oi Chemistry ll.A., ugu,tana Co l l ege ( So l l t h Thkotn ) , 1957; Ph.D., Iowa State Un ive r· sity, 1964. *STf:WART D. GOVIG, 1958·60, 1961 Assistant Professor of Religion B.A., SI. Olaf College, 1948 :

B.Th., Luther Theological S e m i n a ry , 1%2 : M.Th., Princeton Theological S em i n a ry , 1954 ; further !,:raduate study, U ni · versity of Oslo.

ROGER K . G

I LFORD, 1962·

Instructor in Biology ll. ., YI.Ed., U n i ve rs i t y of California, 1952, 1 957 ; M.S., Ore go n State Univer· sity, 1 9 62 .

A R NOLD J A S PEH HAGEN, 1 9 55 ·

A.,sociate Professor of Education B.A., Concord ia College, 1 93 1 ; !'I-L Ed. , U n i versi t y of M o nta n a , 1 941 ; D.Ed. , U niversity o f O re g on, 1955.

PHILIP ENO

HAU GE, 1920·

Professor of Education, A cademic Vice President, Dean of the College of Pro· fessional and Graduate Studies

B . A., St. Ol af College, 192 0 ; M.A., Ph.D., University o f Wash i ngton, 1924, 1942 ; LL.D., Pacific L u t h e r a n U niversity, 1960. J O H N GREIBROK HELGESON, 1 963· I nst ru.ctor in Religion

B.A., Concordia College , 1950 ; B.Th., Lu t he r Theolo�ica[ S em in ar y , 1954 ; further graduate study, University of Edinburgh. tMARTHA S. H U"BERT, 1959·6 1 , 1962· Instructor in Business A dministration

B.S., Mississippi State College for Women, 1943 ; gradu a te study, Pacific Lu th eran University. *On leave, 1961·65. tResigned, effec t i ve December 31, 1964.

T i l l r r 1. 1 TEH

1 57

MA RTIN E. HlLLGER, 1962· Assistant Professor of English

B.A., Valparaiso Un iversity, 1948 ; Ph.D., Indiana University, 1959.

M.A., Northwestern University, 1949 ;

B RANTON K. HOLMBERG, 1964· Instructor in Psychology

B . S., M.S., Central Washington State College, 1 962, 1964. PHY LLIS B . HOLUM, lY64· I nstruetor in English

B . . , Washington State Un iversity, 196 3 ; M.A., University of l'vriehigan, 1964. C U R TIS E. HUBER, 1964· Associa te Professor of Ph ilosophy

B. A ., B.D., Concordia Seminary, 1950, 1953 ; M.A., Ph.D., U n iversity o f \V is· ('onsin, 1958, 1962. LAURENCE D. HUESTIS, 1961· Assistant Professor of Chemistry

B.S., Ph.D., University of California, 1956, 1960. LUCILLE M A R GU ERITE J O HNSON, 1953· Associate, Professor of English

B.A., Concordia College, 1940 ; rvLA., Washington S tate Un iversity, 194.3 ; further graduate study, University of Colorado, U n iversity of Washington, University of Oslo, Montana State University. KENNETH A. JOHNSTON, 1964· Professor of Education, Director of the School of Education

B.A., Western Wa>ib ington State College, 1947 ; 1953 ; D.Ed., Washington State University, 1 964.

H l .A., Stanford Univen;ity,

ALBERT HUGH JONES. 1964· Assistant Professor of Educa tion

B.S., ilI.A., Ohio State University, 1951, 1955 ; Further graduate study, Ohio State Univer'sity. OLAF MELVIN J O R DAHL, 1940· Professor of Physics

A. B., Luther College, 1925 ; M.S., University of Pittsburgh, 1927 ; Ph.D., Un iversity of Wisconsin, 1933. THEODORE OSCAR HENRY KARL, 1940-42, 1948· Professor of Speech

B.A., M.A., Gustavus Adolphus College, 1934, 1936 ; further graduate study, University of Southern California, Stanford University. GUNDAR JULIAN KING, 1960· Associa te Professor of Bu siness A dministration

B.B.A., University of Oregon, 1956 ; M.B.A., Ph.D., Stanford University, 1958, 1963.

LA R S EVERETT KITTLESON, 1956Assistant Professo r o f A rt B.S., Un iversity o f Wisconsin in Milwaukee, 1 95 0 ; M.S., U niversity of Wis con�in, 1 951 ; V J LF.A., University of Southern CalifGrnia, 1955.

RA Y�mND A . KLOPSCH, 1953Associate Professur of English

B.S ., Illi nois Institute of Technology, 1949 ; M.A . , Ph.D., Univer,ity of Illinois, 1950, 1 962.

CALVI I H. K A PP, 1 9 60Instmctor in Music I3.S., M.S., .! u i l l i a r d School of Music, 1949, 1950 ; graduate study, Columbia U n iversity, Pacific Lutheran University, U n i ver,ity o f Puget Sound. ERICH C A R L K OR R, 1949Professor of Sociology, Dean of the College of Arts and Sciences Graduate, SI. Paul Luther ollege, 1921 ; Cando TheoJ., SI. Paul Luther Sem inary, 1924 ; B.A . , M.A., Washington State Uni versity, 1929, 1930 ; Ph.D., niversity of Washington, 1946. "'J EN S WER

ER KNUDSE

, 1957-

Associate Professor of Biology fl. A., Pacific Lutheran niversity, 1952 ; M.S., Ph.D., University o f Southern Californi a, 1 95<+, 1957.

Ai l E ELISE KNUDSON, 1946Associate Professor of English B.A., A ugustana College, 1928 ;

M.A., Washington State University, 1936 ;

further graduate study, n i Ye rsi ty of Wasbington, Washington State Un iver sity, Uni" ersity of Cali forn ia, University of London. RlCHA RD C. L A GTON, 1964Associate Professor of Educatio n, Dean of Stu dents

B . . , P c i fic Lu t h e ran Universi ty, 194 7 ; ing to n, 1949, 1950. C

ROLY

LA U RSEN, 1 9 64-

Instru ctor in

M.A., Ph.D., Ulliver"ity of \Va,l1-

'ursing

, Pacific Lutheran U n i ,'ersity, 1959 ; graduate study, U ni\'er�ity of WH,h

ington. ELSA H. L '.H MAN, 1964Associate Professo r of Nursing B.S., "olu muia

niversity, 1953 ; graduate study, Boston Univeriiity.

HAROLD J. LERA AS, 1935-42, 1947Professor of Biology A.B., Luther College, 1930 ; M.S., Ph.D., D.D.S., U n i versity of Michigan, 1932, 1935, 1946. OTTI L I E ELISE LITTLE, 1946-51, 1952Professor of German A.B., Uni versity of I l linois, 1923 ; }.ItA., Uni versity of Washington, 1926 ; Ph.D., Hanseatic University, Hamburg, Germany, 1937. ·On leave, 1964-65.

TIlE I f' ,1ST n

159

GENE C A R R O L L LUNDGAARD, 1958Instmetor in Ph ysi cal EdlLcation, Coach of Basketball B.A., Ed., Paci fic Lutheran Unh'ersity, 1951 ; M.S., U nive rsi t y of Washington, 1964. HAROLD FRANK MACKEY, 1963Assistant Professor of Sociology A.B., Hope College, 1943 ; B.D., Garrett B i blical graduate study, Washingt on State University.

fnstitute,

1946 ;

further

GUNNAR J O H A N N E S MALl\HN, 19:37Professor of Latin and Norwegian B.A., Luther College, 1923 ; B.M_, St. Olaf College, 1925 ; M.Mus., U n iversity of Michigan, 1 940 ; further graduate study, U niversity of Southern California, University of Oslo. M A RJORIE I RE N E MATHERS, 1964路 A ssista nt Professor of Edl,cation B.A. i n Ed., M.A., Central Washington State College, 1953, 196 1 . E L I N E K R A A B E L M O R K E N , 1953Associate Professor of Nursing, Director of the School of Nursing B.A., S t . Olaf College, 1928 ; R.N., Emanuel Hospital School

of Nursi ng,

1931 ; M.N., University o f Washington , 1962. ALICE J A M ES N A PJUS, 1963Instructor in EdllCiltion B.A., U n iversity of Washington, 1956. M I LTON LUTHER N ESVIG, 1947-5 1 , 1953Assistant Professor of English ; Director of Public Relations Graduate, Pacific Lutheran Un iversity, 1935 ; B . A . , St. Olaf College, 193 7 ; Cando Theo!., Luther Theological Seminary, 1 942 ; M.A., Un iversity o f Minne颅 sota", 1947. FREDE R I CK LAURENCE NEWNHAM, 1950Associate Professor of Music Graduate, Royal Academy of MlI ' i e , London, 1925 ; Teacher's Training Certif路 icate, U n iven;ity of London, 1925 ; A,sociate , Royal College of Music, Lim 颅 don, 1928 ; Licentiate, Associate, Fellow, Royal Academy of Music, London, 1929, 1934, 1962. DALE F. NIELSEN, 1962Instructor in Psychology B.A., Pacific Lutheran University, 1959 ;

Jl,tA., Montana State University,

1962. DONNA ;\OI AE NIELSEN, 1962Instmetor in NlLrsing B.S., Montana State College, 1959 ; graduate study, Montana State College. E RIC NORDHOLM, 1955Assistant Professor of Speech B.F.A., Art Institute o f Chicago, 1951 ; graduate study, Indiana University.

160

Ti l l

1'1

( , ISTEI'

PffiLIP A. N O RD Q UIST, 1963· A ssis ta n t Professur of History B.A., Pacific Lutheran University, 1956 ; M . A . , Ph.D., Univer ity of Washing· ton, 1963, 1964. ROBERT C A R L OLSEN, 1947· Professor of Chemistry B.S., Ph.D., M i c higan State Unil'ersit)', 1931, 1936. B U RTON THOMAS OSTENSON, 1947· Professor of Biology B. " Luther College, 1932 ; ]\1.S., Ph.D., University of Michigan, 1934, 1947. RONALD L. PATTIE, 1964· I nstTll ctor in Biology B.A., Concordia College, 1955 ; M.A., Montana State College, 1960. DOROTHY KATHERINE PAYNE, 1959Instructor in Music B. M us., Eastman School of Music, University of Rochester, 1956 ; graduate study, E ast m an School o f Music, Vienna Music Academy. A R N E KEN N ET H PEDERSON, 1956Assistant Professor of Education ; Director of Teac h e r Placemen t B . A . Ed., H.Ed., M:A. , Pa c i fic Lutheran University, 1949, 1953, 1956 ; further graduate study, University -of Washington. CHARLES A RTHUR PETERSO . , 1959· Associate Professor of Bus i n ess A dministration B.S., Kansas State Teachers College, 1 95 1 ; M.S., Univ e rsi ty of Tennessee, 1952 ; further graduate study, U n i versi ty of M i nn esota. ROBERT EUGENE PI ERSON, 1959Associate Professo r of Econom ics

B.A., St. Olaf College, 1952 ; M.A., Northwestern University, 1954 ; further graduate study, Northwestern University. ])

E ANN POULSEN, 1963· Instructor in Health and Physical Education B.A., Pacific Lutheran University, 1962.

HOW A R D W. PURVIS, 1963· Instructor in G e rm an B . . Lewis & Clark College , 1958 ; M.A., University of Washington, 1962. H1:RBERT R O B E RT RA NSON, 1940· Professor of English B.A., M.A., Uni versi ty of Kansas, 1924, 1926 ; Ph . D., University of Washing ton, 1936. PAUL MATTHEW REIGST AD, 1 947-48, 1958· Associate Profe.lsor of English B. A., St. Olaf College, 1943 ; M.A., Ph.D., University of New Mexico, 1956, 1958.

"' r t I

II I ( , I 'f F. H

161

K A R L P H I L I P R EITZ, 1963Instructor in Mathematics B.S., Pacific Lutheran U n i ver si t y, 1961 ; M.A., U n iversity of Oreg on , 1 96.1.

DONALD L. REYNOLDS, J R., 1 96 1 Instru ctor in English B . A . , Washington State University, 1 95 1 ;

M.A., University of Washington,

I 95f). PETER JOHN RISTUBEN, 1 960Associate Professor of /Iistory and Political Science B . A . , Conco rd i a Coll ege, 1955 ; M . A . , Univ er s i t y of Sou th Dakota, 1 95 7 ; Ph . D ., Univer.< ity o f Oklahoma, 1964.

K EL M E R N ELSON R O E, 1947Associate Professor of R e ligion, Greek B.A., L u th er College, 1925 ; B.Th., Luther Theological S eminar y , 1928 ; M.Th.,

Princeton Theological Sem inary, 1929. GEORGE ROSKOS, 1950As.weiat e Professor of A rt

B.S. A rt Ed., Youngstown Co lleg e, 1949 ; M.A., Iowa U ni ver s it y , 1950. J U N E E. R U T H, 1964Instruclor iT! Narsing

B.S., l\.! .5.,

Un h'er,ity of Colorado, 1 9 6 4 , 1964·.

H. ", [ A R K SALZM A N , 1 9 5 1Associate P rofessor of Ph ysica l Edu cation, A thletic Director, Coach of Track

B. " Carthage College, 1947 ; M.A., U niversity of Iowa, 1951 .

L. S C H A M B E RGER, 1964-

M E L VI

Instru c t o r in Biology

13.5.

State J O l lA

in Ed., Northern I l l i n o i� Univer,ity, 1962 ; M.S. to be c on f err ed , O r e�on n iver;;i ty, 1965.

ES A U G U S T S C HI LLER, 1958-

Assistant Professor of Sociology B.

. , Capi tal University, 1 9 4 5 ; Cando Theo!., E vang el ical Lutheran Theolog ical Seminary, 1947 ; M.A., n i v er si t y of K a n sas , 1959 ; further p;raduatc study, Un iversity of Washington.

WALTER C H A R LE S SCHNACKENBERG, 1942-44, 1952Professor of !-listory

Graduate, Pacific Luthera n University 193 7 ; B . A . , St. O l a f Co l le g e, 1939 ; M.A., Gonzaga University, 1947 ; Ph.D., Wash ington State Un iversity, 1950. THEODORE

.AROL 5JOD1 G, 1951of Edlleation, Director of Graduate Studies B.A., U n i v ers ity of Saskatchewan, 1933 ; l\t A . , Ph.D., University of Min ne

Professor

sota, 1944, 1951. M A U RICE H. S KO N E S , 1964A ssociate Professor of Music, Director of Choral Music B.A., Concordia C oll eg e, 1948 ;

M.M.Ed., Mo n tan a State U n ive rsi ty, 1957 ; further graduate study University of A rizona and Un iversity of Washington.

T H F HI (. 1 TEn

CARL D. P CLER, 1961-62, 196.3ssistant P ro fes $ o r oj S pa nis h a n d French A . B., Grove C i ty College, 1958 ; M.A., Pennsylvania State University, 1959 ; fur t her graduate study, Pennsylvania State Un iversity. PAUL J. ST ', EN, 1960Assistant Prof ess o r of Speech B• . , Pacific Lutheran University, 1 95 4 ; M.S., Syracuse University, 1957.

L Y_ ' N S. STEI:'-l , 1961I.ssociate Professor of EdllClltiun, f)irectlJr of Sllmmer Session. B. ., orth Dakota late Tea c h ers College, 1937 ; M.A., Montana Siale Uni· vcr i t y, 1 952 ; Ed. D. , Montana State College, 1 961. VE Ri O N L.

TINTZI, 1 964-

ilssista n t Professor

of Bllsiness

/I dmin istration

R A., Coe Coll ege. 193i: M.RA., Arizona State University, 1964.

THEODORE JOHANNE lrzstructor

E EN, 1963·

in Sociology

B. . , A ugustana College, Ill ino is, 1949 ; M.A., State Un iversity of Iowa. 19:;5 ; C.Th., Grand View Seminary, 1956 ; further g ra d u a te study, Cniversity of Oreg:on. D ROTHY M I LDR E D TOLLEFSON, 196 1 -

A ssis tan t Profes$or o f N u rsing B.S. in N., . E d . , University of Minnesota, 1956, 1959. .! A lY ET

LLE L A N D L A B ES, 1962·

Instructor in. Nursing

B.S., Pacific L u t her a n University, 1959 ; M.S., Un iversity of Oregon, 1963. VERNON ALF RED UTZI NGER, 1950-5.3, 1957Professor of S p eech , Director of the School of Fine and Applied Arts B.A., North Ce ntr al College, 1922 ; M.A., Northwestern Un iversity, 1929 ; Ph.D., University of Southern California, 1952. PA UL G. V I G N ESS, 1956-

Assoc,iate Professor of Religi on and History B.A., SI. Olaf College, 1 9 1 8 ; M.A., Ph . D . , Stanford University, 1 924, 1930.

M RGARET D. WICKSTROM, 1 951-

Ass ista n t Pr ofesso r of Religion, Assistant Dean of Students A.B., Augustana College, 1937 ; M . R. E ., The Biblical S em i n ary of New York, 1951. JANE WILLIAMSO N, 1964-

Associate Professor of Education B.S. in Ed., U n iversity of M a ry la n d , 1943; M.A., New Yo rk University, 1947; Ed. D., Colorado State College, 1959. S

N T. WI NTHER, 1 960-62, 1964Assistant Professor of Psych olo gy B. ., Pac i fic Lutheran University, 1958; M.S., Ph.D., University o f Or ego n , 1960, 1964.

RHODA HOKEN TAD YOU

G, 1938·42, 1943·

Assi.l lllTll Professor of Physical Education

Graduate, Pac i fic Lutheran Univerf'ity, 1935 ; B . A . , M.S., University of Wash· i n g t o n , 1 9:17, 1956. D\VIGTTT J U D S O N Z U L A

F, 1949·53, 1'.159·

ASSO r-ill le Professor of Business Adminislration,

Director o f t h e

chool 0/ Busi·

ness A d ministra li(lll

B.S., U n i versity of Oregon , 1948 ; M.S., C o l u m b i a gradua t ' "tudy, U n i versity of Wa,hington, n i versit �rin ncsota.

As�j"l n n IS, A SOl'jol A

n i versity, 1949 : further

of Oregon, U n iver,ity of

and Lect urers

DREY B ETT S B.A., Puc i fic Lutheran U n i ver8ity.

ssistant in Mu"ic .

H. TED BOTTIGER B . A . , U n iw� r s i t y of Pu"et Soun d : I ,Ln . , Univ ersity of Wa<bi ngton.

Assist a n t i n BU';iinC!;:o A u m i n ist rat ion. H A R O L D S. E:\ S T M A N

A . B . , U n i ve n. i ty o f Puget So u n d : M.B.A., Stanford university, As,i,;ta n t

III

E(·onomi( '�. C A T H .RT E LLLIOTT University of Washi ngton, Cen tra l Wash ington State Cnllege.

Assist a n t i n

" � [usic- . YDN£Y ENGE E1' B . . A., M.F.A., n i ver"ity of Washin gton. A s i s t a n t i ll Art. ROLF E P r: S I�T I l

B , U . . Concordia C o l l ege .M.D.,

( Moorbeau ) ; M. 1 . , Ea stm an Sehool of Musie ; ni on Tlwological S e m i nary School of Sacred Mu,;ic. A ", i s t a n t in

[ u ,k . ROB E R T E . H A R RI N G TON B.S., U n i \'crsity o f U ta h . As" istant in B u s i n e"s A d m i n istra t i o n ,

DON A L D A. J A E . 1 [ C K I-: B.A., Uni vcr,ity o f Puget SOllnd. As,ista nl i n fiu,iness A d m i n i s t ra t ion. l\I AUG H.E'!' A . K E fiLBEK B.A. , Wc"u,rn Wash i ngton Col lege of Education ; �t.A. C o lle�e o f E ducatio n. ..islant in Education.

MYHTL' C. i\[ucLE

Ce ntra l Washington

B.A., U n ivers i t y of Puget Sound ; M.A., Columbia University ; furt her gradu· ate study, Pennsvlvania State niversity. A o i sta nt i n Educatio n. JOII �'fED IS B . . , Jel "uvu Teachers College. Latvia ; o l o g i c a l Seminary. A ss i s t a n t in Russi an.

B.D.,

North western L u the r an The·

E R A I .D E . SC HIMKE B.A ., Pacific L ut h era n Universi ty ; Admin istration.

M.B.A., H ar va r d. Assistant i n Business

164

ROB E RT E. SCH M I D B.A., U n i versity of Puget Sound. A,sistant in General E n g ineering. K ATHA R I N E R. SEGER B.S., U n iv e rs ity o f :'iebraska. Assistant in n u , j ness A dministration.

S .I . SO ZA

B.S., M.5., S p r i n gfi el d Col lege. Assistant in Health a n d Ph ys i c a l Educ a t i o n . R O B E R T W. STEVENSO A . B., Stanford Un iver"i t y ; M.B.A., Un iversity of Pennsylva nia, W h arto n School o f Commerce. A ". s i s tan t in BW'incs,; A d m i n istration.

K. TREMAI I E

B . . 1usic, U n iversity of Oregon. Assistant in Music. L i brary FRA N K H A M I LTO l I A LEY, 1 95 1 · Lihrarian B . A . , Wi llame t te Un iversity, 1 935 ;

B . D . , Drew

Universit y , 1945 ;

A.B.I...S.,

U n i versity of Washington, 1950. A I .VIN D A V I D T H I ESSE:'I, 1964· Humanities [,ibrarian and Chief of Refere n ce Services

A . B . , U n ivprs i t y of S,,,katch ew<ln, 1 92 7 ; A.lI·L, Univ·ersity of Toronto, 1 928 : A . B. , St. Ca theri ne's College, Oxford U n iversity, 1 93 1 : A . M . L.S., University o f M i c h igan, 1949.

TIHOH. BA RTEKY, 1963 Social Seien ees Librarian

;l.LL.S.,

ni versi ty of So ut hern Californ ia, 1961 ; Ph.D., Law, Ph.D., Po l i t ic a l

Science, 1948, 1 9 5 1 , Pazmany University, Budapest.

i\H RTAM R T I l B E C KM A N , 19M· Circull/ tion Libraril/n

B.A., U n iv e r si t y of l'lIget Sou n d , 1928 ; M.A. , Bosto n U n i ver"ity, 1933 ; M.Lihr., U niversity of Wash in g t o n , 1 964.

Emeriti MAGN

S NO D TV ED T , 1947, Professor Emeritus of History, 1 963

B . A . , S t . Olaf College, 1 9 1 7 ; A .M., Columbia University, 1920 ; B.Th., Luther Theological Seminary, 1925 ; Th.M., Princeton Theological Semi n a ry, 1 928 ; Ph.D., U n i " e rs ity o f C h i cago, 1950.

A N D E R S WILLTA M RAMSTAD, 1 92 5 , Profess or Emeritus of Chem istry, 1 9 6 1 B . A ., St. Olaf C ol leg e , 1 9 1 4 ; Cando Theo!., Luther T heologi cal S e m i n a ry , 1 9 1 f1 ; M.S., U n i versity of W ashi n gto n , 1936 ; further gr a d u at e study, Un iver· ,ity of Washington ; L . H . D . , Luther College, 1960. GEO R E N E A U , 1 933, Professor Em eritu-s of Sociology, t952

Ph. B . , Ph.M., U n ive rsi t y of C hi cago, 1900, 1910 JOSEF E M IL R U N N I N G, 1948, Assistant Professor Emeritus of Math e m a tics,

1 961 B.A., Sl. Olaf College, 191 6 ; M.A., U niversity of M i n n e so ta , 1941.

FACULTY COMMITTEES 1 9 64- 1 9 65

T h e first·named m e m b er of e ac h com m i ttee is the c h a i rmun. The P resident is an advisory member of all c o m m i t tec>,. COiVL'HTTEE ON CO l\HvIITTEES : J o rd ah l , G i l bert'on, ]{eigstad.

A ]{ T I S T S E R I E S : Gil bertson, Klop-ch, Steen. A d v i s o r y Ill e ll l b e r s : S k o ne', Utzinger. ATHLET I C : A . P e de r,o n , Mackey, E l l i ngso n . A d visory m e mbers : Karl, Sa lzma n.

CU L TY WELFA RE : Hagen, Youn!':, O.-ten<on.

F1N A N \ . l A L ASSISTA, T C E : Pi e rson, Fa rmer, Newnham. A d v i-o ry lIlend,,-r,, : B u c hanan, D a n i ebon.

LECTURE S E R I E S : ScllI1uehnberg, Ba rteky, H il l ger. R E LI G I O U S ACTIVITI ES :

K na pp , S c h i l ler, Oben. A dv i so ry members :

L a r s·

gaard, Roe.

SO CI A L : Po u l se n , Tol l ef-on, E h re t . Advisory m em b er : Dougherty. STA N D A RD S : RUf;t iben, G u ilford, U tzi ng e ." members: La n gto n, \Vic k st r o m .

A. Knudson, G . A d a m s. A dvi sor y

S T U D I': N T A C T I \ ' I T I I·:S A N D W E L F A R E : G e r l lC i m , K i t t "'"o n , Pay.H'. A,hi-o r y mcmbe rs : \Vi c b t rom, Langton, A D M I SS I O N S : H. Ada m>', J::lwel l , Nordquist. Adviso ry members : Hauge, Knorr. COMMITTEE TO

PROMOTI� G R A D

ATE S T U Dl J:: S :

L e ma s,

Dan ielso n ,

Eklund,

Kin g. Advisory member, : Sj od i nlf, Knorr, Hauge.

S te i n ,

E D U CATI O N A L POLI CI ES : A rb a u g h , Ra n ,o n, Ki n g , L.

Christopbehon,

Giddings. Advisory member,;: Hauge, Knorr. U I 1 B A H Y : I -1 u ""ti"

L J O I I I I'OI1, A r baugh. Ach'i,ory 1 1 I(;rn bcr,; : Hagen, I l : 1 I ey,

P U B L I C A T I O N S : Reigstad, S pa n gl er, U tz i ng e r, A dv i 'o ry InJ'mi",!''; : Hauge, Knorr, Nesvig. S 1' I ; I J I'; \ T A C A D I::lIU C STAT U S : S a l " . l I a l l , Sll' i l l , Jorda h l .

A,h i -o l )' lIH'rnb,-!'"

Buchanan, Hauge, Knorr, Wickstrom, Langton.

Alumni Association ] 964-65

President

Sec r et ary

. C a rl T. Fy n b o e

Donald E.

Vice· President .

Stranci l1e,;s

L a wr e nc e J. Hauge

f n J. Trn

Gl'°aduates 1964 Bachelor of Arts Owcn

K u r t Aben"r hr"ns

Geo rge He nry

.Tohn Edw i n A n c irT'OIl

Audrt'" Kurr'n A n"t Laura A. u by Donald Steph e n Ha ile" B a r l , , , ra H<'I" I I Rauer C('.nrgc M,'" i n B e a rd Darrell V idor fkddu(' D a\ i d M ic hael Hoe T i l l l o t h y A l a n Bro\\-ning Da,id L. Carl"on B i l l Kcyc,; ( : h a p llI:ln, .J r. D a rwin E a rl C h r istensen

David M itchell Lang

Arlo Joel Larson I-Ioward o rman Larson .Iame� Edward I . a rso n Ingrid Maria Lein (Ictus Vincent Lynch, J r. Mich ael TI nnter 1\'[clntyre Jerrold Jackson 'l erc:hant Loeda Thelmu Meyer Orlin James Mon;;on A. George ace III Carolyn Lt!e elson .l eanne Carol

"den

William Herbert O:;ness

James Allan Cra b t ree

H u ghey Orsborn Parrish

Stella Jea n C U l l l m i ngs

Judith Lenore Pecier<,oll

G e ra l d Alex D i t t rich '

Gary D. Plews [arion Joanne Rasmussen John lark Ricke Elaine Louise Rolm; o n , i l l iam Rodney Rosenbladt .An n Lou ise Schnackenberg Lloyd Fredrick Schneider Ba r bara Ellen Sellar Dan Jakobsen Sel mann nn Chri;;tic Soine B ri d get Moria Smiley Anita Stiebrs Gary Lee Sund Gerald D. Su n db y K ith M hin Swcwon Reggy Bruc Swenson aney Irene Thompso n Marion F. Tidwell J am e� Victo r Trangsrud Paul orman Urlie Denise Ann vunKonynenburg Peter He n r y v a n Konynenhllrg Stanley Ra l ph Wa rner Doris Caro l W i l l iams Phil l i p Andrew Yokers

Kenneth Ja me, Edmoncis

Olav Si nlOll Engen Jar·k Wap1(: Est"" Gerald Wil b u r Farllll'l' I-h i l l .' S t a , i g Tllt'odo lf" flna n

Leslic Edward Fo,., Sha l o n Mae fry" P h i l l i p G e o rge Go l d b ec k

l.'rieda B e t h G r i l ll sm d A n d rea Radwl

I Ia g.' n

E m i l y Margr!'th,: Ha l l a n

Theuna farie I Ta"lc" Palll Mcl d a h l H " p:,t; d Alexia A. Hende r,on Larry Joe I I i t t e rdalc K ri , t i n La\'erne 1I0ef" Co n m d Lloyd Honge Robert c i l H u sted Jo a n ne Rae J cn5en Sheila Kay Jensen Judith LYI ne Johnson Denton Roger K e " David Rtlymon'd Kni efcl Marguerite Elaine Korsmo Arthur Eugene Lang

167

Bachelor of Science .r ohn "Edward B ra n n f or s

Gerald Louis La rson

Hoy Kenneth Carlson

Cyrus !ll ichael M c N eely

Edward '.a rl Davis

Jon Erling Malmin

David Eric Eyuns

Robert F rank l i n Meade A r v i n Neil M eyer

Mark Samup.1 Follett

'lu n·in Dale Fredrichon

A n thon

1\'1. Reynolds

Charlc� rrcdcrir.k Ha mma rgr en

Nathan Paul St i m e

J )pnnis Dale Howard

EngSik Tang

Donald Carl .r ordan

Christopher Simon Tarimo

Gary David Lange

LOllis Carl Wagner, J r.

Ba(:helor of Scknce i n M dical T

h nology

Connye Louis" Idstrom

Norine Kay Radovich

Joyce Ca rol e L a rso n

Veena Vasi shth

Mary J osep hi n e NeI,on

Bachelor of Ih .. iness Administration John A n ton Baker

Jerry Edward Lubking

Lynn Hoss Berg

James Edward Ma rt in

Mi('hael Georg" nrewick

Pe t e r Hanford M a rti n

Gary Re y nol d Condray

Calvin Jess Pulis

Dennis LeRoy Cou rtright

J . Robert Sh ive

Fi lmore George Enger, J r .

Blair Henry Siverb

Lester B urton G ol d b e rg

Donald Frederick Stegman n

Donald A rthu r Isensee

Clarence Bennett Watts

David R i cha rd Jaeger

W illiam Theodore Zier

Bachelor of Arts i n Education Eris �1arie Aasland

M oll ie Ya tes Bo th w el l

Diane Sue Adams

Ing r id S . B renncise

Sharon Cecel i a AIl"r

Evelyn L o u ise Brink

Beverly Sue Anderson

Karen Gloria Broeckel

Kathleen El i se Anderson

Mark Theodore Carlson

Terry Ray Asbjornson

S h i rley Ann Carlson

Claudette G i g i Baker

Thomas Edgar Chambers

Helen Evangeline Barnreitcr

Jo yc e McClain Chatman

Eddie George B a u m

Judith Lynne Chindgren

Sh(lron Marie Baumeister

\,Ianda June Cozad

I r ma North Bendoek

Ruth Elaine Danielson

Mitchell Jay B illings

Robert Randall Dary

Ro h er t Da v id De Bolt Ull

ice J essie DeSoto

A l ice Tuma McDonald C a rol lean McGinty

. 'onna R uth Deyton

Lee C ha rles McKnight N a d ine F. McM i l l a n

Jerry Dodgen

Kenneth D a l e Mil ler

J u d i Ann DeWeese

Gerald Vincent Dunlap

Carolyn E l a i ne Moellring

J a n ice Lynn Dyer

M i riam Harriet Muedekin�

L i n nea Joyce Eger

Carolyn Jane Myers

Mary Ly nn Ek'itrund E v e l yn Bernice E l l i o t t

Donald Clark lIIyhre

'ane), D iane E l l i o t t

Eiknr; M . EmIr

D ic k Edwa I'd N el,on J unet Lynn Nelson

M a ry A n I! Fenimore

Nancy Lee Nel son A l ice Ka a l a n d Ne;;, Gary lIIa tthew N i k k a ri

Ca role B ierman Ferri

Marilyn Adell Nordl u n d

Barbara Kay Erickson

R ic h a rd Dean Finstucn

Dorothy Ca t heri n e i'iorris

Dennise Carolyn Fredriekson

Michael Robert Norrio

Jaequelynn Ann Furlong

E\' l yn Southard O,;]lOrne

Korin Sharon Gandrud

Clara Y. Palmer

Robert J)ollgl a>i Geisler

Leslie Pa u l Pederson

Carole Jane Haaland .

J oa n Bernice I'eter,on

Maril), n Deanne H a n n u l a

Jerry Dean Poppen

D w a i ne M i l ton H a t c h

Bes;;ie l .u('ile Porteous

S a l l y M. Hatcher

Lyle May P y l e

V i r g i n i a Lea M a y Hatcher

E l l en Lou i�e LaaiJar:k Quaas

Stuart W. Hawk ins

W i l l a d ine Radke

l ka na Marie I lcnciricbon

Karen Virginia R a p p

A la n Ja mes ! loken,tad

J a n ice E l l e n R a u c ' h

Ra iner Koch I louser

.fanrt Mae Reilbdorf

lan·in Thol1l<1S Jacobso n Mel in da

nn Johnson

Robert Sherri ll Julin arleen Ingrid Karlson

Jean LaRae R iggers Marc'n Ma rie Ristuben W i l l iam Douglas Robb La r ry Dean Rodahl

!'I'[argo Anne Knud"On

Karen Kay Rommen

Elizabeth A n n Krol l

Marilyn Kaye Rudenick

J e rome Harry Larson

John O l iver R u u d

Patricia Dce Larson

SlI,an Marie Sauri

Raymond W i l l iam Ledyard

Glenda Rae Sadler

Dorothy Jean Lcc

Da l las A n ne SC' h n l e r

\Van'en Hexom Lee

E d i t h N . Skog

Ceeel ia Raye Lind

Darrell James Smith

La Von Rouerta Logan

M i c h a '" Cha rle� Smith

John Mark Lono

Marvin R a y Snell

Diane Lou Lundgren

Jame>' E. S n yrler Waneta H a c Somers

Pa tric ia O. McCarter

<JR

Donald A rth u r Swamon

Judith Ann Waters J. Marl i n W e i l

Lucille Daniel Th rasher Tina Dempster Tossey Karen Lee Vanderwarker 1

1 9

Judith A. Swenson

Ronald Allen Sw i f t .James L umher t Taylor Ka thleen Ma r ie Ta yl or Dale R i c h a rd Thompson

\'1 E

Karen Charlene We;;th e rg Marjorie Kathleen Wh isler Marion E. \Vild Helen Louise Wills R ichur'd Lind W i l fon Kathleen Lou ise Zell L in da Rae Zimmer

lor of Fine Arts V i rp;inia Elizabeth Drye r

Carol Ann Menke

Virginia Lee Langford Bachelor of Music E m i l y Lou Erickson Daniel Erik O lson

Mer ri l y Ruth Worrell

Bachelor of Science in Nursing

J udit h Diane Broderson Ju.Jy Marie Carlson Mary Louise Crocker

Pauline Constanee Elmer B ever ly Ruth Nelson Glenn l\Ia ry Ll ewel y n Griffiths Carla Aline Hansen Sylvia Diane Larson

Sharon Hose Matson Marion Helen Noffsinger A rlene Rae Olstad Mary Louise Ph elps Belly Loui,;e Su l l iva n Beverly Jean Templeton A rlene Leslie Thorne Carol Lee Wyckoff

lllaster of Arts Judd Cleveland Doughty

Dona l d Glenn Hu;;eby Dorothy Darnall L i neback

Dona l d H. POller. J r. Myr t l e Daniel Taylor

Statistical SU1JI1nary

E NRO LLM ENT-1 963- 1 964

I n

Women

Total

167

334

S en i o r,;

201

17H

379

212

189

Soph""lOres .

2 10

238

262

30'[

'WI g8

ra d u a te,;

J u n ior, F r es h m e n

566

Speeials : 1\fllsic Le,, ,on� O n l y A l l d i tors . O ther Spec ials Ex tcn.-ion Total

Reg tdar School Year .

S u m m e r Se�"ion E n r o l l m e n t , 1963 Total t u den t o C o u n t ed T w i c e ET TOTAL

ENR

LLME NT-FaIJ , 196 1-

169

1279

1 1 7:1

255 2452

311

590

901

1590

1763-

3353

134

220

35 4

1 456

1543

2999

Men

�. omen

Total

1 49

Seniors

IH2

lI(,

35H

J u n iors

IHH

1H6

:n4

S o p h o m o res .

200

209

409

Freshmen

27.1

:132

(,07

Graduates

Specia ls :

fusic Lcs.-o ns O n l y u d i t o rs ther Specials

E x tension Total Fal l 1964 Summer Session E n rollment, 1961

102

1031

1055

2086

337

727

1064

171

GEOGRAPHICAL DISTRIBUTION-Fall, 1964 Washington Oregon California Montana Idaho . North Dakota Alaska Minnesota Hawaii Colorado Iowa Wisconsin Illinois . Nevada . A rizona . Michigan Ohio Wa shi n g to n , D. C. Wyoming Indiana Maryland New Jersey North Carolina . Puerto R ico South Carolina . South Dakota Tennessee Utah Virginia Canada . Madagascar Germany Guatemala . Hong Kong . India Jama ica Japan Jordan . Kenya . Sweden . Tanganyika TOTAL

1542 178 130 M

36 29 17

16 11

8 4 4 .1 3 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

7 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2086

REUGIOUS AFFI LIATI ONS-Fal l , 1964 LUl heran

The ALC

975

LC M is,ou ri

188 89

orwegian Synod

A E LC .

3 2 1

W i;.con,in . Unclil�sified

104

Total Lu th erans

1362

Other Denominat ions 112

Pre,bYl< � r i a n

Mp.thodist B a p t ist .

79 79

at h o l ic

Epi"copuliuu Congrega t io n al . Pen tecostal . Ch ristian CO\'cnunt Cbristian Scien t ist . Lallel" Duy S a i n t,; . U n i ta r i a n . S"," " n t h Day Adventist lewish . Quaker .

O rthodox Moslem

14 16 7 6 6

5 5 4 2 1

B u ddh ist Independen t Chll rc:hes . o affil iation . on·l .uth"ran

GHA

Greek

Total

J) TOT A L

1 52 159 724 2086

Index Academic Organization . .

Changes in Registration .

Academic Preparation

Chapel a n d Class Responsi bi l i ties . .

Academic Probation

Church Officials

Ar. adcm ic Procedures

C lassification of Students

Ac:credi tn tion Acti vities

Athletic Departmental Ge nera l

. . . ._ .

Cl ubs

28 29

Coffee Shops .

29 29 29

Musical Publications Religious

153

31i

Classroom B u ildin g

28 28

. . . .. __ . ... . ._ . .

Honorary

1 5 1 , 152 11

28, 29 27

C ol l eg e Entrance Ex am ination Board Tests

College of A r t s and Sciences

.,8

College of Profc"si onal a n d Graduate

Studies

C ol l eg e Union B u i l ding

Columbia C e nte r

C o m m u n i t y Li fe .

A dvanced Placement Program .

Cost, Estimate

Auditors

Counseling Services

Early Acceptance . .

15 14

30 18 26 34

Early Admission .

Graduate Studies .

Art

Procedures

13 15

B i o l o gy ... Business Administration .

Chemistry

Eco nom ics

90 94

E du c at io n

Adlllinistrative Officer,:

A dm is si o n s

Special Students Tra n sfer Students Advanced Placement Program A dvisers

10, 166 11

Alumni Association Art Building .

Arts and Sciences, College o f

Athletics Automobiles

. ._ . . . . . .

. . .. . _

Board o f College Education

Calendar

_ .

Certification

. _

. . . . ...._ . . .

107

109

Greek

108

6, 7

. 1 0, 177 . . . .._

Foreign La n g ua ge s

G erman

_..â&#x20AC;˘.

97 10.3

Campus

English

108

151

Business Administration, School o f

. 1 52

Board of R egent s . Book Store . B u i l d i ngs, Un iversity .

78Âˇ149 78

Classics F ren ch

Board and Room

Course Load . . . .. .. Courses of Instruction .

. . . .. . . . ... .. . . 49, 50

. .. .

1 10

Latin

108

Norwegian

1 10

R ussia n

III

S pa n i s h

111

Gen er a l Eng i n eer i ng Geograp hy

.. 1 1 1

.. . . . 1 1 1 . . . ... . 1 1 2

Geology Health and Physical Education . . . . . .1 1 2 . . .__ . . . . . . ... . 1 1 7 . . . . . ._ . . . _ _ . . . . . . H ist o ry

1 74

Journalism .

120

Government of the Un iversity

Mathematics

120

Grade Points

M u s ic Nursing Philosophy Phy�ic.al Education Physics Political Science Psychology Religion Science ( General ) Sociology peech Cramer Cottage

123

Grades

128

Graduate,

1 29

Graduate Studies, Division of

112

Graduation Honors

Graduation Requirements

133

Also, see the Colleges and Schools Gymnasium ._

Harstad Hall

136 139 142 142 146 12

3H, 45, 47, 65, 69 Degn'es 20 Depository for Students 28 Dramatics

Eastvold Chapel Education, School o f

11 _ __

_ _ __

Eligibility

47 36 27

Emp loyment, Student Enrollment

171

Entrance Requirements

13, 14

Evening Classes

Evergreen Court

Faculty

10, 154, 164

Fac u l ty Commi t tee,.;

165

Fees General

:'vIllsic Special Fifth Year Requirements Fi nances Financial A i d Fine and A p p li e d Arts, School o f Food Service F'o," Hall

C.eogra ph ical D istribution

9 35

35 ( 1963 )

Health Servic.e, Student

12, 25

H istory of the University ..

Honor Courses

Honors at Entrance

Housing

Ivy Court

Late Afternoon and Evening Classes 32 1 1 , 164 Library 22 Loan Funds 8

Location of University

l'IIajors Nlustcl· of Arts Degree

Medical Technology Course Mooring Mast

National D e fense Education Act

Nursing, School of

Orientation

Ownershi p and Support

12 1 70

22 78

Objectives o f tbe University

Numbering System

74 40

North Hall

49 21

166-169 73

4 23

Pacific Northwest Intercollegiate 28 At hletic Conference 43 , 44 Parish Work 19 Payments 12 Pflueger Hall

1 75 Physical Examination

Special Students

Physician and Nu rse

Standar d Certification

Placement Service

Statistical S u m ma r y

Pre-Professional Programs

171

Student A ffa i rs

Pre-Dental

Pre-Engi n eeri n g

4 1 , 42

Pre-Law

Stu dent Body

Student Congregation

Student Health Center

1 2 , 25

Pre-T\<!cdicine

42, 43

Pre-Theology

Student Organizations

President's Re5idence

Stuclent Publications

Pri n c i p al 's Credentials

S tudent Teach i n g

Programs for Car�ers

St llen H a l l

Summer Sess i o n

Sw i mllling Pool

Symhols

Refunds Register, The Registration R e l i giolIs A ff i l i a t i o n

Requirements, Entrance Requirements, Graduation Residence !-I a l l s R o o m AS!:ii�nments

19 151

.3 4 171 13, 14 37 12, 3 ]

.1 0

Sa g a

Scho l a rshi p Hequ i rements

Scholarsh i p s

2 1 , 22

School of Business A d m inistration

4·1

School of Education

School of F i n e and A p plied A rts

School of Nursi n g

Sch e d ul i n /,:

Student Loan Funds

22 27-29 29

52-51

Tahl e of Contents Tacoma - P ierce A dm in istration

B u i l d i n /,: T a l e n t A wards

Tcar: I " , ,' Educa tion

52-5 1

Testi n g Service

Tuition

University, The

!l 11

U niversity B u i l di n gs

U ni versi ty Cos ts

Univers i t y Requirements

Upper Division

Veterans Affairs .

26 12

Science Hall

Warehouse and Shops .

Social Work

West H a l l

South Hall

W i thdrawal from Courses

12 _.